PREFACE

This book of Physics, as the title indicates, comprehensive study material for CET and
COMEDK Examinations. The aim of this book is to cover the First and Second year PUC
syllabus and illustrative examples with their solutions compiled to provide reliable guidance
to candidate appearing CET and COMEDK Examinations conducted in Karnataka. Some extra
information is provided the students for competitive exams like AIEEE and JEE.

The book contains extensive set of questions on various topics of the syllabus; these
questions are intended to assist the students to learn the topics and answering questions of
different types. Each chapter presented as a synopsis and end of the each chapters answers
are provided for one mark questions. In addition to the various types of examples, the
Practice questions which have appeared in the previous years’ exam papers and additional
expected questions for the coming exam with key answers provided.

We are sure that a diligent study of the book will enable the candidates to take the Entrance
examinations successfully.

We are extremely grateful to the Management of SJCIT, Chickballpur for their

encouragement and support for preparing the Book.

We look forward to interactive discussion and constructive suggestion for further

improvements.

Dr. Rajashekara K M
Prof. Manjunatha B C
Prof. Sanjay V
Dr. Pushpa N
Department of Physics
S J C Institute of Technology
Chickballapur
 CONTENTS
Chapters Page number
MECHANICS 1………………………………………..……………….…………………………………………… 01

MECHANICS 2…………………………………………………………………….…………....................... 17

HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS ………..………………………………………………………………… 38

FLUID MECHANICS ………………………………………………….…………………………………………. 56

WAVES AND OSCILLATIONS ………………………..……………………………………………………. 70

ELECTROSTATICS …………….…………………………………………………………………………………. 84

CAPACITOR………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 104

MAGNETIC MATERIALS ………………………………………………………………………………………. 117

ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION…………………………………………………………………………. 146

OPTICS……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 161

REFRACTION OF LIGHT THROUGH PRISM……………………………………………………………. 174

REFRACTION THROUGH CURVED SURFACE ………………………………………………………… 182

WAVE OPTICS INTERFERENCE OF LIGHT……………………………………………………………… 195

ATOM MODELS………………………………….………………………………………………………………. 205

NUCLEAR PHYSICS AND RADIOACTIVITY ………………………………….…........................ 221

REFERENCES
Physics text book for class XI and XII (PUC), NCERT and content related uploads in the
various websites.
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

MECHANICS-1
1. Scalars and Vectors
Scalars: A physical quantity having only magnitude and no specific direction is called a scalar.

Example: length, mass, time, work etc.,

Vectors: A physical quantity having both magnitude, specific direction and obeying vector law of
addition is called a vector. A vector quantity can be represented by a straight line with an arrow
head at one of its ends.

Example: Displacement, velocity, acceleration etc.,

Types of vectors:

1. Zero vector: Any vector whose magnitude is zero is called a zero vector.
2. Unit vector: Any vector whose magnitude is unity is called a unit vector.
3. Equal vectors: Two vectors are said to be equal vectors if both of them have same
magnitude and direction.
4. Negative vector: The negative vector of any vector is a vector having the same magnitude but
opposite direction.
Addition of Vectors:

  
The sum of given two vectors a & b is a new vector r called resultant
   C
vector. r  a  b

 b
r
1. Triangle law: It states that if 2 vectors of the same kind are
A  B
represented in magnitude and direction by the two sides of a triangle a
taken in order then- their resultant is represented in magnitude and direction by the third side
     
of the triangle taken in reverse order. a  b  r or AB BC  AC .
2. Parallelogram law: It states that if 2 vectors of the same kind
D C
are represented in magnitude and direction by the 2 adjacent
 
sides of a parallelogram drawn from a point then their resultant b r

is represented in magnitude and direction by the diagonal of the A 
 B
a
  
parallelogram passing through that point. r  a  b or
  
AC  AB BC

1
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

 b sin
r  a 2  b 2  2ab cos , tan 
a  b cos

Resolution of a vector in 2 dimensions:

Y
  `
A  A x  Ay  A xˆi  A y ˆj
 
Ay A
where iˆ and ĵ are unit vectors along X and Y axes respectively, 
O 
   Ax X
Ax & Ay are the components of vector A along two coordinate axes.

 
A x  Ax  A cos , A y  Ay  A sin

A2  Ax 2  Ay 2

tan θ  Ay /Ax

     
Subtraction of two vectors: a  b  a    b   r .
 

Product of two vectors: There are two types of vector multiplication

Scalar product or dot product: Product of two vectors yields a scalar quantity.
     
A . B  A B cosθ  AB cosθ . Where A and B are the magnitudes of A and B and  is the angle

   
between them. A B  B  A , ˆi  ˆi  ˆj  ˆj  kˆ  kˆ  1, ˆi  ˆj  ˆj  kˆ  kˆ  ˆi  0

Vector Product or Cross product: Product of two vectors yields a vector quantity.
    
A B  A B sin θ  AB sin θ nˆ  C

  
n̂ is a unit vector such that A, B and n̂ form a right handed system, C is a vector whose magnitude
  
is C  ABsin and is in the direction perpendicular to the plane containing the vectors A and B

   
   A B A B    
such that A, B and C form a right handed system. nˆ   , A B   B A,
AB sin  
A B

Units and Dimensions

 A physical quantity is one which can be measured and given in terms of numerical values.

2
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

 Physical quantities can be classified into:

(a) Fundamental quantities: Physical quantities which do not depend upon any other quantity
are called fundamental quantities. There are seven fundamental quantities namely length, mass,
time, electric current, temperature, amount of substance and luminous intensity.

(b) Derived quantities: Physical quantities which can be expressed in terms of fundamental
quantities are called derived quantities. Example: Velocity, forces etc.,

 Units: Standard quantity in terms of which a physical quantity is measured.

Units chosen for the measurement of fundamental quantities are called fundamental units and
those chosen for the measurement of derived quantities are called derived units. There are
three systems of units.

(a) C.G. S (Centimeter- gram- second)

(b) M.K.S (meter – Kilogram – Second)

(c) F.P.S (Foot –pound-second)

 Dimensions of a physical quantity are the powers or exponents to which the fundamental Units

must be raised to obtain the unit of that quantity. Example: velocity   distance   L  M 0
LT 1 
time T 
 Dimensional analysis can be used to:
(a) Check the correctness of an equation

(b) Convert unit of a given derived physical quantity from one system to another and

(c) Deduce the relation connecting physical quantities.

Motion in One Dimensional Motion

The motion in which a body moves in one particular direction with respect to point of reference is
known as 1D motion.

 Displacement of a particle is its change of position in particular direction . When a body

returns to its starting point displacement is zero. Displacement may be equal to or less than
distance travelled but never greater than distance travelled. It is a vector quantity.
 Speed: Distance travelled by a particle in unit time. It is a scalar quantity.
Total distance travelled
(a) Average speed 
total time taken

(b) If a body covers first half of the distance with speed a and second half with speed b ,

3
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

2ab
Average speed 
ab

 Velocity: Rate of displacement with respect to time. It is a vector quantity. (a)

displacement
Average velocity 
time taken

(b) If a body covers first half of the distance with velocity v1 and second half with velocity v2 ,

Average velocity v  2v1v2

v1  v2

(c) If a body moves with a uniform velocity v1 for time t1 and v2 for time t2 .

Average velocity  v1t1  v2t2

t1  t2

initial velocity  final velocity

(d) For a body moving with uniform acceleration, Average velocity 
2


 ds 
(e) v  where s - displacement.
dt

 
 dv d2 s
 Acceleration: Rate of change of velocity with respect to time. a   .
dt dt2

 Uniform acceleration
(a) For a body starting from rest and moving with uniform acceleration, distance travelled 
square of time i.e., S  t 2 .

(b) For a body starting from rest and moving with uniform acceleration, if S1, S2 , S3 are distances

travelled in 1s,2s,3s respectively , then S1 : S2 : S3  12 : 22 : 32 .

Equations of motion:

For a body moving with uniform acceleration

v  u  at v  final velocity, u  initial velocity

v 2  u 2  2aS a  uniform acceleration, t  time

1 2
S  ut  at S  distance travelled
2

a2n  1
1
Sn  u  Sn  distance travelled in nth second
2

4
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

S2  S1
a S1 and S2 are distances travelled in t seconds and next t seconds.
t2

For a body falling freely under gravity a  g 

v  u  gt

v 2  u 2  2 gS

1 2
S  ut  gt
2

g 2n  1
1
Sn  u 
2

For a body rising vertically against gravity a   g 

v  u  gt

v 2  u 2  2 gS

1 2
S  ut  gt
2

g 2n  1
1
Sn  u 
2

 (a)In absence of air resistance, a body projected vertically upwards, time of ascent= time of
descent
(b) If air resistance is considered, time of ascent is less than time of descent.

 Velocity on reaching the ground= velocity of projection.

 The magnitude of velocity at any point in its path is the same while a body rises or falls freely.
 If a body falls freely from the top of a tower of height h and simultaneously another body is
projected vertically upwards from the bottom of the tower, with a velocity u then they meet
h
after   seconds.
u

Displacement - Time curve:

5
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

Velocity - Time Curve: Area under the vt curve gives the distance travelled by the body.

Relative Velocity
Relative velocity means velocity of one object with respect to the other object.
 If two bodies A and B move with velocities u and v in the same direction.
(a) relative velocity of A with respect to B  u  v
(b) relative velocity of B with respect to A  v  u
 If two bodies A and B move in opposite directions, with velocities u and v respectively the
relative velocity of one body with respect to the other  u  v .
 If the two bodies move perpendicular to each other with velocities u and v respectively their

relative velocity  u 2  v 2

 If they move at an angle  with respect to each other then, relative velocity  u 2  v 2  2uv cos .

Newton’s Laws of Motion

I Law: Every body continues to be in its state of rest or of uniform motion until and unless it is
acted upon by some external force.

The first law leads to the concept of inertia and force.

Inertia is that property of a body by virtue of which a body preserves its state of rest or of uniform
motion.

Force is that external agency which changes or tends to change the state of rest or of uniform
motion of a body along a straight line.

II Law: Rate of change of momentum of a body is directly proportional to the force and is in the
direction of the force.

Momentum of a body is the quantity of motion possessed by a body and is given by the product of
its mass and velocity i.e, p  mv . It is a vector.

6
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur


 dp  
F and F  m a , If F  0 , Velocity = constant, acceleration = 0
dt

 
III Law: Action and reaction are equal and opposite. F12   F21

Law of Conservation of Momentum: It states that total momentum of an isolated system

remains constant i.e. if the system is without external forces net momentum is constant.

Total final momentum P2  of an isolated system is equal to the total initial momentum P1 
 

 
i.e, P2  P1

Basic forces in nature are:

1. Gravitational force
2. Electrostatic force
3. Magnetic force
4. Nuclear force

Spring force: Spring force is the restoring force arising because of compression or extension of
spring.

Spring force, F   x  or F  kx

Where x is the displacement, k is called the force constant. The energy stored in the spring is
1 2
E kx .
2

Inertial and Non-inertial frames: An inertial frame is one in which Newton’s first law is valid.

A frame of reference moving with acceleration with respect to an inertial frame is called a non-
inertial frame. Newton’s laws of motion are not valid in a non inertial frame.

Problems

1. The scalar and vector products of 2 vectors are 24 3 and 72 respectively. The angle between
them is
(a) 60 (b) 30 (c) 90 (d) 120 

7
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

2. A vector of magnitude 100 units is inclined at 60 to another vector of magnitude 80 units.
Their dot product is
(a) 400 units (b) 40 units (c) 4000 units (d) zero

3. A bird flies at an angle of 60 to the horizontal. Its horizontal component of velocity is 10 ms 1 .
Its vertical component is ---------- ms1 .

(a) 10 3 (b) 10 (c) 5 (d) 26

3

4. A vector 0.4iˆ  0.8Jˆ  ckˆ is a unit vector. c is

(a) 0.2 (b) 0.8 (c) 0.4 (d) 0.6

   
5. If A  2iˆ  3 ˆj  k and B  3iˆ  5 ˆj  nkˆ and A and B are perpendicular then value of n is

(a) 21 (b) 3 (c) 9 (d) 21

6. If A and B are nonzero vectors and obey the relation A  B  A  B , then the angle between

them is

(a) 0 (b) 60 (c) 90 (d) 120 

^ ^
7. Consider a vector A  3 i  4 j . Another vector perpendicular to A is

^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^
(a) 3i  4 j (b) 4i 3 j (c)  3 i (d)  4 k

8. The numerical ratio of displacement to distance is

(a) always greater than one (b) always less than one

(c) always equal to one (d) equal to or less than one

9. At what angle must be the forces P  Q and P  Q act so that the resultant is 3P 2  Q 2 ?

(a) 0 (b) 45 (c) 60 (d) 90

10. The angle between iˆ  ˆj and ˆj  kˆ is

(a) 30 (b) 45 (c) 60 (d) 90

11. The resultant of two forces has magnitude of 10 N . One of the forces has a magnitude of 5 3 N

and makes an angle of 30 with the resultant . The magnitude of the other force is

8
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

(a) 5 3 N (b) 2 3 N (c) 10 3 N (d) 5N

12. The magnitude of the resultant of two vectors of magnitudes 3 units and 4 units in 5 units. What
is the angle between two vectors?
  3
(a) (b) (c) (d) 
4 2 4

13. The resultant of two vectors A and B subtends an angle of 45 with either of them. The
magnitude of the resultant is
(a) zero (b) 2 A (c) A (d) 2A

14. If iˆ and ĵ are unit vectors along x  axis and y axis respectively, the magnitude of vector iˆ  ˆj
will be

(a) 1 (b) 2 (c) 3 (d) 2

15. Which of the following quantity is scalar?

(a) electric field (b) electrostatic potential (c) angular momentum (d) velocity

16. Two vectors having different magnitudes

(a) have their directions opposite (b) may have their resultant zero

(c) cannot have their resultant zero (d) none of the above

 
17. Consider two vectors F1  2iˆ  5kˆ and F2  3 ˆj  4kˆ . The magnitude of the scalar product of these
vectors is

(a) 20 (b) 23 (c) 5 33 (d) 26


18. The position vector of a particle is r  a cost iˆ  a sint  ˆj . The velocity vector of the particle is
(a) parallel to the position vector (b) perpendicular to the position vector

(c) directed towards the origin (d) directed away from the origin.

 
19. Find the torque of a force F  3iˆ  ˆj  5kˆ acting at the point r  7iˆ  3 ˆj  kˆ .

(a) 14iˆ  38 ˆj  16 kˆ (b) 4iˆ  4 ˆj  6kˆ (c)  21iˆ  4 ˆj  4kˆ (d)

 14iˆ  34 ˆj  16 kˆ

20. The angle between two vectors 2i  3 j  k and i  2 j  4k is

9
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

(a) 0 (b) 90 (c) 180  (d) None

21. The resultant of two forces 3P and 2P is R . If the first force is doubled then the resultant is also
doubled. The angle between the two forces is
(a) 180  (b) 90 (c) 120  (d) 60

    
22. Three vectors satisfy the relation A  B  0 and A  C  0 then A is parallel to
     
(a) C (b) B (c) BC (d) BC

 a 
23. In the gas equation  P  V  b   RT , where T is absolute temperature, P s pressure V is
 V2 

volume; the dimensions of constant 'a' are


(a) ML1T 2  
(b) ML5T 2  (c) L3  
(d) ML3T 1 
24. The dimensions of quantities in one of the following pairs are the same. Identify the pair
(a) light year and wavelength (b) angular momentum and work

(c) light year and year (d) force and Young’s modulus

25. The equation of state for n moles of an ideal gas is PV  nRT , where R is the universal gas
constant and P,V and T have the usual meanings. What are the dimensions of R ?

(a) M 0 LT 2 K 1 mol-1 (b) ML2T 2 K 1 mol-1

(c) M 1L2T 2 K 1 mol -1 (d) ML2T 2 K 1 mol-1

1
26. The dimensional of are the same as those of
0 0

(a) velocity (b) acceleration (c) force (d) energy

27. The dimensional formula for the modulus of rigidity is

(a) ML2T2 (b) ML1T3 (c) ML2T2 (d) ML1T2

28. The de Broglie wavelength associated with a particle of mass m and energy E is h 2mE . The

dimensional formula of Planck’s constant h is

(a) M 2 L2T 2 (b) ML2T 2 (c) MLT 2 (d) ML2T 1

29. The density of wood is 0.5 gm cc in CGS system of unit. The corresponding value in MKS unit is

(a) 500 (b) 0.5 (c) 5 102 (d) 5000

10
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

30. The gravitational force F between two masses m1 and m2 separated by a distance r is given by
Gm1m2
F , where G is the universal gravitational constant. What are the dimensions of G ?
r2

(a) M 1L2T 3 (b) M 1L3T 2 (c) ML3T 2 (d) ML2T 3

31. Which of the following pairs has different dimensions ?

(a) momentum and impulse (b) couple and work

(c) energy and power (d) none of these

32. Which of the following does not represent time?

(a) microsecond (b) solar day (c) Iunar day (d) light year

33. Which of the following is dimensionless quantity?

(a) Stress (b) Strain (c) Amount of heat (d) Specific
heat

1 2 3

34. The dimensional formula M L T represents 
(a) power (b) momentum (c) kinetic energy (d) pressure

35. The units of energy are

(a) electron-volt (b) calorie (c) joule (d) all the
above

36. Parsec is the unit of

(a) time (b) angle (c) distance (d)
velocity

37. Which one of the following is a unit of angular velocity?

2 3 2
(a) m s (b) kg m (c) rad s (d) rad s

38. If y    t  t 2 , where y is in m and t in s the unit of  is

(a) s 2 (b) ms 2 (c) ms1 (d) m

B
39. The refractive index of a material is given by the equation n  A , where A and B are
2

constants. The dimensional formula for B is


(a) M 0 L2T 1  
(b) M 0 L2T 0  
(c) M 0 L2T 2  
(d) M 0 L2T 0 
40. a  0.0030 m, b  2.40m, c  4000 . The number of significant figures in a, b and c are respectively

11
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

(a) 3,2,1 (b) 2,3,4 (c) 4,3,4 (d) 4,2,1

41. The physical quantity having the same dimensions as Planck’s constant h is
(a) force (b) Boltzmann constant (c) angular momentum (d) linear momentum

42. The dimensional formula for inductance is

(a) ML2T 2 A1 (b) ML2T 1A2 (c) ML2T A2 (d) ML2T 2 A2

43. The distance travelled by a body starting from rest and moving with uniform acceleration varies
as

(a) t (b) t (c) 1 t (d) t 2

44. The area under the velocity time curve gives the

(a) distance travelled (b) velocity (c) time taken .(d) all these

45. For a body freely falling under gravity, is constant

(a) velocity (b) acceleration (c) displacement (d) speed

46. A body is thrown vertically upwards with a velocity u . The maximum height reached varies as

(a) u 2 (b) u (c) u (d) 1 u 2

47. A motor cyclist covers 1/4th of the journey at a speed of 30 kmph, next ½ of journey at 40 kmph
and the rest at 60 kmph. The average speed of the entire journey is
(a) 40 kmph (b) 50 kmph (c) 80 kmph (d) 130/3 kmph

48. A body starting from rest moves with a constant acceleration for 20s. If it travels a distance S1

in first 10s and distance S2 in next 10s

(a) S1  S2 (b) S2  2S1 (c) S2  3S1 (d) S2  4S1

49. An iron ball and a wooden ball are released from a height in vacuum simultaneously. If t1 and t 2

be the times taken by the two balls then

(a) t1  t2 (b) t2  t2 (c) t1  t2 (d) t1 t2

50. A body released from a great height falls freely towards earth. Another body is released from the
same height exactly one seconds later. The separation between the two bodies two seconds
after the release of the second body is
(a) 19.6 m (b) 24.5 m (c) 4.9 m (d) 9.8 m

12
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

51. A balloon starts rising from the ground with an acceleration of 1.25 m/s 2 . After 8s, a stone is

released from the balloon. The stone will (taking g  10 m s 2 )

(a) reach the ground in 4s (b) begin to move down after being released
(c) will have a displacement of 50 m (d) cover a distance of 40 m in reaching the ground

52. From the top of a tower a stone is thrown up which reaches the ground in a time t .A second
stone thrown down with the same speed reaches the ground in a time t2 . A third stone released
from rest from the same location reaches the ground in a time t3 . Then

t1  t2
(a) t3  (b) t3  t1t2 (c) 1  1  1 (d) t32  t12  t22
2 t3 t2 t1

53. A student is standing at a distance of 50 metre from the bus. As soon as the bus begins its
motion with an acceleration of 1 ms-1 the student starts running towards the bus with a uniform
velocity u . Assuming the motion to be along a straight road, the minimum value of u , so that
the student is able to catch the bus is :
(a) 9 ms 1 (b) 5 ms 1 (c) 12 ms1 (d) 10 ms1

54. From the top of a tower two stones, whose masses are in the ratio 1 : 2 are thrown – one
straight up with an initial speed u and the second straight down with the same speed u . Then,
neglecting air resistance
(a) the heavier stone hits the ground with a higher speed
(b) the lighter stone hits the ground with a higher speed
(c) both the stones will have the same speed when they hit the ground
(d) the speed can’t be determined with the given data

55. Look at the graph (a) to (d) carefully and indicate which of these possibly represents one
dimensional motion of a particle

(a) (b) (c) (d)

56. A body is said to have acceleration, if

(a) its speed changes

(b) its direction of motion changes

13
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

(c) both the speed and the direction of motion change

(d) its speed or its direction of motion or both change

57. A ball is thrown vertically up with initial velocity u . The velocity-time curve of the ball during its
time of flight, neglecting the air resistance, is

v v v v

58. T
t

t t t v ms 1

(1 (2 (3 12
(4
he graph
) shown in the vt ) of a car moving along
curve ) a straight line. )
Choose the correct statement out of the following t s
2 5 9
(a) the car accelerates, stops and reverses

(b) the car is driven for a total time of 16s

(c) the car accelerates at 6ms 2 for the first 2 seconds

(d) the car decelerates at 12ms 2 for the last 4 seconds

59. A body dropped from the top of a tower hits the ground bounces to half the height. The
corresponding position time graph is

s s s s

60.
Equ
t t t t
al
(1 (2 (3 (4
forc
) ) ) )
es act on two bodies at rest having masses m1 and m2 m1  m2  for equal intervals of time. Then,

which of the following is true?

(a) m1 has larger final velocity (b) m2 has larger final velocity

(c) both have same final kinetic energy (d) both (a) and (c)

14
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

61. A player catches a cricket ball of mass 0.1 kg moving with a speed of 20 m/s. If the ball is in
contact with the hand for 0.1 s, the force exerted by the ball on the hands of the player is
(a) 2 N (b) 20 N (c) 200 N (d) 0.05 N

62. A machine gun weighing 10kg fires per second 6 bullets each weighing 30 g . The speed of the

bullets is 400 ms1 . The force required to hold the gun in position is
(a) 12 N (b) 72 N (c) 720 N (d) 7200 N

63. A ball moving at 9ms1 strikes an identical stationary ball. After collision each ball moves along a
direction making an angle of 30 with the original direction of motion. The speed of each ball is

(a) 3 3ms 1 (b) 4.5ms 1 (c) 9ms1 (d) 3ms 1

 
64. A force F  5iˆ  6 ˆj  4kˆ acting on a body, produces a displacement S  6iˆ  5kˆ work done by the
force is
(a) 10 units (b) 18 units (c) 11 units (d) 15 units

65. For ordinary terrestrial experiments, the observer in an inertial frame in the following cases is
i. the pilot of an aeroplane which is taking off
ii. a cyclist negotiating a sharp curve
iii. a child revolving in a giant wheel
iv. a driver in a sports car moving with a constant high speed of 200 kmh -1 on a straight road
66. A student unable to answer a question on Newton’s laws of motion attempts to pull himself up
by tugging on his hair. He will not succeed
(a) as the force exerted is small (b) the frictional force while gripping, is small

(c) Newton’s law of inertia is not applicable to living beings

(d) as the force applied is internal to the system

67. A block of mass 15 kg is suspended through two light spring balances as shown
in figure. Now
(a) both the balances read 7.5 kg

(b) both the balances read 15 kg

(c) the upper balance reads 10 kg and the lower one 5 kg

(d) the upper balance reads 5 kg and lower one 10 kg

15
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

68. A rocket works on the principle of

(a) conservation of linear momentum (b) conservation of mass

(c) conservation of energy (d) conservation of angular momentum

69. The force exerted by the floor of the lift on the foot of the person is more than the actual weight
of the person, when the lift
(a) is moving up and speeding down (b) is moving up and speeding up

(c) is moving down and speeding up (d) is moving down with constant speed

70. A person weighing 60 kg is standing in a lift which is moving upwards with acceleration 4.9ms 2 .
The apparent weight of the person is
(a) 90 kg (b) 60 kg (c) 45 kg (d) 30 kg

71. A rocket, set for vertical launching has a mass of 50 kg and contains 450 kg of fuel. It can have a

maximum exhaust speed of 2kms1 . If g  10 ms 2 what should be the minimum rate of fuel
consumption to just lift if off the launching pad.

(a) 2.5 kgs 1 (b) 5 kgms 1 (c) 7.5 kgs 1 (d) 10 kgs 1

Answers of mechanics 1
1a 2c 3a 4a 5c 6c 7d 8d 9c 10 b
11 d 12 b 13 b 14 b 15 b 16 c 17 a 18 b 19 a 20 b
21 c 22 c 23 b 24 a 25 c 26 a 27 d 28 d 29 a 30 c
31 c 32 d 33 b 34 a 35 c 36 d 37 c 38 b 39 d 40 b
41 c 42 d 43 d 44 a 45 b 46 a 47 a 48 c 49 a 50 b
51 a 52 b 53 d 54 c 55 d 56 d 57 d 58 c 59 c 60 b
61 b 62 b 63 a 64 a 65 d 66 d 67 b 68 a 69 b 70 a

16
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

MECHANICS-2

Friction
The property by virtue of which an opposing force is brought into play between two rough surfaces in
contact with each other and which opposes the relative motion between them is known as friction.
The force is called the frictional force.
Frictional force
(i) is a contact force. It acts tangential to the surfaces in contact.
(ii) is a self adjusting force.
(iii) Operates between (a) two solids in contact (b) a solid and a fluid and (c) two fluids.
(iv) is produced due to intermolecular interactions between the two bodies.
Co-efficient of friction  

It is defined as the ratio of the force of friction F f  to the normal (R) i.e.,

Ff

R

The commonly used co-efficient of friction are

Co-efficient of static friction: It is the ratio of the magnitude of limiting friction to the normal
f s (max)
reaction for any two surfaces in contact.  s 
R

Co-efficient of Kinetic friction: It is the ratio of the magnitude of kinetic friction to the normal
fk
reaction for any two surfaces in contact. k  .
R

R
 The values of s and k depend on the nature of the two
R1 
surfaces in contact. max A
fs
•
 Generally k is less than s .
B


Angle of friction: It is the angle which the resultant of the force of limiting friction f s (max) and the
 
normal reaction R makes with the normal reaction R . It is given by, tan  s .

Angle of repose: It is the angle that an inclined plane makes with the horizontal when a body
placed on it just starts sliding down. It is equal to the angle of friction.
 Acceleration of a body sliding down a rough inclined plane making an angle  with the horizontal
is given by a  g sin  k cos  .

17
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

 Work done is sliding a body up an inclined plane making an angle  with the horizontal is given
by, W  mg k cos  sin S .

Where m is the mass of the body and S , the displacement. If the body is moved down the
inclined plane with constant speed then W  mg k cos  sin S .

Motion in two and Three Dimensions

Projectile Motion: An object thrown from a height, an object thrown up in the air, water jet
coming from the opening of a water tank, firing of a canon, motion of charged particle in the electric
field can be the example of projectile motion. The curved path along which the projectile travels is
called its trajectory. The trajectory of a projectile is a parabola.

If u is the velocity of projection and  is the angle of projection, the horizontal component of
velocity  u cos . It remains constant. The vertical component of velocity u sin . Its value changes as
the body rises or falls.
 Equation of path or trajectory is

y  tan  x 
1 g
x2
2 u 2 cos 2 

u 2 sin2 
 Maximum height H 
2g

u 2 sin 2
 Horizontal range R 
g

Range is maximum when   45 .

For a given range R there are two angles of projection one of them being the compliment of the
other.
2u sin
 Time of flight T  2t 
g

Where t  time of ascent or time of descent

 Maximum range 4 x (maximum height)

Uniform circular motion: Speed remains constant through the uniform circular motion e.g. hands
of a watch. The acceleration experienced by the particle in uniform circular motion is called
centripetal acceleration and is directed towards the centre of the circle.

v2 mv 2
Centripetal acceleration ac  . The centripetal force acting on the particle F  .
r r

The centripetal force acting on a body does not increase its kinetic energy. Work done by the force
0.

18
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

Motion in a Vertical Circle: When a body of mass m tied to one end of a string is rotated in a
vertical circle of radius r with a uniform speed v it is found that.

mv 2
1. Tension in the string is least when the body is at the highest point i.e., TH   mg
r

mv 2
2. Tension in the string is maximum when the body is at the lowest point i.e., TL   mg
r

3. The minimum velocity at highest point is gr

4. The maximum velocity at lowest point is 5 gr

Banking of roads: The outer edge of a curved road is raised over the inner edge to avoid the
overturning of a vehicle. This is called banking of roads. The angle  made by the tilted track with
the horizontal is called angle of banking.

v2
tan 
rg

r  radius of the circular track

v  speed of the vehicle.

Work, Power and Energy

Work is said to be done if the component of an applied

force F displaces a body in the direction of that
 
component of the force i.e. W  F  s  Fs cos . Where
s is displacement.

Work is a scalar quantity. Its S.I. unit is joule (J).

 If the force and displacement are at right angles to each other, work done W  0 .
 Work done is independent of the path and the time taken.

 Work done is positive when   90  

 Work done is negative when   90  

 Work done in raising a body of mass m through a height h vertically upwards against gravity
W  mgh .
 Work done in moving a body of mass m through a distance of L along an inclined plane
(L=length of plane)  mgl sin  , where  is the angle made by the plane with the horizontal.
 Work done in pulling the bob of a simple pendulum of length l so that it makes an angle  with
the vertical  W  mgl 1  cos  , m  mass of the bob.

W
Power is a defined as the rate of doing work. If W is the work done in time t , then power P  .
t
S.I. unit of power is watt (W).

19
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur


Instantaneous power P 
dW
dt
F
dr
dt
 
 F v  
Energy is the capacity to do work. It is a scalar quantity. Its S.I. unit is joule.
Mechanical energy can be classified into (a) potential energy and (b) kinetic energy.
Potential Energy = mgh
1 2
Potential energy of a spring = k x , where k  spring constant.
2

1 2
Kinetic energy of a body of mass m moving with a velocity v is mv .
2

1 p2
K.E.  mv 2  , where p  mv  linear momentum of the body .
2 2m

Work energy principle: W  K .E. f  K .E.i , where K.E.i is initial Kinetic energy, K.E. f is final Kinetic
energy and W is the work done.
xf

Work done by a variable force is W 

 F xdx
xi

Law of conservation of energy: Energy can neither be created nor destroyed but it can be
changed from one form to another.
Elastic and Inelastic Collisions: Collision is an interaction between two or more bodies in which
sudden changes of momenta take place.
In an elastic collision the initial kinetic energy is equal to the final kinetic energy.
In an inelastic collision the final kinetic energy is not equal to the initial kinetic energy.

Coefficient of Restitution: During a head on collision between two bodies the ratio of relative
velocity after collision to relative velocity before collision is a constant and is called the coefficient
of restitution.
v2  v1
e where u1 and u2 are the velocities of the two bodies before collision and v1 and v2 their
u2  u1
velocities after collision.

h2
 If a ball dropped from a height h1 rebounds to a height h2 , then e  .
h1

 e  1 for elastic collision, 0  e  1 for inelastic collision, e  0 for perfectly inelastic collision.

Rotational motion and rigid body dynamics


Angular velocity -   , where  is the angular displacement in time t .
t

2n
If the body completes n revolutions in time t ,   .
t

20
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

Angular acceleration  : If the angular velocity of a body increases from 1 to 2 in time t ,

 2  1

t

Relation between angular acceleration and linear acceleration

a  r , where a is the linear acceleration and  the angular acceleration of a particle at a distance r
from the axis of rotation.
Equations of angular motion:
o =angular velocity at time t  0

  angular velocity at time t

 = constant angular acceleration

  angular displacement at time t .

  o  t

1
   ot  t 2
2

 2  o2  2

Angular Momentum For a particle of mass m rotating in a circle of radius r and centre O , the
   
instantaneous angular momentum L of the particle with respect to O is L  r p .
 
Magnitude of L  mvr sin  , where  is the angle between r and p .

SI unit of angular momentum is kgm 2 s 1

Moment of inertia of a rigid body about a given axis is the sum of the products of the masses of the
n
various particles and squares of their perpendicular distances from the axis I  m r
i 1
i i
2
.

SI unit of moment of inertia is kg m 2 .

Radius of gyration: (K) of a rigid body is the distance of the point from the axis of rotation at
which the entire mass M of the body appears to be concentrated so that is moment of inertia
about the axis I  MK 2 .
Radius of gyration about an axis is the root mean square distance of the particle of the body.

r12  r22  r32  .....  rn2

K
n

Torque or Moment of a force about a point is the rotating effect of the force about that point.
Torque =(moment of inertia)  (angular acceleration)
  I

21
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

 Law of conservation of angular momentum states that if there is no external torque acting on
the system , the total angular momentum of the system remains constant.
1
 Rotational kinetic energy of a body is E  I 2 , where I is the moment of inertia of the body
2

about the axis of rotation and  its angular velocity.

 Relation between moment of inertia and angular momentum L  I .

Sl.No Body Axis Moment of Radius of

Inertia Gravitation
1. Circular Passing through centre and MR 2 R
disc perpendicular to the plane. 2 2

2. Circular Through a diameter MR 2 R

disc 4 2

3. Rectangular Passing through centre and M L2  B 2   L2  B 2

plate perpendicular to the plane 12 12

4. Rectangular Passing through centre and MB 2 B

plate parallel to length 12 12

5. Rectangular Passing through centre and ML2 L

plate parallel to breadth 12 12

Sl.No Body Dimension Axis Moment of Radius of

Inertia gyration
6. Thin length l a) Through centre of mass Ml2 l
rod mass M perpendicular to its length. 12 12

b) At one end perpendicular to its Ml2 l

3
length. 3

7. Thin mass  M Through its centre

circular
MR2 R
ring

8. Solid mass  M a) Through its centre  R2 l 2  R2 l 2

M   
cylinder perpendicular to its length.  4 12 
radius R   4 12

b) about its own axis parallel to its R

length l MR 2
length 2 2

9. Solid Mass M a) about a diameter 2 / 5MR 2 2 / 5R

sphere
Radius R b) about a tangent 7 / 5MR 2 7 / 5R

22
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

Parallel axis theorem

This theorem states that moment of inertia of a rigid body about an axis I11  parallel to an axis
passing through centre of mass ICM  of the body is equal to moment of inertia about this axis plus
the product of total mass M as the body and square of perpendicular distance r  between these
parallel axes I11  ICM  Mr2

Perpendicular axis theorem

The sum of moments of inertia along two mutually perpendicular axes in a plane is equal to the
moment of inertia along the axes perpendicular to this plane i.e. I z  I x  I y .

Newton’s Law of Gravitation: It states that “Every particle of matter in the universe attracts
every other particle with a force that is directly proportional to the product of their masses and
inversely proportional to the square of the distance between them” i.e.

m m 
F  G 1 2 2 
 d 

11 2 1
G is the gravitational constant. G  6.673  10 Nm kg . 
Dimensions of G are G   M 1L3T 2 . 
The force exerted by the earth on a body of mass m at a distance r from the centre of the earth is
 mM 
F  G 2  , where r  R, radius of earth. At points inside the earth r  R , F decreases as r
 r 

decreases and becomes zero at the centre of the earth i.e., F  0 when r  0 .

Acceleration due to gravity: The acceleration of a body when it falls under the influence of
gravity alone is called acceleration due to gravity. It is denoted by g .

GM
g , where M is the mass of the earth and R its radius.
R2

4
g RDG where D is the mean density of the earth.
3

Variation of acceleration due to gravity

1. Variation of g with altitude: If g  acceleration due to gravity at the earth’s surface and g '
that at a height h above the earth surface, then

 R
2 

g' g 2
, R  radius of earth

  R  h  


 2h 
 acceleration due to gravity decrease with altitude. If h  R, g '  g 1  
 R

23
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

2. Variation of g with depth: If g be the acceleration due to gravity on the surface of the
earth and g ' that at a depth h below the earth’s surface, then g '  g 1  h / R .  Acceleration
due to gravity decreases with depth. When h  R, g '  0 .
3. Variation of g with latitude: Variation of g with latitude is due to rotation of earth about
its polar axis. If g is the acceleration due to gravity at latitude  if the earth were at rest and
g ' acceleration due to gravity at the same latitude. When the earth rotates with angular

velocity  , then g '  g  R 2 cos 2  .

Case 1: At equator   0.  g '  g  R 2 , g ' represents minimum value of g .

Case 2: At the poles   90 , g '  g , g ' represents maximum value of g .

Motion of Planets and Satellites

Kepler’s laws of Planetary Motion

I Law: All planets move round the sun in elliptical orbits with the sun at one of the focii.

II Law: The radius vector drawn from the sun to the planet sweeps equal areas in equal intervals
of time.

III Law: The square of the period of revolution of the planet is directly proportional to the cube
of the semi- major axis of the elliptical orbit i.e., T 2  a3 .

Artificial Satellites:

GM
1. Orbital velocity vo  M=mass of earth and R its radius
Rh

h  height of satellite above earth’s surface.

gR 2
vo  Where g  acceleration due to gravity near the earth’s surface.
Rh

2 R  h  R  h 3 . If the satellite is close to the earth,

a) Period of satellite T   2 2
h  R .
vo gR

R g
T  2 Orbital angular velocity   .
g R

24
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

Energy of a Satellite: A satellite of mass m orbiting due to the surface of the earth has both kinetic
energy and potential energy.

GMm GMm
KE   , PE  
2R R

GMm
Total energy  
2R

Escape velocity: ve  2 gR , R  radius of earth ,

2GM
ve  ,M = mass of earth
R

 In the case of earth, escape velocity ve  11.2kms 1 .

 Minimum kinetic energy with which a body must be projected to escape from earth’s gravity
GMm
 .
R

 If ve  escape velocity and vo  orbital velocity, ve  2vo .

Geostationary satellite is an artificial satellite revolving around the earth such that is appears
stationary with respect to earth i.e. it has time period and sense of rotation equal to that earth.

13
 T 2R2 g 
The height of a geostationary satellite is h   36000 km
 4 2 
 

Elasticity

Elasticity is that property of a material due to which it regains its original state
Elastic stress and strain
F
Stress is defined as force per unit area. stress  . It is expressed in Nm2
A

Strain is defined as the fractional change in the dimension of a body produced by the applied force.
Strain has no units and dimensions.

Hooke’s law: Stress  strain

Modulus of elasticity or elastic constant is defined as the ratio of stress to strain. It is denoted by E .

Stress
Thus, E  for small values of strain.
Strain

25
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

Elastic co-efficients or elastic moduli:

Stress F/A Fl
1. Young’s, modulus (Y) : Y   
Longitudinal strain Δl/l AΔl

stress F/A FV
2. Bulk modulus (K) : K  
Volume strain ΔV/V A ΔV 

3. Rigidity modulus (n) : n  Shearing stress  F / A  F

Shearing strain  A

Poisson’s ratio  

Within elastic limits (where Hooke’s law is valid) the ratio of lateral strain to longitudinal or linear
strain is a constant called the Poisson’s ratio.
Relations between elastic co-efficient:

1. Y  2n1   
2. Y  3K 1  2 
3K  2n
3.  
23K  n 

3Kn
4. Y 
3K  n

1 1  F  Δl 
Work done in stretching a wire: W   stress Strain    
2 2  A  l 

Concurrent co-planar forces

Forces acting in the same plane and whose lines of action meet at a common point are called
coplanar concurrent forces.
 Resultant of a system of forces is that single force which produces the same effect as that
produced by the given system of forces.
 Equilibriant of a system of forces is that single force which is equal in magnitude but opposite in direction to
the resultant of the given system of forces.

 Resultant and equilibrant acting together on a body keep the body in equilibrium.
Resultant of two forces acting at a point can be obtained from the law of parallelogram of forces. According to the
law,” if two forces acting at a point are represented in magnitude and direction by the two adjacent sides of a
parallelogram drawn from a point, then their resultant is represented both in magnitude and direction by the
diagonal of the completed parallelogram drawn from the same point”.

B C
C B

Resultant R (R) of R two forces P and Q acting

Q Q
 
at an acute  angle  as in figure (1) or an
O A 
P O A
P
Fig (1) Fig (2)
26
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

obtuse angle  as in figure (2) is given by R  P2  Q2  2PQ cos in magnitude. The resultant is at an
Q sin
angle  with respect to P such that tan  . This gives the direction of the resultant.
P  Q cos

 The greatest resultant of two forces P and Q is Rmax  P  Q when   0

 The least resultant of the forces P and Q is Rmax  P  Q, for P  Q when   180


 When P and Q are at right angles to each other i.e., when   90 , R  P 2  Q 2 and

  tan 1 Q / P 

 When P  Q in magnitude and   120  , R  P

 When P  Q in magnitude and   90 , R  2 P.

 When P  Q in magnitude and   60 , R  3 P .

 Whenever two forces acting at an angle  are equal in magnitude, their resultant is along the

 bisector of the angle between the forces. i.e.,   .
2
Resolution of a force
A force can be resolved into its components. This is known as resolution of forces.
Case (1) : along any two directions:
B1
sin  sin B C
F1  F and F2  F
sin     sin    F

F2


O F1 A A1

Case (2): Along two mutually perpendicular directions.

Y
Fx  F cos , Fy  F sin
B  C

Fy F


X' X
O Fx A

Y1

 The vector sum of the components of a force is equal to the given force.
 Resolution provides a convenient method to determine the resultant of a number of coplanar
concurrent forces.
Law of triangle of forces
If there forces acting at a point can be represented in magnitude and direction by the three sides of
a triangle taken in order then the forces are in equilibrium.

27
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

Lami’s theorem Q R'

If three forces acting at a point are in equilibrium then each force is

proportional to the sine of the angle between the other two  forces.

Forces P, Q and R are in equilibrium.  P
R
According to Lami’s theorem , P  Q  R
sin sin  sin 

Moment of a force:
The rotary effect produced by a force in the case of a body which is free to rotate about an axis is
called the moment of the force, or the torque acting on the body. It is
denoted by  It is given by   Fl where F is the magnitude of O the
force and l is the perpendicular distance of the line of action of the
force from the axis of rotation ( also called the moment arm). l

Law of moments:
The algebraic sum of the moments of two or more coplanar forces about any point in their plane is
equal to the moment of their resultant about the same point.
The theorem is true for both, coplanar, concurrent and parallel forces.
Parallel forces:
Forces whose lines of action are parallel are called parallel forces. If two parallel forces are in the
same direction, then they are called like parallel forces. If two parallel forces are in the opposite
direction, then they are called unlike parallel forces.
Resultant of two like parallel forces P and Q
P and Q are two like parallel forces acting at A and B. Their
A C B
resultant is R. It is such that • • •
1. R  PQ Q
R
P
2. R is parallel to P or Q in the plane of P and Q .
3. R acts at a point C (between P and Q ) such that P AC   QBC  .

Resultant of two unlike parallel forces P and Q : Q

P and Q are two unlike parallel forces acting at A and B P  Q . C A R is the
• • •B
resultant of P and Q . It is such that

1. R  P Q R P

2. R is in the direction of P (the greater force).

3. R acts at a point C (outside P and Q ) such that
P AC   QBC  .

Couple:

28
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

Two equal and unlike parallel forces acting at different points on a rigid body with their lines of action
not coinciding, constitute a couple.
If the body is free to rotate about an axis then the couple produces the
rotatory effect. The moment of the couple or torque acting on the l F body
is given by the product of the magnitude of one of the forces F
constituting the couple and the perpendicular distance between their
lines of action (also called the arm of the couple).
F and F constitute a couple. Moment of the couple is   F l  . It is a constant about any point in the
plane of the forces.

General Conditions of Equilibrium

I. For translatory equilibrium

(i) Coplanar concurrent forces: The algebraic sum of the resolved parts of all the forces along two
mutually perpendicular directions must be separately equal to zero.
(ii) Coplanar parallel forces: The sum of all the forces in one direction must be equal to the sum of
all the forces in the opposite direction.
II. For rotatory equilibrium
Coplanar concurrent or parallel forces: Sum of all the clockwise moments must be equal to sum of
all the anticlockwise moments about any point in the plane of the forces.
Problems
1. A horizontal force of 10 N is necessary to just hold a block
stationary against a rough wall. The co-efficient of friction 10 N
between the block and the wall is 0.2 . The weight of the block is
(a) 100 N (b) 50 N
(c) 20 N (d) 2N

2. A block weighting 45 N is at rest on a horizontal surface. The co- efficient of static friction
between the block and the surface is 0.5 . The magnitude of a pulling force that just moves the
block when applied at an angle of 45 to the horizontal is
30
(a) (b) 30 2 N (c) 15 (d) 15 2 N
2N 2N

3. A block of metal is lying on the floor of a truck. The maximum acceleration that can be given to
the trunk so that the block may remain at rest w.r.t. the truck is

(a)  g (b)  2 g (c)  g (d)
g

29
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

4. A block takes twice as much time to slide down a rough 45 inclined plane as it takes to slide
down an identical smooth 45 inclined plane. The co-efficient of friction between the block and
the rough inclined plane is
(a) 0.5 (b) 0.75 (c) 0.6 (d) 0.25
5. A block of mass 5 kg is placed on a rough inclined plane. The inclination of the plane is gradually
increased till the block just begins to slide down. The inclination of the plane is then 3 in 5 . The

coefficient of friction between the block and the plant is g  10ms 2  

3 3 4 2
(a) (b) (c) (d)
5 4 5 3

6. A uniform chain of length L lies on a table. If the coefficient of friction is  , then the maximum
length of the chain which can hang from the edge of the table without the chain sliding down is

(a) L
(b) L
(c) L (d) L
  1  l  1

7. At the highest point of a trajectory the vertical component of velocity is

(a) u cos (b) u sin (c) zero (d) 
8. A stone is projected horizontally from the top of a cliff with a velocity of 9.8 ms -1. Its horizontal
and vertical velocities become equal after a time interval of ( g = 9.8 ms-2 )
(a) 0.5 sec (b) 1 sec (c) 1.5 sec (d) 2 sec

9. A 2 kg stone tied to the end of a 1 m long string is whirled in a vertical circle at a constant
speed of 4 ms-1. The tension in the string is 52 N when the stone is
(a) at the bottom of the circle (b) at the to of the circle

(c) midway (d) none of these

10. The banking angle for a curved road with a radius of 490 m for a vehicle moving at 70 ms -1 is
(assuming ( g = 9.8 ms-2 )
(a) 30o (b) 60o (c) 45o (d) 900

11. A body projected vertically upwards with a velocity u returns to the starting point in 4 seconds.
 
If g  10ms 2 the value of u is ms 1
(a) 20 (b) 10 (c) 5 (d) 4

12. A projectile is fired with an initial velocity u at angle  with respect to the horizontal from the
ground. The potential energy at the maximum height is

30
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

1 1 1 1
(a) mu 2 (b) mu 2 sin 2  (c) mu 2 cos2  (d) mu 2 sin 2 2
2 2 2 2

13. The range R of a projectile is same at maximum height h1 and h2 . The relation between R , h1 and

h2 is

h1
(a) R  (b) R  4 h1h2 (c) R  2h1h2 (d) R  2 h1h2
h2

14. Two projectiles are projected with the same initial velocity but with different angles of
projection. If the two projectiles have the same range, then the angles of projection could be
(a) 15  and 50  (b) 25  and 50  (c) 25  and 65  (d) 35  and 70 

15. A man fires a bullet at the target x along the horizontal. But the bullet strikes
x
the point y below the target x , after 0.1s . If the initial speed of the y bullet

is 10ms 1 , then the distance xy is

(a) 0.1m (b) 0.05m (c) 1m (d) 0.5m

16. When a body moves through a distance S at right angles to applied force F , work done by the
force is

(a) FS (b) FS 2 (c) FS (d)

zero

17. Two bodies of masses of m1 and m2 have equal KE. Their momenta are in the ratio

(a) m1 : m2 (b) m2 : m1 (c) m1 : m2 (d) m2 : m1

18. A body dropped from a height h1 rebounds to a height h2 . If e is the coefficient of restitution

then

h1 h1 h2 h2
(a) e  (b) e  (c) e  (d) e 
h2 h2 h1 h1

19. The bob of a simple pendulum of mass 0.1kg is moved so that it is raised through a vertical

height of 0.1m . Work done is g  9.8ms 2  

(a) 0 98 mJ (b) 9.8mJ (c) 0.98 J (d) 9.8J

20. The kinetic energy of a body becomes four times its initial value. The new linear momentum will
be

31
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

(a) Same as the initial value (b) twice the initial value

(c) Thrice the initial value (d) four times the initial value

21. When a body moves in a circular path, no work is done by the force since,
(a) there is a no net force
(b) there is no displacement
(c) the force is always away from the centre
(d) force and displacement are perpendicular to each other
22. A bullet moving with a speed of 100 ms 1 can just penetrate through two planks of equal
thickness. Then, the number of such planks penetrated by the same bullet when the speed is
doubled will be
(a) 8 (b) 4 (c) 10 (d) 6
23. A bullet is fired at a block kept on a table. The bullet gets embedded in the block. If the table is
frictionless, then
(a) only kinetic energy is conserved
(b) only momentum is conserved
(c) both kinetic energy and momentum are conserved
(d) neither the kinetic energy nor the momentum is conserved
24. Two bodies, one having a mass twice that of the other, are raised to the same height from the
ground and let fall. When the heavy body strikes the ground,
(a) its kinetic energy is half of the kinetic energy of the other
(b) its kinetic energy is same as that of the other
(c) its kinetic energy is twice as much as the other
(d) its kinetic energy is four times as much as the other
25. A motor pump pumps 3000 kg of water per minute from a well of depth 20 m and delivers it to a
height of 20 m . Then the power of the motor pump is
(a) 1.96kW (b) 19.6kW (c) 0.98kW (d) 3.92kW
26. A shell initially at rest explodes into two pieces of equal mass. The two pieces will
(a) continue to be at rest
(b) move with the same speed in the same direction
(c) move with the same speed in the opposite direction
(d) move with a different speed in the opposite direction

32
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

27. A motor is rotating at a constant angular velocity of 500 rpm. The angular displacement per
second is
50 3 25 3
(a) 3 rad (b) 50 rad (c) 3 rad (d) 25 rad

28. A ballet dancer suddenly folds her outstretched arms. Her angular velocity
(a) increases (b) decreases
(c) remains the same (d) may increase or decrease
29. A merry –go-round has a radius of 5m and completes one revolution in 4s . Its acceleration is
(a) 5 2 (b) 2.5 2 (c) 1.25 2 (d) 1.5 2
30. Uniform circular motion is the direct consequence of
(a) centrifugal force
(b) an acceleration tangent to the path
(c) an acceleration directed towards a fixed point
(d) Newton’s third law of motion
31. Two rotating bodies have the same angular momentum but different moment of inertia I1 and

I 2 . If I1  I 2 , then the body that possesses greater kinetic energy of rotation is

(a) the first body

(b) the second body
(c) both the bodies have the same kinetic energy
(d) data is insufficient to predict the result
32. The angular momentum of a particle is
(a) perpendicular to its linear momentum
(b) inclined to its linear momentum
(c) parallel to its linear momentum
(d) a scalar quantity
33. ‘g’ is the acceleration due to gravity on the earth’s surface and g ' that at a height of 32km
above the earth’s surface and if radius of earth  6400 km , then
(a) g ' 0.9 g (b) g '  0  99 g (c) 0.01g (d) g  0.99 g '

34. Acceleration due to gravity on a planet whose radius and density are both twice that of the earth
is g ' . g is the acceleration due to gravity on the earth. Then
g
(a) g '  g (b) g ' 4 g (c) g '  (d) g ' 2 g
4

33
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

35. The escape velocity of a body of mass M varies as

(a) M 2 (b) M (c) M 0 (d) M 1

36. Minimum kinetic energy with which a body must be projected to escape from earth’s gravity is
GMm GMm
(a) (b) GMm
2
(c) (d) GMm
3
R R 2R R

37. Acceleration due to gravity is 'g' on the surface of the Earth. Then the value of the acceleration
due to gravity at a height of 32 km above Earth's surface is (Radius of the Earth=6400 km)
(a) 1.01g (b) 0.9g (c) 0.99g (d)
0.8g

38. If both the mass and radius of the earth decrease by 1%

a. the acceleration due to gravity would increase
b. the acceleration due to gravity would decrease
c. the escape velocity would decrease
d. the escape velocity would increase
39. A body is projected vertically upwards from the surface of a planet of radius R with a velocity
equal to half the escape velocity for that planet. The maximum height attained by the body is
(a) R5 (b) R4 (c) R2 (d) R3

40. Weight of a body of mass m decreases by 1% when it is raised to height h above the earth’s
surface. If the body is taken to a depth h in a mine, change in its weight is,
(a) 0.5% decrease (b) 2% decrease (c) 0.5% increase (d) 1% increase

41. The amount of work that must be done on a body of mass m so that it escapes from the
gravitational field of the planet of mass M and radius R is
GMm 2GMm 3 GMm 3 GMm
(a) (b) (c) (d)
R R 2 R 4 R

42. An object is dropped from an altitude equal to the radius of the earth. If M is the mass of the
earth and R is the radius of the earth, the velocity with which it strikes the earth’s surface is

GM GM GM GM
(a) (b) (c) (d)
2R R 3R 2R 2

43. If v0 be the orbital velocity of a satellite in a circular orbit close to the earth’s surface and ve is

the escape velocity for the earth, relation between the two is
(a) ve  2v0 (b) ve  2v0 (c) ve  3v0 (d) v0  v e

34
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

44. A wire increases by 10 3 of its length when a stress of 1 108 Nm2 is applied to it. The Young’s
modulus of the material of the wire is
(a) 1011 Nm2 (b) 105 Nm2 (c) 10 11 Nm2 (d) 108 Nm2

45. A metal rod of Young’s modulus 1.2  1011 Nm2 has a breaking strain of 0.5% . The minimum cross
sectional area of the rod in order to support a load of 3106 N is

(a) 10 mm2 (b) 25 mm2 (c) 40mm2

(d) 50 mm2

46. In the diagram, length of steel wire  0.5m , length of brass wire  1m .

Area of cross-section of each wire  2mm2 . Young’s modulus of steel

 2  1011 Nm2 ,Young’s modulus of brass  1 1011 Nm2 . Elongation

produced in steel wire is g  10ms 2 
(a) 1.25  10 5 m (b) 6.25  105 m

(c) 2.25 105 m (d) 5  10 5 m

47. The work done in stretching a wire of length 2m and area of cross-section 2mm2 though 0.2mm is
Y  2 1011
Nm 2 
(a) 4mJ (b) 3mJ (c) 2mJ (d) 1mJ

48. The load versus elongation graph for four wires of the same material is shown in the figure. The
thinnest wire is represented by the line Load
(a) OA DC
BA
(b) OB
o elongation
(c) OC
(d) OD

49. Which one of the following is not unit of Young’s modulus ?

(a) Nm1 (b) Nm2 (c) dyne cm 2 (d) Mega Pascal

50. The resultant of F1, F2 and F3 acting in the X-Y plane and as shown in the diagram is

(a) 5N along OX (b) 2N along OY

(c) 8N along OY (d) none

35
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

51. Three forces acting on a body and keeping it in equilibrium A

20cm
B
are as shown in the diagram. T1 and T2 are the tensions in T1
T2

the strings OA and OB and W is the weight of the body, we 12cm 90 16cm
O
have

(b) W  T12  T2 2 W
(a) W  T1  T2

(c) W  T1T2 (d) W  T1T2

T1  T2

52. In the diagram shown , forces T1,T2 and W acting at O are in

equilibrium. Tick the incorrect relation connecting the forces. 60

T2
3T2
(a) T2  2T1 (b) W  O
2
T1

(c) T1  3T2 (d) T1  W

3 W

53. Which of the following sets of concurrent forces may be in equilibrium ?

(a) F1  3N F2  5N F3  1N

(b) F1  3N F2  5N F3  9N

(c) F1  3N F2  5N F3  6N

(d) F1  3N F2  5N F3  15N

54. In the diagram, the body is free to rotate about an axis passing through O . Moment of F

about O is
(a)  Fl (b) Fl
(c)  Fl cos (d) Fl sin
55. Two unlike parallel forces 6N and 10 N act on a rigid body at points A and B . If their resultant
acts at a distance of 0.5m from the greater force, the separation between A and B is
1 2 1
(a) 1m (b) m (c) m (d) m
4 3 3

56. A cylinder of radius of cross-section 40cm rests against a step of

height 20cm as shown in the diagram. The minimum 40cm
• F

horizontal force F applied perpendicular to the axis so that 20cm the

cylinder climbs the step is WWeight of the cylinder 

36
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

(a) W (b) W
2

(c) 3W (d) 2W

1 d 2d 3 a 4 b 5 b 6 c 7c 8b 9a 10 c
11 a 12 b 13 b 14 c 15 b 16 d 17 c 18 d 19 a 20 b
21 d 22 a 23 b 24 c 25 b 26 c 27 a 28 a 29 c 30 c
31 b 32 a 33 b 34 b 35 c 36 a 37 c 38 a 39 d 40 a
41 a 42 b 43 b 44 d 45 d 46 b 47 a 48 a 49 a 50
51 52 53 54 55 56

37
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS

Gas Laws

The state of a given mass of gas is completely determined by its pressure (P), volume (V ) and
temperature (T ) . When a gas is heated both its pressure and volume undergo a change. Hence, there
are two coefficients of expansion of a gas.

1. Volume co- efficient or co- efficient of expansion of a gas at constant pressure

Vt  Vo V2  V1
 
Vot V1t2  V2t1

2. Pressure co- efficient or co- efficient of expansion of a gas at constant volume

Pt  Po P2  P1
 
Pot P1t2  P2t1

For all ideal gases,     (1/ 273 .15) K 1.

Gas Laws: These are the laws that gives the relation between the pressure, volume and temperature
of a given mass of gas.

1. Boyle’s law
At constant temperature, the volume of given mass of gas varies inversely as its pressure.

P  1/ V or P / V  constant  P1V1  P2V2 .

2. Charle’s law
At constant pressure, the volume of a given mass of gas varies directly as its absolute temperature.

V T or V / T  constant  V1 / T1  V2 / T2 .

Similarly, at constant volume

PT or P / T  constant  P1 / T1  P2 / T2 .

Perfect gas equation

PV PV PV
According to perfect gas equation R 1 1  2 2
T T1 T2

R is the universal gas constant. The value of R is 8.31 Jmol1K 1 .

38
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

Isothermal and Adiabatic changes

Isothermal Adiabatic change

change

1. It is the thermodynamic process in which

1. It is thermodynamic process in which
changes in pressure and volume of gas takes changes in pressure and volume of gas takes
place at constant temperature. place under perfect thermal isolation.
2. There is exchange of heat between the
2. There is no exchange of heat between the
system and surroundings. system and the surroundings.
3. System is in good thermal communication
3. System is in perfect thermal isolation with
with the surroundings the surroundings
4. It is a very slow process. 4. It is a sudden or rapid process.
5. For an isothermal process 5. For an adiabatic process PV   constant
PV  constant

Equation of State

1. For an ideal gas PV  nRT.

 a 
2. For a real gas  P  (V  b)  nRT. where n is the number of moles of gas under consideration and
 V2 

R is the gas constant per mole. It is also called Vander waals equation of state.

Specific Heat Capacities of Gases

A body absorbs heat when it is at a lower temperature than its surroundings. The absorption of heat by
a body results in an increase in its temperature.

Heat capacity

The heat capacity or thermal capacity of a body is defined as the quantity of heat energy required to
raise the temperature of a certain quantity of a substance through 1 degree Kelvin. It is denoted by C .
The S.I . unit of heat capacity is JK 1.

If Q amount of heat absorbed by a body raises the temperature of body by  , then Q  C ( ).

39
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

Specific heat

Specific heat is the quantity of heat required to raise the temperature of a unit mass of a body by 1

degree Kelvin. It is denoted by c. The S.I unit of specific heat is Jkg 1K 1.

Q  mc( ) and c  C / m.

Molar specific heat

It is defined as the heat capacity per mole of the substance.

The molar specific heat of a substance containing n moles is C / n.

Latent heat : The heat energy supplied during the change of state
is called latent heat. i.e., Q  mL .

A substance has two latent heats :

(a) The latent heat of fusion and

(b) The latent heat of vaporization

The latent heat of fusion of ice is 3.36  105 Jkg 1 or 80 cal g -1 , latent heat of vaporization of steam is
2.26 106 J kg -1 or 540 cal g -1 .

Principle of Calorimetry

According to this principle, heat lost  heat gained.

Specific heat of gases

1. Specific heat at constant volume (Cv )

It is the amount of heat required to raise the temperature of unit mass of the gas through one
Kelvin at constant volume.

2. specific heat at constant pressure (C p )

It is the amount of heat required to raise the temperature of unit mass of the gas through one
Kelvin at constant pressure.
If C p and Cv be the specific heat capacities of gas per mole then C p  Cv  R

It is called the Mayer’s equation.

40
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

1) For a gas C p is always greater than Cv .

2) The ratio of C p to Cv is denoted by  . That is   C p / Cv .

3) We have Cv  3R / 2  C p  5R / 2 for all monatomic gases.

4)   C p / Cv  5 / 3  1.67 for all monatomic gases.

Law of equipartition of energy

The law states that the energy is equally shared by all the degrees of freedom and the average energy of a molecule
in a gas associated with each degree of freedom is (1/ 2)kT, where k is the Boltzmann constant and T is the absolute

temperature of the gas.

For a molecule having n degrees of freedom   1  2 / n .
Mode of heat Transfer
There are 3 ways in which heat is transferred :
(i) Conduction : The transmission of heat through a body without the actual movement of the particles of the body is
known as conduction. Ex. Metals
Steady state
When there is no absorption of heat by any element of rod through which heat is conducted, the rod is said to be in
steady state.
Thermal Conductivity

  
The quantity of heat conducted through any element of rod under steady state is given by Q  KA 1 2  t
 l 
…. (1)
Where K is called the thermal conductivity of the material of the rod, A is the area of cross-section of rod, (1   2 ) / l

is the temperature gradient and t is the time for which heat flows.
When A  1, (1  2 ) / l  1 and t  1 then from equation (1), Q  K .

Thus, the thermal conductivity of material is defined as the rate of flow of heat during the steady state per unit area
of its surface normal to the direction of flow of heat under unit temperature gradient.

The S.I. unit of thermal conductivity, K is Wm 1K 1 (watt per metre- Kelvin).
Thermal Resistance
Q θ1  θ2 1  2
Heat current i   
t (l/KA) R

This is equivalent to Ohm’s law in current electricity.

l 1
 R is called the thermal resistance. The unit of thermal resistance is Kelvin per watt ( KW ).
KA
(ii) Convection of heat
It is the mode of transfer of heat from one place to another by the actual movement of heated particles. It occurs in
liquids and gases.
Convection due to differences in density between the different parts of a fluid is known as natural convection.
Convection due to the forced movement of the heated fluid by a blower or a pump is known as forced convection
Radiation
Radiation is a process of transmission of heat from one place to another without the aid of any intervening medium.
Detectors of thermal radiation

41
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

1. Thermopile
2. Bolometer
3. Radiometer
Black Body: A body which absorbs all the radiation incident on it, is called a perfect black body.
Emissive Power
The emissive power of a body is defined as the ratio of the quantity of thermal radiation emitted per second by unit
area of the surface to the radiation emitted per second by unit area of a perfect black body under identical conditions.
It is represented by e .
Absorptive power
The absorptive power of a body is defined as the ratio of the quantity of thermal radiation absorbed by it in a given
time to the quantity of radiation incident on it in the same time. It is represented by f .

1) The absorptive power of a black body is taken as unity (i.e., equal to one).
2) The absorptive power of any other body is less than one.
3) No body in the universe is perfectly black.

Stefan’s law
According to the law, the total radiation (E) emitted per second per unit area of the surface of black body is directly
proportional to the fourth power of the absolute temperature (T) of the body.

i.e,. E  T 4 or E  T 4
where  is a universal constant known as Stefan constant.

1) S.I. unit of  is Wm 2 K 4

2) The experimental value of  is 5.67  108Wm 2 K 4 .

Prevost’s theory of exchange
There is a continues exchange of radiation between a body and its surroundings. The rise or fall of temperature of a
body is a consequence of the exchange. This is known as Prevost’s theory of heat exchanges.
Kirchoff’s law of radiation
e
According to the law, good emitters are good absorbers also i.e.  1 or e  a
a
Newton’s law of cooling
The law states that the rate of loss of heat by a body is directly proportional to the temperature difference between
the body and the surroundings, provided the difference is small.
d
i.e.,  (   0 ) provided (  0 ) is small.
dt

  temperature of the body in o C

0  temperature of the surroundings in o C .

Wien’s displacement law

The product of the wavelength m  at which maximum energy is emitted and the absolute temperature (T) of the

black body is always a constant. i.e., mT  constant.

Planck’s law
The energy radiated from a black body at a temperature (T) for a wavelength range  and   d is

42
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

8hc5 34
E
e hc kT
 d
1
where h is planck’s constant  6.625  10 Js . k  Boltzmann constant, c  velocity of light.

Solar constant
The solar constant S is defined as the amount of heat energy which is absorbed per second by one square meter of a
perfectly black surface held at right angles to the sun’s rays and placed at the mean distance of the earth from the sun
in the absence of eth atmosphere.
E
Solar constant  where d is distance of Earth from sun.
4d 2

The mean value of S has been found to be 1.353 kWm2

Pyrometer
Pyrometers are the devices used to measure high temperatures. They are of two types
1. Total radiation pyrometer based on Stefan’s law
2. Optical or spectral pyrometer based on distribution law.

Thermodynamics
Thermodynamics is a branch of physics which deals with all the processes involving heat, mechanical
work and internal energy associated with a system.
Thermodynamic system: A definite quantity of matter is called a thermodynamic system.

Surroundings: The region or matter outside the system which has a direct effect on the system is called
its surroundings

Thermodynamic equilibrium: A system which is in thermal, mechanical and chemical equilibrium is

said to be in thermodynamic equilibrium.

Thermodynamic process: It is a process in which there is a change from one thermodynamic state
of a system to another. Thermodynamic variables of the system change with time during a
thermodynamic process.

Some of the thermodynamic processes are

i) Isothermal process
ii) Adiabatic process
iii) Isobaric process
iv) Isochoric process
v) Reversible process
vi) Irreversible process
vii) Cyclic process
viii) Non –cyclic process etc

43
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

Internal energy: Every system possesses a certain amount of energy called internal energy. It is
denoted by U . U  K.E  P.E

Indicator diagram or P- V diagram

It is a graph of pressure (P) against volume (V ) of a system. It helps to calculate the quantity of work
done by the system during the process.

First law of thermodynamics

The quantity of heat energy given to a system is equal to the sum of the increase in the internal energy
of the system and the external work by the system.

dQ  dU  dW

It is nothing but the law of conservation of energy

Sign convention

1. dQ is taken positive when heat is absorbed by the system. It is taken negative when the system

loses heat
2. dW is taken positive when work is done by the system. It is taken negative when work is done on
the system.
3. dU is taken positive when there is an increase in internal energy. It is taken negative where there is
a decrease in internal energy.

Applications of the first law of thermodynamics

1. Isothermal process
(a) dQ  dW ( dU  0)

(b) W  2.303RT log(V2 / V1) or W  2.303RT log(P1 / P2 ) per mole of an ideal gas

2. Adiabatic process
(a) dQ  0  dU  dW

(b) dU  0 for an adiabatic free expansion

R
(c) Work done W  Cv (T1  T2 ) or W  (T1  T2 ) per mole of an ideal gas
 1

3. Isochoric Process : dQ  dU  dW  0
4. Isobaric process : W  PV2  V1 

44
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

Heat engines
A heat engine is device, which continuously converts thermal energy into other useful forms of energy
like mechanical energy, electrical energy, etc. In a heat engine, a certain material called the working
substance is taken through a cycle process. During the process, the working substance (i) absorbs heat
from a source at a high temperature (ii) performs some work and (iii) rejects some heat to a reservoir at
a lower temperature.

Efficiently of heat engine

The efficiently of a heat engine is defined as the ratio of the net work done to the quantity of heat
absorbed during a complete cycle.

Work done
Thus, efficiently η 
Heat absorbed

W (Q  Q2 ) Q
η  1  1 2
Q1 Q1 Q1

Carnot engine
It is an ideal heat engine. It is free from all losses. The working substance is a perfect gas. It is the most
efficient engine possible.

Carnot’s Theorem
The theorem states that “no real heat engine operating between two heat reservoirs can be more
efficient than a Carnot engine operating between the same two reservoirs”.

Carnot’s cycle
The working substance in a Carnot’s engine is taken through a reversible cycle of operations constituting
of two adiabatic process. The cycle is called Carnot’s of four stages.

Efficiency of Carnot’s engine is

Q2 T
η  1  1 2
Q1 T1

Where T1 is the temperature of the source and T2 is the temperature of the sink.

Second law of thermodynamics

Kelvin planck statement: it is impossible to construct a heat engine that, operating in a cyclic,
produces no other effect than absorption of heat from a body and the performance of an equal amount
of work.

45
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

Clausius statement: It is impossible to construct a device that operates in a cyclic process to produce
no effect other than the continues transfer of heat from one body to another body at a higher
temperature.

Refrigerators

A refrigerators is a Carnot’s ideal heat engine working in the reverse order. It is also known as a “heat
pump“. It absorbs heat from a cold body with an amount of work done on it rejects heat to the body
during each cycle of operation.

The co- efficient of performance, denoted by  , is

Q2 Q2 1 1
   
W Q1  Q2 Q1 / Q2  1 T1 / T2  1

i.e.   T2
T1  T2

T1 is the temperature of hot body in Kelvin

T2 is the temperature of cold body in Kelvin

Entropy
Entropy is an important thermodynamic variable of a system. It is a measure of disorder in the system.

If a small amount of heat dQ is given to a system at temperature T then the change in entropy of the
system is defined as, ds  dQ / T

Clausis Clapeyron equation

According to this equation

dP L

dT T (V2  V1)

Where dP/ dT is the rate of change of pressure with temperature

L is the latent heat

V1 is the volume in the initial state

V2 is the volume in the final state

46
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

Problems

1. The gas law PV = R T holds for

(a) isothermal process (b) isochoric process

(c) isobaric process (d) adiabatic process

2. The work done is more in

(a) isothermal process only (b) adiabatic process only

(c) isobaric process only (d) same in all three cases

3. Water is heated from 0 C to 20 C . Then its volume

(a) increases linearly (b) decreases linearly

(c) does not change (d) first decreases then increases

4. Boyle’s law is applicable for

(a) isothermal process (b) isochoric process

(c) isobaric process (d) isotonic process

5. In an isothermal process
(a) pressure remains constant (b) volume remains constant

(c) temperature remains constant (d) kinetic energy remains constant

6. Co- efficient of superficial expansion of solid is 2 105 / o C. Its co- efficient of linear expansion is
(a) 3 105 / o C (b) 1105 / o C

(c) 2 105 / o C (d) 4 105 / o C

7. Which one of the following graphs represents the behaviour of an ideal gas ?

PV PV PV PV
V V V V

(a) (b) (c) (d)

8. In an adiabatic expansion the increase in volume is associated with

(a) Increase in pressure and increase in temperature

47
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

(b) Increase in pressure and decrease in temperature

(c) Decrease in pressure and increase in temperature
(d) Decrease in pressure and decrease in temperature
9. A certain mass of a perfect gas is at 27 o C . To double the volume of the gas at constant pressure it
must be heated to
(a) 600o C (b) 327 o C (c) 137 o C (d) 243o C

o
10. An ideal gas occupies a volume of 100 c.c at 27 C and pressure of 747 Pa . The number of moles of gas

in the vessels is
(a) 1 105 (b) 3 105 (c) 2  10 4 (d) 3 103

11. According to Charles law, V  T at constant pressure. The variation of

P2
volume (V ) of an ideal gas with temperature (T ) at constant pressure V

P1 and P2 are as shown in the diagram. From the graphs it follows that
P1
(a) P1  P2 (b) P1  P2
T
(c) P1  P2 (d) P1 may be equal to or different from
P2

12. Two glass vessels A and B of equal volume connected by a glass tube with a stop valve contain the
same gas. The gas in A is at a pressure P1 and temperature T 1 . The gas in B is at pressure P2 and

temperature T 2 . On opening the valve, the gas attains an equilibrium pressure P and temperature

T . The ratio of PT is

1  P1 P2 
(a) P1  P2 (b)    (c) P1T1  P2T2 (d) P1P2
T1  T2 2  T1 T2  P1T1  P2T2 T1T2

13. An adiabatic change is not represented by

(a) TP1  constant (b) PV   constant

(c) TV  1  constant (d) TP(1 ) /   constant

 a 
14. The equation state of a real gas is given by Vander waal’s equation as  p  V  b   nRT where a
 V2 

and b are the constants. The dimensional formula of the constant a is

(a) ML5T 1 (b) ML5T 2 (c) ML1T 1 (d) M 0 L0T 0

48
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

15. An ideal gas initially at temperature T1 is allowed to expand adiabatically inside an insulated cylinder

fitted with a frictionless piston. The final temperature after expansion is T2 . If L1 and L2 are the

lengths of the gas column before and after expansion respectively then T1 is given by
T2

 1  1
L  
L  
L  L  
(a)  1  (b)  2  (c)  2  (d)  1 
 L2   L1   L1   L2 

16. A vessel contains 1 mole of oxygen at a temperature T and pressure p . Another identical vessel
containing one mole of helium gas at temperature 2T has a pressure of
p
(a) p (b) (c) 2 p (d) 8 p
8

17. One mole of a gas at NTP is suddenly expanded to 4 times its initial volume. If Cv  2R , the final

pressure of the gas will be

1 1
(a) atm (b) atm (c) 1.1atm (d) 0.6atm
8 4

18. Which of the following produces more severe burns?

(a) Hot air (b) Sun rays (c) Boiling water (d) Steam

19. If the pressure of surroundings is increased, then latent heat of steam

(a) will increase (b) will decrease

(c) remains constant (d) varies erratically

20. Mayer’s relation is

(a) cp  cv  R (b) cv  cp  R (c) cp  cv  R (d) cp/cv  R

o o
21. When 50 g of water at 10 C is mixed with 50 g of water at 100 C , the resultant temperature is

(a) 80 o C (b) 55o C (c) 25o C (d) 45o C

o
22. 5 kg of water at 20 C is added to 10 kg of water at 60o C . Neglecting heat capacity of vessel and other

losses, the resultant temperature will be nearly

(a) 35o C (b) 40 o C (c) 47 o C (d) 28o C

o
23. 80 g of water at 30 o C is poured on a large block of ice at 0 C . The mass of ice that melts is

(a) 20 g (b) 30 g (c) 45 g (d) 60 g

24. Select the wrong statement from the following:

49
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

(a) If a gas is heated at a constant volume, work done by the gas against external pressure is
zero
(b) If a gas is heated at constant pressure, more heat is required to rise temperature of the gas
by 1 kelvin.
(c) When a gas is heated at constant volume, entire heat energy supplied is spent in raising the
temperature of the gas
(d) When a gas is heated at constant pressure, its volume decreases.
25. When one mole of a monatomic gas is mixed with one mole of a diatomic gas, the molar specific
heat of the mixture at constant volume will be
(a) R / 2 (b) 3R / 2 (c) 2R (d) 2R / 3

26. According to the law of equipartition of energy, the total energy of a gas molecule is equally
distributed among all its degrees of freedom and the energy associated with each degree of
freedom at absolute temperature T is
(a) k T (b) (3 / 2)kT (c) (1/ 2)kT (d) 2 / kT

27. If N be the number of particles (atoms) constituting a system (molecule) and A be the number of
independent relations between them, then the number of degrees of freedom n is given by
(a) n  N  A (b) n  3N  A

(c) n  N  A (d) n  3N  A

28. If the number of degrees of freedom of a gas be n then the value of  for the gas will be
(a) 1 2 / n (b) n  1/ 2 (c) (n  1) / 2 (d) n / 2  1

29. When water is heated from 0o C to 4o C we find that

(a) C p  CV (b) C p  Cv

(c) C p  Cv (d) C p  Cv  R

30. A polyatomic gas with degrees of freedom equal to f has a mean energy per molecule (given N A is

Avogadro’s number)
kT fk T fk T fk T
(a) (b) (c) (d)
2 2N A NA 2

31. The Fahrenheit and Celsius scales agree at a reading of

(a) 100  C (b)  40 C (c)  10 C (d) 0 C

50
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

32. The heat capacity of gas A is greater than the heat capacity of gas B . When same quantity of heat
is supplied to equal masses of both the gases at constant volume
(a) the rise in temperature of A is greater than that of B

(b) the rise in temperature of B is greater than that of A

(c) the rise in temperature of both A and B is same

(d) the increase in internal energy of B is less than that of A

33. The factor not needed to calculate heat lost or heat gained (provided, there is no change of state) is
(a) mass (b) specific heat
(c) temperature change (d) mass, specific heat and temperature change
34. The boiling of water changes it into steam. At the time of change of state, the specific heat of water
is
(a) zero (b) infinite (c) one (d) less than one

35. Certain quantity of water at 100  C is mixed with thrice the quantity of water at 70 C . The final
temperature of the mixture is
(a) 80 C (b) 66.7 C (c) 85 C (d) 77.5 C

36. Mode of transmission of heat in which heat is carried by moving particles is

(a) Radiation (b) Wave motion
(c) Convection (d) Conduction
37. Three rods of same dimensions are arranged as shown in the figure. They have thermal
Conductivities K1, K2 and K 3 . The points A and B are maintained at different temperatures. For

the heat to flow at the same rate along ACB and AB .

C

K1 K2

A K3 B

K1K2
(a) K3  2(K1  K2 ) (b) K3 
K1  K2

1
(c) K3  K1  K2 (d) K3  ( K1  K 2 )
2

38. One kilogram of ice at 0o C is mixed with one kilogram of water at 80 o C . The final temperature of

the mixture is(Take: Specific heat of water  4200 Jkg1K 1, Latent heat of ice  336 kJ kg1 )

(a) 60 o C (b) 40 o C (c) 50 o C (d) 0o C

39. The energy spectrum of a black body exhibits a maximum around a wavelength o . The

51
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

temperature of the blackbody is now changed such that the energy is maximum around a wavelength 3o / 4 . The

power radiated by the black body will now increase by a factor of

(a) 256 / 81 (b) 64 / 27 (c) 16 / 9 (d) 4 / 3
40. A piece of blue glass is heated to a high temperature and a piece of red glass at room temperature, are taken
inside a dimly light room. Then
a.) The blue piece will look blue and red will look as usual
b.) Red looks brighter red and blue looks ordinary blue
c) .Blue shines like brighter red compared to the red piece
d) .Both the pieces will look equally red
41. The wavelength of the radiation emitted by a body depends upon
(a) The nature of the surface (b) The area of the surface
(c) The temperature of the surface (d) All of the above factors

42. Thermal radiations are electromagnetic waves which belong to

(a) ultraviolet region (b) visible region
(c) infrared region (d) gamma region

43. The reflection coefficient and absorption coefficient of a body are 0.3 and 0.2 respectively. The
percentage of radiation transmitted is
(a) 30 % (b) 20 % (c) 50 % (d) 10 %

44. The emissive power of a perfectly black body is

(a) unity (b) zero (c) 0.5 (d) infinity

45. A metal sphere is heated to a temperature T K and is placed in a region of temperature T0 K .

The heat radiated to the surrounding is proportional to

(a) T 4  T04 (b) T 4  T04 (c) T 2  T02 (d) T  T2 2

46. The temperature of a body is doubled. Then its thermal conductivity will
(a) be doubled (b) be halved
(c) remain the same (d) increase or decrease

47. It is hotter for the same distance over the top of a fire than it is in the sides. This is because
(a) heat is radiated upwards
(b) convection carries the heat upwards
(c) air conducts heat upwards
(d) conduction, convection and radiation all transfer heat upwards
48. Equal temperature difference is maintained between the ends of two metallic rods A and B of
equal lengths. Their thermal conductivities are K1 and K2 and cross sectional areas are A1 and A2

respectively. The condition for equal rate of heat transfer is

(a) K1A1  K2A2 (b) K1A2  K2A1

(c) K1A12  K 2A22 (d) K1A22  K 2A12

52
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

49. A body will radiate heat more rapidly if its surface is

(a) white and rough (b) white and polished
(c) black and rough (d) black and polished

50. A certain star appears to be blue. This means it is

(a) hotter than the sun (b) colder than the sun

(c) as hot as the sun (d) cannot be predicted

51. A wire is gradually heated. At first it appears

(a) yellow (b) red

(c) blue (d) white

52. A thermos flask is polished very well

(a) to absorb all radiations from outside (b) to reflect all radiations from outside

(c) to radiate thermal radiations from the flask (d) to make it more attractive

53. Cold milk is poured into a hot cup of coffee and is stirred with a spoon. This process is an
example of
(a) reversible process (b) irreversible process

(c) cyclic process (d) none of these

54. A monatomic gas is suddenly compressed to 1/ 8th of its initial volume adiabatically. The ratio of
its final pressure to initial pressure is (r  5 / 3)
(a) 32 (b) 40 / 3 (c) 24 / 8 (d) 8

55. For which combination for working temperature the efficiency of Carnot’s engine is highest?
(a) 40 K , 20 K (b) 60 K , 40 K

(c) 100 K , 80 K (d) 80 K , 60 K

56. During an adiabatic process, the pressure of a gas is found to be proportional to the cube of its
absolute temperature. The ratio Cp / Cv for the gas is
(a) 5 / 3 (b) 2 (c) 4 / 3 (d) 3 / 2

57. The freezer in a refrigerator is located at the top section so that

i. The heat gained from the environment is high

53
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

ii. The heat gained from the environment is low

iii. The entire chamber of the refrigerator is cooled quickly due to convection
iv. The motor is not heated
th
1
58. A monatomic gas is suddenly compressed to   of its initial volume adiabatically. The ratio of
8

its final pressure to the initial pressure is (given the ratio of the specific heats of the given gas to be
5/3 )

24 40
(a) (b) 8 (c) 32 (d)
5 3

59. When work is transformed into heat or heat into work, the quantity of work is mechanical
equivalent of heat. This statement is
(a) zeroth law of thermodynamics (b) first law of thermodynamics

(c) second law of thermodynamics (d) law of conservation of energy

60. Efficiency of an ideal Carnot’s engine is

(a) < 1 (b) = 1 (c) > 1 (d) infinity

61. The first law of thermodynamics is a special case of

(a) Boyle’s law (b) Charle’s law

(c) Newton’s law (d) law of conservation of energy

62. First law of thermodynamics can be written as

(a) dQ = dU - P dV (b) dQ = dU + P dV

(c) dU = dQ + P dV (d) dU = dQ - P d

63. A certain mass of an ideal gas undergoes an isothermal change. If dQ, dU and dW represent the
amount of heat, the change in internal energy and the work done respectively then
(a) dQ = 0, dU = + ve and dW = + ve (b) dQ = + ve, dU = - ve and dW = + ve

(c) dQ = + ve, dU = 0 and dW = + ve (d) dQ = + ve, dU = 0 and dW = - ve

64. A carnot cycle consists of

(a) a sequence of reversible isothermals
(b) a sequence of reversible adiabatics
(c) two reversible isothermals and two reversible adiabatics
(d) none of the above

54
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

65. A carnot's engine operates between temperatures T1 K and T2 K respectively. For greater

efficiency
(a) T1 should be low and T2 should be high

(b) T1 should be high and T2 should be low

(c) both T1 and T2 should be very high

(d) both T1 and T2 should be very low

66. A carnot'e engine absorbs a quantity of heat 1000 J from a source and does useful work of 250 J.
The heat rejected and efficiency are
(a) 1000 J, 50% (b) 250 J, 25% (c) 750 J, 25% (d) 4 J, 25%

67. The direction in which heat would flow in a process is governed by

(a) zeroth law of thermodynamics (b) first law of thermodynamics

(c) second law of thermodynamics (d) all the laws of thermodynamics

68. A heat engine operates between 300 K and 600 K. If the efficiency has to be raised to 60%, how
much should the temperature of sink be lowered?
(a) 240 K (b) 60 K (c) 30 k (d) 360 K

69. A heat engine A operates between 300 K and 500 K. Another heat engine B operates between
400 K and 700 K. The efficiency of the heat engines A and B are related as
(a)  A  B (b)  A  B (c)  A  B (d) A  B

Answers:

1. a 2. a 3. d 4. a 5. c 6. b 7. a 8. d 9. b 10. b
11. b 12. b 13. a 14. b 15. c 16. c 17. a 18. d 19. b 20. c
21. b 22. c 23. b 24. d 25. c 26. c 27. b 28. a 29. c 30. d
31. b 32. b 33. d 34. b 35. d 36. c 37. b 38. d 39. a 40. c
41. c 42. c 43. c 44. a 45. a 46. c 47. b 48. a 49. c 50. a
51. b 52. b 53. b 54. a 55. a 56. d 57. c 58. c 59. d 60. b
61. d 62. b 63. c 64. c 65. b 66. c 67. c 68. b 69. b

55
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

FLUID MECHANICS

Fluid Thrust

 The total normal force exerted by a fluid at rest on any surface is called the thrust due to the fluid
on that surface. Thrust is a force. Its unit is Newton.
 Pressure is defined as the force exerted normally on a unit area of the surface of a fluid.
Thrust F
Pressure  
Area A

Pressure at a depth h below the free surface of a fluid at rest  P  gh where   density of
mass M
liquid   .
volume V

Normal atmospheric pressure  0.76m of mercury  1.013 105 Nm2  1.013  105 Pa

(  density of mercury = 13.6  103 kgm3 )

Atmospheric pressure is also measured in torr and bar .

1 torr  1 mm of Hg 1 bar  105 Pa  1atm

 Specific gravity of a substance is the ratio of its density to density of water at 4 C (density of
water is maximum at 4 C ).
a) When equal volumes of two liquids of specific gravities d1 and d2 are mixed together, specific
d1  d 2
gravity of mixture  .
2

b) It two liquids of equal masses and of specific gravities d1 and d 2 are mixed together, specific

gravity of mixture  2d1d 2 .

d1  d 2

 When two substances A and B of masses mA and mB and densities dA and dB are mixed

together, then
total mass m  mB m  mB  m m 
the density of mixture d   A  A  VA  A ,VB  B 
total volume VA  VB m m  d B 
A
 B  d A
d A dB

56
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

 Pascal’s law: It states that pressure in a fluid in equilibrium is the same everywhere. This
principle is used in hydraulic machines such as hydraulic press, hydraulic brakes, hydraulic jacks,
etc.,
 Archimedes’ Principle state: “When a solid body is partially or fully immersed in a liquid at
rest the liquid exerts an upward force or buoyant force whose magnitude is always equal to the
weight of the liquid displaced by the body”.
If Wa  weight of a body in air and Wl its weight when it is immersed in a liquid at rest, then the

buoyant force exerted by the liquid  weight of liquid displaced by body i.e. FB  Wa  Wl =

apparent loss of weight of the body.

When a body is completely submerged in a liquid of density l , upward buoyant force is given by

FB  Vl g , where V  volume of the body. The net force on the body is FB  W  l   Vg where

 is the density of the body, W is the weight of the body.

 Law of floatation states that for a body to float on a liquid the weight of the floating body
must be equal to weight of displaced liquid. When a body is placed in a fluid, two forces act upon
it: (a) the weight W of the body and (b) the buoyant force FB .

Case 1: If W  FB the body will sink in the fluid.

Case 2 : If W  FB the body just floats.

Case 3 : If W  FB the body rises until FB  W .

Fluid Dynamics

Streamline flow: If a fluid flows such that its velocity at a point is always the same in magnitude and
direction, the fluid is said to have streamline flow. Example the flow of a liquid in a tube. Two
streamlines never intersect.

Irregular flow of fluid in which the velocity varies with time is called Turbulent flow.

Equation of continuity

When a liquid flows steadily through a pipe of varying cross-section, the product of the area of cross-
section ( A ) and speed of the liquid v  is the same at all points along the pipe.

i.e., Av  constant. This equation is called equation of continuity.

57
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

Energy possessed by a liquid in motion

(i) Potential energy = mgh where m is the mass of a liquid situated at a height h .

1 2
(ii) Kinetic energy = mv where v is the velocity of liquid.
2

(iii) Pressure energy = Pm where P is the pressure and  is the density of the liquid.


Bernoulli’s theorem states that for a streamline flow of an incompressible, non-viscous fluid (ideal
fluid) the sum of potential energy, kinetic energy and pressure energy per unit mass at any part
1
remains constant. i.e. P  v2  gh  constant
2

Where P  pressure of the fluid,   density of the fluid , v  speed and h  elevation.

P is also the pressure energy per unit volume.

The Bernoulli’s principles are used in (i) Atomizer or sprayer (ii) Bunsen Burner (iii) Venturimeter
(iv) carburetor (v) aeroplane wing

Surface Tension

The forces of attraction or repulsion acting between the molecules of a substance are called
intermolecular forces. They are of two types:

Force of Cohesion: The force of attraction acting between the molecules of the same material is
called cohesive force. Ex. The force acting between the water molecules

Force of Adhesion: The force of attraction acting between the molecules of two different
materials is called adhesive force Ex. Force acting between the molecules of paper and ink

Surface Tension is defined as the force acting per unit length on either side of an imaginary line
drawn on the surface of the liquid at rest. It is the stretching force that exits on the surface of a
liquid. It is expressed in Nm1 .

Surface energy : The extra potential energy per unit area of the surface film is called the surface
energy. It is numerically equal to the surface tension and expressed in Jm2 . If T is the surface
tension of a liquid and A is the area of its surface then surface energy is S  TA .

58
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

Angle of contact

The angle between the tangent to the liquid surface drawn at the point of contact and the solid
surface inside the liquid is called the angle of contact for a given pair of solid and liquid . It is denoted
by  .  for water remains the same.

 is acute (less than 90 ) for a liquid which wets glass.  is obtuse (more than 90 ) for a liquid that

does not wet glass.

Capillarity

The phenomenon of rise or fall of a liquid in a capillary tube immersed partially in the liquid is known
as capillarity.

When a glass capillary tube is dipped in water (or any liquid which wet glass) the water rises up in the
tube. When a glass capillary tube is dipped in mercury (or any liquid which does not wet glass) the
mercury is depressed below the free surface of the liquid in the vessel.

2T cos
The height 'h' to which a liquid rises in a capillary tube of radius 'r ' is given by h 
rg

Where, T is the surface tension ,  is the angle of contact and  is the density of the liquid.

If the length of the capillary tube is less than h, the liquid will not overflow.

Excess Pressure

2
The excess pressure inside a liquid drop of radius r is p  .
r

4
The excess pressure inside a liquid bubble of radius r is p  .
r

2T
The excess pressure inside an air bubble of radius r is p  .
r

Viscosity

The property of a fluid by virtue of which it tends to resist the relative motion between different
layers of it is known as Viscosity.
The internal tangential force which tends to destroy relative motion between the various layers of
 dv 
liquid is called viscous force. It is given by F  A 
 dx 

59
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

Where,  is the co-efficient of viscosity of the liquid

A is the area of the layers in contact

dv
is the velocity gradient between the layers.
dx

dv
F   if A  1 and  1.
dx

Thus, the co-efficient of viscosity of a liquid is defined as the tangential force per unit area required
to maintain unit velocity gradient.

The S.I. unit of co-efficient of viscosity is decapoise. It is also known as pascal second.

1 decapoise = 1kgm1s 1  1Nsm 2 .

The CGS unit of  is known as poise.

1 decapoise  10 poise.

Viscosity depends on temperature, pressure and nature of fluid.

Poiseuille’s formula
It gives the volume V of the liquid that flows out of a capillary tube per second under a constant
 Pr 4
pressure difference between the ends of the tube i.e., V 
8l

Where,  is the co-efficient of viscosity of the liquid, P is the pressure difference, r is the radius of
the capillary bore and l is the length of the capillary tube.

Stoke’s formula:

The viscous force F acting on a small sphere of radius r moving with a terminal velocity v in a liquid
of co-efficient of viscosity  is F  6 π rv .

The above relation is known as Stoke’s formula or Stoke’s law.

When a body is allowed to fall in a viscous fluid, its apparent weight in the liquid becomes equal to

viscous force when it reaches its terminal velocity i.e., 6 rv  r 3    g

4
3

2 r 2    g
  where  is the density of sphere and  is the density of liquid.
9 v

60
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

Astrophysics and Earth’s Atmosphere

Earth’s Atmosphere: The earth is surrounded by an envelope of gas known as the atmosphere.
Atmosphere extends to a height of about 560 km from the surface of the earth.

Atmospheric pressure decreases with elevation. The earth’s atmosphere is divided into four distinct
layers namely troposphere, stratosphere, mesosphere and thermosphere.

Van allen radiation belts consist of charged particles namely protons and electrons which surround
the earth in doughnut shaped regions. The particles are trapped by the magnetic field of the earth
and move in a spiral path around the field lines from pole to pole.

Aurora is a spectacular display of colours visible in the northern and southern latitudes. They are
usually produced during magnetic storms.

Astrophysics

Brightness of a star is measured on a scale called magnitude scale.

Visible stars are divided into six magnitude groups. Brightest stars are called first magnitude stars.
Faintest stars are called sixth magnitude stars. Brightness of first magnitude star is 10 times that of
sixth magnitude star.

If I1 and I2 are the brightness of 2 stars of magnitudes m1 and m2 , then

I2
m2  m1  2  5 log
I1

Intensity of a star varies with wavelength and is a maximum for a particular wavelength m .

mT  Constant where T is the absolute temperature of the star.

Stars are classified into 7 main groups O, B, A, F, G, K and M in order of decreasing temperature. Sun
is G star.
The luminosity of a star of radius R and temperature TK is given by L  4 R2  T 4 .

If M1 and M2 are the masses of 2 stars forming a binary, a A.U. is the distance between them and T

a3
the period of revolution in years, then M 1  M 2  .
T2

Luminosity L of a star increases with its mass L  M  where M is the mass of the star and  is
a constant.

61
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

Density of a star is maximum at its centre and decreases towards its edge. Age of the sun is about
4.5 billion years.

HR diagram is obtained by plotting luminosity of a star against its surface temperature. Giants and
super giants lie in the upper right of the diagram, white dwarfs lie at the lower left side of the HR
diagram. The radiations emitted by the sun are due to fusion reactions that take place in its core.

 r
Temperature T r  at a distance r from the core of the sun is given by T r   Tc 1   R being the
 R

radius of the sun and Tc the temperature at its core.

Pressure of a star is directly proportional to its mass and inversely proportional to 4th power of its
radius.

Photo diffusion time is the ratio of the total radiant energy E contained in the volume of the star
E
to its luminosity T  .
L

Problems

1. When a block of ice floating on water contained in a vessel melts. The level of water
(a) increases (b) decreases

(c) remains the same (d) may increase or decrease

2. The pressure in the water pipe at the basement of a building is 2  106 Nm2 . The height of the
tank above the pipe from which water is supplied is g  10 ms 2 
(a) 20m (b) 100m (c) 200 m (d) 400 m

3. A U tube contains water and methylated spirit separated by mercury. The mercury levels in the
two arms are in level with 0.2m of water in one arm and 0.25m of spirit in the other. If the
density of water  103 kgm3 that of spirit is ___________  103 kgm3 .
(a) 1.25 (b) 0.8 (c) 0.5 (d) 0.125

4. A cube of wood of side 0.25m weighing 12.5kg floats on water. Density of water 10 3 kgm 3 . The
depth to which the cube is immersed is
(a) 5m (b) 0.5m (c) 2m (d) 0.2m

5. An air bubble doubles its volume as it rises from the bottom of a tank to its surface, atmospheric
pressure  76cm of mercury. The depth of the tank is

62
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

(a) 10.34m (b) 1.034m (c) 5.17m (d) 0.517m

6. A body weighs 320 g in air and 260g in water and 272 g in oil. Specific gravity of oil is
(a) 0.8 (b) 1.25 (c) 8 (d) 12.5

7. A block of solid weighs 24 g in air and 21g when completely immersed in water. When
completely immersed in a liquid of specific gravity 1.2 , it will weigh
(a) 2.04 g (b) 20.4 g (c) 27.6 g
(d) 2.76 g

3
8. A body whose volume is 72 c.c floats with th of its volume under water. Its density is
4

__________  103 kgm3 .

(a) 7.5 (b) 0.75 (c) 75 (d) 750

9. The following figure shows two vessels A and B having the same base area but of different
shapes. Both are filled with water upto the same level. Then thrust on the base will be
(a) more in A
(b) more in B
A B
(c) same in A and B
(d) zero
10. A block of ice with a piece of iron frozen in it is floating on the water inside a vessel. When the ice
melts, the level of water inside the vessel
(a) will rise (b) will fall (c) will remain same as before

(d) will fall at first and then will rise when the iron piece sinks inside

11. An air tight box having a lid of area 12 cm2 is evacuated. If a force of 72 N is required to pull the
lid from the box, the pressure inside the box is [Atmospheric pressure is 1 atm]
(a) 0.5 atm (b) 2 atm (c) 0.41 atm (d) 0.64 atm

12. A vessel containing water when suspended from a spring balance, the spring balance reads 15 kg .
When a piece of iron of mass 1.8 kg is suspended by a string is immersed with half of its volume
inside the water, the reading of the spring balance is [relative density of iron  7.2 ]
(Assume g  10 ms 2 )

(a) 15 kg (b) 16.8 kg (c) 15.125 kg (d) 16.756 kg

63
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

13. A boat having a length of 5 m and breadth 1 m is floating on a lake. If a man gets on to the boat,
the boat sinks by 1 cm . The weight of the man is (Take g  10 ms 2 )
(a) 50 kg (b) 9 kg (c) 35 kg (d)
75 kg

14. A cylindrical vessel open at the top contains 20 litres of water. A small opening is provided at the
bottom of the vessel so that water drains out. 10 litres of water drains out of the opening in an
interval of time t1 and the next 10 litres at time t 2 . Then

(a) t1  t 2 (b) t1  t 2 (c) t1  t 2 (d) t1  t 2

15. A liquid flows through a pipe of non-uniform area of cross-section. If a1 and a 2 be the areas of

cross-sections a1  a2  then velocities at these two regions are in the ratio

(a) a1 / a2 (b) a 2 /a1 (c) a1/a2 (d) a 2/a1

16. A boat floating in a tank carries a large number of stones. If the stones are unloaded in the water
then
(a) the water level will increase (b) the water level will decrease

(c) the water level will remain constant (d) the water level first increases then decreases

17. Streamlined motion is promoted by

(a) wider tubes and low viscosity (b) narrow tubes and low viscosity

(c) wider tubes and high viscosity (d) narrow tubes and high viscosity

18. A gale blows over a house. The force due to the gale on the roof is
(a) in the upward direction (b) in the downward direction

(c) in the horizontal direction (d) zero

19. Water is flowing through a horizontal pipe with a narrow constriction at one end as
shown in figure. As the water enters the constriction A

(a) the velocity decreases and pressure increases

(b) the velocity of flow increases and pressure decreases A

(c) the velocity and pressure remain unchanged

(d) the rate of flow increases

64
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

20. A large tank filled with water has two holes at the bottom. One of the holes has the radius twice
that of the other. In a steady flow, the speed of the water leaving the larger hole is
(a) twice the speed of the water leaving the smaller hole

(b) four times the speed of the water leaving the smaller hole

(c) one fourth of the speed of the water leaving the smaller hole

(d) same as the speed of water leaving the smaller hole.

Surface tension of a liquid is due to

(a) electrical force between molecules (b) adhesive force between molecules

(c) cohesive force between molecules (d) gravitational force between molecules

Surface tension has units of

(a) N/m 2 (b) N/m (c) N-m (d) N  m2

64 identical water droplets combine to form a large drop. The ratio of the total surface energy of 64

droplets to that of large drop is

(a) 64 : 1 (b) 4 : 1 (c) 8 : 1 (d) none

The rain drops tend to assume spherical shape in order to

(a) to have maximum surface energy (b) attain symmetry

(c) have minimum surface energy (d) attain high speed while falling under
gravity

Which of the following has the greatest viscosity?

(a) Water (b) Castor oil (c) Mercury (d) Glycerine

A metal plate 100 cm2 in area is lying on a liquid layer of thickness 2 mm and coefficient of viscosity

2.0 Nsm2 . The minimum horizontal force required to move the plate with a speed of 1 cm/ s is

(a) 0.1 N (b) 1 N (c) 0.5 N (d) 0.25 N

The volume of water flowing per second through a capillary of length l under a constant pressure
difference P varies with the radius r of the tube as
(a) r 2 (b) 1/ r 2 (c) 1/ r 4 (d) r 4

65
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

The terminal velocity of a tiny steel sphere of mass m is vo in a liquid of co- efficient of viscosity  .

The terminal velocity of another steel sphere of mass 8m in the same liquid will be
(a) 8vo (b) 4vo (c) vo / 2 (d) 2vo

Earth’s atmosphere extends to about km from the surface of the earth.

(a) 56 km (b) 560 km (c) 5600 km (d) 56000 km

Atmospheric pressure
(a) Decreases with elevation (b) Increases with elevation

(c) First increases and then decreases with elevation (d) Does not depend on elevation

The densest region of the earth’s atmosphere is

(a) Troposphere (b) Stratosphere (c) Mesosphere (d)
Thermosphere

Ozone which absorbs and scatters ultraviolet radiation received from the sun is contained in
(a) Troposphere (b) Stratosphere (c) Mesosphere (d)
Thermosphere

The layer of the earth which makes radio communication possible is

(a) Thermosphere (b) Ionosphere (c) Mesosphere (d)
Stratosphere

The earth is protected and shielded from the solar wind by

(a) Ionosphere (b) Magnetosphere (c) Thermosphere (d)
Mesosphere

Exosphere contains mostly

(a) Carbon dioxide and oxygen (b) Hydrogen and helium

(c) Nitrogen and oxygen (d) Nitrogen and carbon dioxide

Amount of Insolation received by the earth is

(a) Minimum at equator, maximum at poles (b) Maximum at equator minimum at poles

(c) Same at equator and poles (d) Minimum at S pole, maximum at N pole.

Van Allen belts are

66
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

(a) Spherical in shape (b) Rectangular in shape

(c) Shaped like doughnuts (d) Elliptical in shape

Van Allen belts consists of

(a) Electrically charged particle like protons and electrons (b) Neutral particles

(c) Only electrons (d) Only protons

Space shuttles orbit round the earth in

(a) Thermosphere (b) Mesosphere (c) Stratosphere(d) all the above

Depletion of ozone layer may result in causing problems like

(a) Heart problems (b) Skin cancer and cataract

(c) Respiratory problems (d) all the above

Jet aircrafts usually fly in

(a) Stratosphere (b) Thermosphere (c) Mesosphere (d)
Troposphere

Van Allen belts consist of charged particles which more

(a) In a spiral path around the field lines from pole to pole (b) In a elliptical path

(c) In a circular path (d) In an irregular path

An aurora is
(a) A large solar flame (b) A spectacular display of colours

(c) A heavenly body (d) None of these

Auroras are usually produced during

(a) Magnetic storms (b) Solar eclipse (c) Linear eclipse (d)
Hurricanes

Brightness of a star is measured on a scale called

(a) Brightness scale (b) Luminosity scale (c) Magnitude scale (d) Intensity scale

Brightness stars are called

(a) first magnitude stars (b) Luminous stars

(c) Sixth magnitude stars (d) Nebulous stars

67
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

Stars as bright as first magnitude stars are called

(a) Second magnitude stars (b) Sixth magnitude stars

(c) Semi magnitude stars (d) Half magnitude stars

Faintest stars are called

(a) zero magnitude stars (b) sixth magnitude stars

(c) Second magnitude stars (d) dwarfs

If I1 and I2 are the brightness of 2 stars of magnitude m1 and m2 .

 I2   I2 
(a) m2  m1  2  5 log  
 (b) m2  m1  2  5 log  

 I1   I1 

m2 I  m1 I 
(c)  2  5 log 2  (d)  2  5 log 2 
m1  I1  m2  I1 

If the intensity of a star is maximum for a particular wave length m and T its temperature,
m m m
(a)  constant (b) mT  constant (c)  constant (d)  constant
T T2 T

If M1 and M2 are the masses of a star forming a binary "a" the distance between them in A.U and T1

the period of revolution in years.

M1 a3 M 2 a3 a3 T2
(a)  (b)  (c) M 1  M 2  2
(d) M 1  M 2 
M2 T 2 M1 T 2 T a3

Luminosity of a star
(a) Increases with its mass (b) Decreases with its mass

(c) Is independent of its mass (d) May increase or decrease with its mass

If L is the luminosity of a star and T its absolute temperature,

(a) LT (b) L  T 2 (c) L  T 3 (d) L  T 4

Energy given out by the sun is due to

(a) Nuclear fusion reactions (b) Nuclear fission reactions

(c) Radio active disintegration (d) All the above

If L is the luminosity of a star whose radius is R .

1 1
(a) L 4
(b) L  R4 (c) L  R2 (d) L
R R2

68
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

Age of the sun is about

(a) 4.5 lakh years (b) 4.5 million years (c) 4.5 billion years (d) 450 billion years

Answers:
1. c 2. c 3. b 4. d 5. b 6. a 7. b 8. b 9. c 10. b
11. c 12. c 13. a 14. b 15. d 16. c 17. b 18. a 19. b 20. d
21. c 22. b 23. b 24. c 25. d 26. a 27. d 28. b 29. b 30. a
31. a 32. b 33. b 34. b 35. b 36. b 37. c 38. a 39. a 40. b
41. a 42. a 43. b 44. a 45. c 46. a 47. a 48. b 49. b 50. b
51. c 52. a 53. d 54. a 55. c 56. c

69
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

WAVES AND OSCILLATIONS

Oscillations
Oscillatory motion is a periodic motion where the motion of a body repeats itself again and again at regular
intervals of time. It is not the same as rotatory motion.

1
Relation between frequency f and time period T : f 
T

Definition of SHM
A particle is said to execute simple harmonic motion if its acceleration is directly proportional to its displacement
from its equilibrium position and is always directed towards the equilibrium position.
Force equation for SHM
F  ma  kx

Where, k is a positive constant, m is the mass of the particle

x is the displacement from the equilibrium position and

a is the acceleration of the particle,

 a  (k / m) x

Terms associated with SHM

Some of the terms used in the description of SHM are (i) displacement (ii) amplitude (iii) oscillation (iv) period (v)
frequency (vi) angular frequency and (vii) phase.
Equation of linear SHM
y  A sin t

where, y is the displacement, A is the amplitude,  is the angular frequency

  2f , f being the frequency.

Velocity and acceleration of a particle executing SHM

dy
1. Velocity, v   A cos t or v   A 2  y 2
dt
vmax  A and vmin  0

d2y
2. Acceleration, a    2 y
2
dt

a max   2 A and amin  0

70
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

y Displaceme nt
Time period of SHM is T  2  2
a Accelerati on
Energy of a particle executing SHM
A particle executing SHM Possesses both potential energy and kinetic energy. The sum of the two energies is
always a constant.

1
If y be the displacement of the particle from the equilibrium position then potential energy E p  m 2 y 2 ,
2
1 1
kinetic energy E k  m 2 ( A 2  Y 2 ) so that total energy E  E p  E k  m 2 A 2  2 2 A 2 f 2 m .
2 2

Problems

1. A particle executing SHM has an amplitude 0.6 m . The time taken by particle in covering a distance 0.3 m
from mean position, if time period is 3.14 s is
(a) 2.6 s (b) 0.26 s (c) 6.2 s (d) 0.62s

2. A spring balance has a scale that reads from 0 to 50 kg. The length of the scale is 20 cm. A body suspended
from this balance, when displaced and released, oscillates with a period of 0.6s. The weight of the body is
(a) 192 N (b) 129 N (c) 912 N (d) 219 N

3. Figure shows two different spring arrangements. If

the mass in the arrangement is displaced from its
equilibrium position and released, the resulting
frequency of vibration is
1 k1k2
(a) 0 (b)
2 k1  k2 m

1  k1k2 
(c)  (d)  
2 
 k1  k2 m 


4. The acceleration due to gravity on the surface of a satellite is 1.5 ms -2 , the time period of a simple pendulum
on it, if its time period on earth is t , will be
(a)  (b) 3.5t (c) 4.8t (d) 2.56t

5. Which of the following is not essential for simple harmonic motion?

(a) Inertia (b) Restoring force (c) Material medium (d) Gravity

6. The kinetic energy of a particle executing SHM is maximum, when its displacement is equal to
(a) zero (b) amplitude/4 (c) amplitude/2 (d) amplitude

71
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

7. Two simple harmonic oscillations of same amplitude and angular frequencies  and 2 are impressed on
a particle in mutually perpendicular directions. What is the nature of the path followed? Given that the
initial phase difference between them is  2

(a) Straight line (b) Circle (c) Parabola (d) Ellipse

8. The force constant of SHM is measured in

(a) Nm (b) Nm-1 (c) N (d) some other unit

9. Two pendulum oscillate with a constant phase difference of 90 . If the time period of one is T , that of other
will be
(a) T 2 (b) T (c) 2T (d) 4T

10. Two springs of force constant k1 and k2 are connected in series. The spring constant of the combination is

k k k1  k2 k1k2
(a) k1  k2 (b) 1 2 (c) (d)
2 k1k2 k1  k2

Waves
A wave is a sort of disturbance in which energy is transmitted from one place to another without the actual
transfer of medium.

Waves are broadly classified in two ways :

Based on medium : mechanical waves and non-mechanical waves.

Based on vibration of particles in the medium – Mechanical waves may be longitudinal or transverse waves.

Longitudinal wave Motion

The wave motion in which the particles of the medium vibrate about their mean positions in the direction of
propagation (traveling) of the wave is known as Longitudinal wave motion. Such waves propagate in a medium
in the form of rarefactions and compressions.

Transverse Wave Motion

If the particles of a medium vibrate in a direction normal to the direction of travel of wave, the motion is called
transverse wave motion. Electromagnetic waves are also transverse in nature.
Crests and troughs are formed when a transverse wave propagates.
Progressive wave is that wave which travels in the same direction such that its amplitude remains same.
Equation of a progressive simple harmonic wave
The most general form of equation of a simple harmonic wave traveling along ve x  axis is

  x 
Y  A sin   t     
  v 

where A  amplitude of the wave

  angular frequency

72
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

v  wave velocity

  initial phase

y  displacement of the particle at x and at time t .

Various forms of equation of progressive wave

 x  t x
(i) y  A sin 2f  t   (ii) y  A sin 2   
 v T 

2
(iii) y  A sin vt  x  (iv) y  A sin t  kx


where f  frequency of the wave

  wavelength of the wave

k  propagation constant.

Phase difference and Path difference

Phase difference  between two particles separated by a distance x (called the path difference) at time t is

given by

2
  x 



Alternatively, path difference  between two particles having a phase difference  is   
2

Wave velocity and Particle velocity

Wave velocity is the time rate of transfer of disturbance or distance traveled by the wave in one second. It is

given by v  f .

The time rate of change of displacement of a particle is called the particle velocity. It is given by u  dy / dt . The

maximum value that u can take is

u max  A  A(2f )

Particle velocity is different from wave velocity.

The rate of change of velocity of a particle is called particle acceleration.

du d 2 y
a  , a max  A 2 .
dt dt 2

Intensity of a wave : I  2 2 A2 f 2 v , where  is the volume density of the medium. The S.I unit of intensity is

Wm 2 .

73
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

I
 2 2 A2 f 2   E , is the energy density of the wave. It gives the total energy of all the particles per unit
v
volume of the medium.

Principle of Superposition

According to the principle of superposition, the net effect produced at the point is the vector sum of the effects
due to the individual waves.

When two progressive waves y1  a sint  Kx and y2  b sint  Kx    superpose on each other , the

resultant displacement of the particle due to their superposition is given by y  y1  y2  R sint  Kx    , where

 b sin  
R  a2  b2  2abcos is the resultant amplitude and   tan 1  is the phase difference between the
 a  b cos  
resultant wave and the first wave.

 When   0 , R  a  b

 When    , R  a  b

 1 b 
 When   rad , R  a 2  b 2 and   tan  
2 a

d2y 1  d 2 y 
Differential Equation of wave motion: 
dx2 v 2  dt 2 

Problems
A transverse wave of period T is propagating through a medium. The particles at the crest reaches the mean
position in ………. seconds
3T T T
(a) T (b) (c) (d)
4 2 4

A wave of frequency 500 Hz crosses a distance of 1000 meters in 5 seconds. Then the number of waves contained
in a distance of 500 m is…
(a) 500 (b) 1000 (c) 1250 (d) 2500

A wave of frequency 500 Hz has a velocity of 300 m/s. The distance between two nearest points which are 60 0
out of phase is
(a) 100 cm (c) 60 cm (c) 0.6 cm (d) 10 cm

Two waves represented by y  a sin wt  kx and y  a cos wt  kx are superposed. The amplitude of the resultant

wave is

(a) a (b) 2a (c) 2a (d) zero

Two waves of equal amplitude A and equal frequency are superposed. If the amplitude of the resultant wave is
also A then the phase difference between the wave is….

74
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

(a) 0o (b) 600 (c) 90o (d) 120o

Transverse wave can propagate

(a) both in a gas and in a metal (b) in a gas but not in a metal

(c) not in a gas but in a metal (d) neither in a gas nor in a metal

When the frequency of a wave motion is doubled without changing the amplitude, the intensity of the new wave
motion compared to the old wave will be in the ratio
(a) 1: 4 (b) 1: 3 (c) 1: 2 (c) 1: 1

When a stone is dropped into a quite pool of water in a pond, the wave motion is
(a) transverse (b) longitudinal

(c) both transverse and longitudinal (d) neither transverse nor longitudinal

A boat at anchor is rocked by waves whose crests are 100 m apart and whose velocity is 25 m/s. These waves
reach the boat once every
(a) 0.25s (b) 4s (c) 250s (d) 2500s

When a wave travels in a medium the displacement of a particle at any instant of time t is given by

y  0.03 sin( 2t  0.01x) where y and x are in metres and t in seconds. The velocity of the wave is
(a) 100 m/s (b) 200 m/s (c) 300 m/s (d) 30 m/s

When a wave propagates through a medium, the phase difference between two particles 0.1 m apart is  / 8
radians. The wavelength of the wave is
(a) 0.6 m (b) 1.0 m (c) 1.2 m (d) 1.6 m

A hospital uses an ultrasonic scanner to locate tumours in a tissue. What is the wavelength of the wave in a
tissue in which the speed of the wave is 1.7 km/s? (The operating frequency of the scanner is 4.2 MHz).
(a) 0.04 cm (b) 0.04m (c) 0.4 cm (d) 0.4 m

When a wave passes from one medium to another, there is , in general a change in
(a) the velocity, the wavelength, the amplitude and frequency of the wave
(b) the wavelength, the amplitude, the direction of propagation and the frequency of the wave
(c) the velocity, the wavelength, the direction of propagation and the frequency of the wave
(d) the velocity, the wave length, the amplitude and the direction of the wave

Three waves of equal frequency having amplitudes 10 m,4m, and 7  m arrive at a given point with successive

phase difference of  / 2 . The amplitude of the resulting wave in m is given by

(a) 7 (b) 6 (c) 5 (d) 4

15. Which one of the following does not represent a travelling wave

(a) y  f x  vt  (b) y  ym sin k x  vt  (c) y  ym logx  vt  

(d) y  f x 2  vt 2 

75
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

C
16. The diagram shows the propagation of a wave.
O
Which points are in phase A B D E
(a) A, B (b) B, C

(c) B, D (d) E, B

17. A wave is represented by the equation y  A sin 10x  15t   / 3 , where x is in metre and t is in second.

The expression represents

(a) a wave travelling in the positive x  direction with a velocity of 1.5 m/s
(b) a wave travelling in the negative x  direction with a velocity 1.5 m/s
(c) a wave travelling in the positive y  direction with a wavelength of 0.2 m

(d) a wave travelling in the positive x  direction with a wavelength 0.2 m

18. The distance between two points differing in phase by 60 on a wave, velocity 360 m/s and frequency 500
Hz is
(a) 24 cm (b) 12 cm (c) 6 cm (d) 1 cm

19. The frequency of a sinusoidal wave y  0.40 cos 2000 t  0.080  would be

1000
(a) 100  Hz (b) 2000 Hz (c) 20 Hz (d) Hz


20. A transverse wave of frequency 100 Hz propagates with a velocity 100 m/s. The phase difference between
two points 2.25 m apart is…radians
  
(a) 0 (b) (c) (d)
2 8 4

Sound
Sound is a form of energy which travels from one point to the other as waves to produce sensation
of hearing. Sound of frequency range 20 Hz to 20 kHz is audible by the human ear. Sound obeys the
law of reflection, interference, diffraction. It can not be polarized.

Newton’s Relation

E
Velocity of sound in a medium is v  where E is modulus of elasticity and  is density of

medium.

76
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

Y
If the medium is a solid then v  , where Y is Young’s modulus of elasticity.


B
If the medium is a liquid then v  , where B is the Bulk modulus of elasticity.


P C
If the medium is a gaseous medium then v  , where   p and p is the pressure of the gas.
 Cv
This equation is called Newton-Laplace Equation.

Intensity of sound: I  2 2 A2 f 2 v

The unit of intensity of sound is Wm-2. Intensity level of sound expressed in decibel is given by
 I 
I L  10 log  .
 I0 

Loudness of sound
The sensation of hearing produced in ear enabling distinction between a faint and a loud sound is
called loudness. It is denoted as L. It is expressed in sone.
Relation between Intensity and Loudness : L  K loge I , where K is a constant which depends on the
sensation of ear and I is the intensity.
 Sounds which are unpleasant and produce jarring effect on the ear are called noise.
 Pleasing sound produced by regular pulses is called musical sound.

Musical Scale
It is a sequence of selected frequencies. There are two types of musical scales (i) Diatonic scale (ii)
Tempered scale.
Pitch is a sensation to the brain produced by sound wave reaching the ear which enables it to
distinguish a sharp sound from a dull sound. Greater the frequency of a musical note, higher is its
pitch and vice versa. Pitch and frequency are not same.
Beat – The alternate rise and fall of sound is called beats.
The number of times the resultant intensity of sound attains maximum value or minimum value in
one second is called the beat frequency ( fb ) and fb  f1 ~ f2 .

Doppler Effect : The apparent change in the observed frequency due to the relative motion
between the source and the listener is known as Doppler’s effect.
 v  vw  v L 
The most general formula for the apparent frequency is f '   f

 v  vw  v S 

Where v  velocity of sound, vw  velocity of medium, vL  velocity of listener, vs  velocity of

source, f  true frequency of sound.

77
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

Problems
1. If two sound waves each of angular frequency  and amplitude A differing in phase by  / 2 are
superimposed on each other, the maximum amplitude and angular frequency of the resultant wave is

A  A 
(a) , (b) , (c) 2 A, (d) 2 A,
2 2 2 2

2. If two sound waves having phase difference  and amplitudes a and b superpose, the resultant amplitude
will be

(a) (a + b) only (b) (a-b) only (c) a 2  b 2 only (d) a 2  b 2  2ab cos

3. The frequency of a stationary source is 480 Hz. An observer is moving 20 m/sec away and a steamer moving
10 m/sec towards the source and away from the observer. The apparent frequency of the reflected sound for
the observer will be : (if the velocity of sound is 340 m/sec)
(a) 510 Hz (b) 480 Hz (c) 540 Hz (d) 600 Hz

4. A tuning fork whose frequency as given by manufacturer is 512 Hz is being tested with an accurate
oscillator. It is found that the fork produces a heat of 2 Hz when oscillator reads 514 Hz but produces heat of
6 Hz when oscillator reads 510 Hz. The actual frequency of fork is:
(a) 508 Hz (b) 512 Hz (c) 516 Hz (d) 518 Hz

5. Waxing and waning of sound is noticeable, if a waxing and waning repeats, itself at an interval
(a) more than 1/10th second (b) between 1/3rd second and 1/10th second

(c) less than 1/10th second (d) between 1 second and 1/3rd second

6. Doppler’s effect will not be applicable when the velocity of sound source is:
(a) equal to that of the sound velocity (b) less than the velocity of sound

(c) greater than the velocity of sound (d) zero

7. Two tuning forks A and B vibrating simultaneously produce 5 beats. Frequency of B is 512. It is seen that if
one arm of A is filled, then the number of beats increases. Frequency of A will be:
(a) 502 (b) 507 (c) 517 (d) 522

8. The intensity of sound gets reduced by 20% on passing through a slab. The reduction in intensity on passage
through two consecutive slabs, is:
(a) 40% (b) 36% (c) 60% (d) 50%

9. A person feels 2.5% difference of frequency of a motor –car horn. If the motor car is moving to the person
and the velocity of sound is 320 m/sec, then the velocity of car will be:
(a) 8 m/s (approx.) (b) 800 m/s (c) 7 m/s (d) 6 m/s (approx.)

10. Beats are produced by two waves given by y1  a sin2000  t and y2  a sin2008  t . The number of beats

heard per second is:

78
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

(a) zero (b) one (c) four (d) eight

11. The wavelength of light coming from a star shifts towards violet end of the spectrum. This indicates that the
star is
(a) approaching the earth (b) receding from the earth

(c) stationary (d) rotating

12. The velocity of sound in water is 1600 ms 1 , then bulk modulus of water is

(a) 2.56 106 Nm2 (b) 2.56 104 Nm2

(c) 2.56 Nm2 (d) 2.56  109 Nm2

13. The frequency of vibration of a string can be increased by a factor 2 by changing the tension to
(a) half the initial value (b) twice the initial value

(c) one fourth of the initial value (d) four times the initial value

14. In a stretched string fixed at both the ends, the area of cross section of the string is halved and length is
doubled. Then the frequency becomes…the initial value.
1 1 1
(a) 2 times (b) times (c) times (d) times
4 2 3

Stationary Waves
Superposition of two identical wave propagating with same speed but in opposite directions forms
stationary waves. They are also known as standing waves,
2t 2x
Equation of stationary wave : y  A sin , where A  2 A' cos where A' is the amplitude of
T 
reflected wave.
2 2x
Intensity of wave: I  A2  4 A' cos2 .


Nodes
 3 5 7
For minimum intensity, x  , , , ,...... . For these values of x the intensity of resultant wave is
4 4 4 4
zero so these points gives the position nodes.
Antinodes
 3
For maximum intensity, x  0, ,  , ,2 ,..... . For these values of x , the intensity of resultant wave is
2 2
maximum so these points gives the position antinodes.

79
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

Vibrations of air columns

Air columns are cylindrical tubes (wooden or metallic) of uniform cross-section containing air. They
are also called organ pipes. There are two types of organ pipes. (1) closed organ pipe and (2) open
organ pipe.
Closed Organ Pipe
v v
The frequency of the fundamental mode of vibrations is f1  
1 4L

3v
The frequency of the First overtone f 2   3 f1
4L

5v
The frequency of the Second overtone f3   5 f1
4L

In Closed organ pipe only odd harmonics are present.

Open Organ Pipe
v
Frequency of first mode of vibration - f1 
2L

2v
Frequency of Second Harmonic - f2   2 f1
2L

In open organ pipe both the even and odd harmonics are present.
Laws of vibrations of stretched strings

1 T
 The fundamental frequency of vibration of a stretched string is f 
2L m

1
 1st law - Law of Length : f  when T and m are constants.
L

 2nd law – Law of tension : f  T when L and m are constant

1
 3rd law – Law of mass : f  when L and T are constant.
m

Resonance: It is a phenomenon when frequency of external periodic force is equal to the natural
frequency of the body to give larger amplitude of the forced oscillations of the body.
Sonometer
A sonometer is a device used to determine the frequency of a tuning fork. It is also used to verify
the laws of stretched strings. It works on the principle of resonance.
Acoustics of Buildings
It is a branch of physics which deals with the design and construction of buildings like cinema halls,
auditoriums etc., so that the speech and music is audible to listeners at all position without any
disturbance.

 The persistence of sound is called reverberation

 The reverberation time is the time taken for a sound to reach 10 6 times of its peak steady value.

80
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

Sabine’s formula for reverberation time

0.165V
According to Sabine, T 
 as

Where T  reverberation time in second

v  volume of the hall in m 3

a  absorption co-efficient of the surface

s  surface area of the absorber in m 2

A perfect absorber of sound is an open window.

Problems
1. A cylindrical tube open at both ends has a fundamental frequency F in air. Half of the length of the tube is
dipped vertically in water. The fundamental frequency of the air column now becomes
(a) F (b) 2F (c) F/2 (d) F2

2. The frequency of the fundamental note produced by closed organ pipe is n . If the diameter of the pipe is
doubled, the frequency of, the fundamental note produced by it will be
(a) 4n (b) 2n (c) n (d) n/2

3. In an open organ pipe if the fundamental frequency is f , then the frequencies of the overtones will be in the

ratio to the fundamental

(a) 1: 3: 5 (b) 1: 2: 3 (c) 12 : 32 : 52 (d) 12 : 22 : 32

4. A organ pipe P1 closed at one end vibrating in its first harmonic and another pipe P2 open at both ends
vibrating in its third harmonic are in resonance with a given tuning fork. The ratio of the length of P 1 to that
of P2 is
8 3 1 1
(a) (b) (c) (d)
3 8 2 3

5. If v is the velocity of sound in air, the frequency of the third overtone in the vibration of air column in a
closed pipe of length L is
(a) 3 v /2L (b) 3 v /4L (c) 5 v /4L (d) 7 v /4L

6. Stationary waves of frequency 350 Hz are formed in air. If the velocity of sound in air is 350 m/s, the
distance between a node and its next antinode is
(a) 1.0 m (b) 0.50m (c) 0.25 m (d) 0.1 m

7. A stretched string of length one metre and mass 5x 10 -4 kg fixed at both ends is under a tension of 20 N. It is
plucked at a point situated at 25 cm from one end. It would vibrate with a frequency
(a) 400 Hz (b) 100 Hz (c) 200 Hz (d) 256 Hz

81
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

8. In Melde's experiment, the string vibrates in two segments with a tension of 0.32 N. The tension required to
make it vibrate in four segments is
(a) 0.08 N (b) 0.15 N (c) 0.64 N (d) 1.28 N

9. In a sonometer wire, the produced waves are

(a) longitudinal (b) transverse, stationary and unpolarised

(c) transverse, stationary and polarised (d) transverse, progressive and polarised

10. A uniform string of length L , mass M is fixed at both ends under tension T . Then it can vibrate with
frequencies given by n in the formula

1  T  1 T  L T  1 M 
(a) n    (b) n    (c) n    (d) n   
2  ML  2 M  2 M  2  LT 

11. z1  Acoswt  kx , z2  Acoswt  ky and z3  Acoswt  kz represent the equations of progressive waves.

Then,
(a) z1 and z2 can produce stationary waves

(b) z2 and z3 can produce stationary waves

(c) z3 and z1 can produce stationary waves

(d) no pair can produce stationary waves

12. The waves set up in a closed organ pipe are

(a) longitudinal and stationary (b) transverse and stationary

(c) longitudinal and progressive (d) transverse and progressive

13. Air column in a tube dipped in water vibrates in its fundamental mode. If water is replaced by an oil of
higher density, then its frequency will
(a) increase (b) decrease

(c) remains the same (d) either increase or decrease depending on the density of the oil

14. Of the following, the graph that better represents the variation of frequency f of a vibrating string with the

square root of tension T is

f f f f

T T T T
Answers
(1) (2) (3) (4)

82
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

Oscillations
1. b 2. d 3. d 4. d 5. d 6. a 7. c 8. b 9. b 10. d

Waves
1. d 2. c 3. d 4. b 5. d 6. c 7. a 8. a 9. b 10. b
11. d 12. a 13. d 14. c 15. c 16. d 17. b 18. b 19. d 20. b

Sound
1. d 2. d 3. c 4. c 5. a 6. c 7. c 8. b 9. a 10. c
11. a 12. d 13. d 14. c

Stationary waves
1. a 2. c 3. b 4. c 5. d 6. c 7. c 8. a 9. c 10. a
11. d 12. a 13. c 14. b

83
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

ELECTROSTATICS

1. The body becomes positively charged, when the electrons are removed from the body.
2. The body becomes negatively charged when the electrons are added to the body.
3. The mass and weight of the body decreases, when the body is positively charged.
4. The mass and weight of the body increases when the body is negatively charged.
5. Properties of electric charges:
(a) There are two kinds of electric charges namely positive and negative.
(b) Like charges repel and unlike charges attract each other.
(c) Electric charges are conserved (during the process of charging law of conservation of charges holds
good)
(d) Electric charges are quantized q  ne

(Where n is the integer and e is the charge of an electron)

(e) Millikan showed experimentally that the charge of an electrons e  1.6  1019 C .

[Elementary charge  e  1.6  1019 C ]

(f) Electric charges reside over the outer surface of a charged isolated conductor.
(g) Charges concentrate more at the pointed end of charged conductor.
(h) Charges are unaffected by their motion.
(i) Charge is a scalar quantity.
6. Classification of substance:
(a) Substances which allow charges to pass through them are called conductors. Ex: metals, earth, human
body etc.
(b) Substance which do not allow charges to pass through them are known as insulators (dielectrics). Ex:
Glass, mica, paper, wood etc.,
(c) Substance which lie in between conductors and insulators in their ability to conduct electricity are
known as semi conductors. Eg: Germanium & Silicon etc.,
charge Q 
7. Surface density of charges σ  
surface area A 

(a) Surface density of charge is directly proportional to the curvature of the surface.
(b) Surface density of charge is maximum at the pointed end of a charged conductor.
(c) Surface density of charge is inversely proportional to the square of the radius of curvature.


(d)  is a vector quantity. Dimensional formula σ  AT L2 
(e) Coulomb/ m2 is the SI unit of surface density of charge.
8. Methods of charging a body: (a) by friction (b) by conduction (c) by induction
(a) Charge acquired by the conductor is same as that on the charging body in case of conduction till
both the conductors acquire same potential.
(b) Charge acquired by the conductor is opposite to that on the charging body but equal in magnitude
in case of induction.

84
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

(c) Charge acquired by both the conductors are equal in magnitude but opposite in nature in case of
friction.
9. The presence and kind of electric charges can be detected using a device Gold leaf electroscope.
10. The positive and negative charges first identified by Benjamin Franklin.
11. The word electric charge was first introduced by G.W. Gilbert.
(a) The fundamental quantity possessed by the particles of matter because of which they exhibit
electrical interaction with other particles is called charge.
12. Coulomb’s law:
q 1q 2
(a) Fa  for charges in free space
4  0 d 2

q 1q 2
(b) Fm  for charges in dielectric medium
4 0r d 2

1
where 0  8.85  1012 Farad/m is called permitivity of free space   9  109 Nm2 c2
4 0

electric displacement D electric induction

(c) Absolute permitivity   0
electric intensityE  electric intesnity

Fa 
(d) Relative permitivity (dielectric constant) r  
Fm 0


(e) r has no unit. Dimensional formula for 0 M1L3T 4A2 
(f) Fm1 or C2N1m2 is the SI unit of absolute permitivity 0

(g) Dielectric constant of the metal is infinity   . (i) Dielectric constant of air/Vacuum is  r  1 . (ii) For any

substance  r  1 .


(h) The SI unit of charge is coulomb and dimensional formula for charge is M oLoA 1T 1  Q 
(i) Coulomb’s inverse square law applies only for point charges at rest.

(j) The force exerted by each charge is same but acts in opposite direction [obey’s Newton’s III law]

(k) Coulomb’s law holds good for distance from 1015 m to few kilometers.
(l) When a dielectric medium is introduced between the two charges, the force between them decreases
Fa  Fm
(m) Coulomb’s Law in vector form.
  q q 
(i) The electro static force on Q2 due to Q1 F21   1 2 2  d12
 4 0 d 

85
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

 
Where d 12 is the unit vector in the direction of F 21

Q1 d̂12 Q1
(i)  
d F̂21
F̂12 Q1 d̂12
(ii)  

     
(iii) F 21   F 12 (iv) d 21   d 12 (v) d12  d 21  1

13. Properties of electric lines of forces:

(a) They start from positive charge and terminate on negative charge.
(b) No two lines of forces intersect each other.
(c) The tangent drawn to the curved lines of force at any point gives the direction of the electric field at that
point.
(d) No electric lines of force exists inside the surface of a charged conductor (since its r is infinity)

[therefore metals are used for electrostatic shielding]

(e) The lines of force around a point positive charge are diverging (outward).
(f) The lines of force around a point negative charge are converging [inward]
(g) The concept of electric lines of force was first introduced by Michel Faraday.
14. Electric intensity at a point:
F Force
(a) E  
Q test charge

(b) Newton/coulomb is the SI unit of electric intensity NC 1 or (V/m)  


 F
(c) Electric intensity is a vector. E 
Q

(d) Dimensional formula for E is  E  M 1L1T 3 A1  

Flectric flux φ  φ
(e) Electric intensity E  E
Surface area A  A

(f )Electric intensity at a distance r from a point charge Q is

E
 Q 
E r r>R
4  0 r 2 R
O
R< r r
 
Where r is a unit vector in the direction of E


 Qr Q
(i) E  (ii) E 
4  0 r 3
4  0r 2

86
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

(g) Intensity of the electric field inside a charged spherical conductor is zero. (Since charge residues only on
the outer surface of the conductor)

Q Q
E for r  R1 further Emax  (where R is the radius of the spherical conductor)
4  0 r 2 4  0 R 2

(h) The electric intensity at the center of the charged ring is zero.

(i) Intensity of electric field near a non conducting infinite sheet of charge is given by

   
E for conductorE  
2 0  0 


(j) Intensity of electric field in between the plates of parallel plate condenser is E 
0

(k) If three charges q coulomb each are placed at the three corners of an equilateral triangle. Then the

intensity of the electric field at the intersection of the medians is zero.

(l) If four charges of q coulomb each are placed at the four vertices of a square of side ‘a’ the intensity of the
electric field at the intersection of the diagonal is zero.

(m) If E1 and E2 are the magnitude of the electric

fields at a point inclined at an angle  then

E1

(i) Magnitude of the resultant field E

E  E12  E2  2E1E2 cos 

 O  E2
(ii) The angle made by the resultant field E
  E2 sin 
w.r.t E 1 }   tan1  
 E1  E2 cos 
15. Electric dipole: (a) Two equal unlike charges separated by a small distance constitutes an electric dipole
(b) Charge on electric dipole is zero.

2l
(c) Electric field of dipole is not zero.
  -q p +q
(d) Dipole moment P  q 2  

(e) Dipole moment is a vector. It’s direction is along the axis of the dipole. [that means directed from – q to
+ q]
(f) S.I. Unit of dipole moment is coulomb metere [Cm]
(g) Dimensional formula of P = [A T L]

P 1  3 cos 2  
16. (a) Magnitude of Electric field at a point M due to a dipole E   
4  0 d 3

(b) Direction of the electric field E at M makes an angle  with OM such that tan  tan 2

87
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

 
P 1  3 cos2 
  
(c) In the vector form E    P where P is the unit vector along the dipole axis.
4  0d 3

 2P 
(d) Electric intensity at a point on the axial line (End – on Position) E A   P
4  0d  
3

(e) Electric intensity at a point on the equilatorial line (Broad side on Position)
 P 
EB   P
4  0d  
3

(f) For same value of d, EA  2EB

(g) Electric intensity due to an electric dipole, E 1 d 3

(i) General case (ii) End – on Position (iii) Broad side-on position

(a) Magnitude of the torque on an electric dipole placed in uniform electric field.
M
T  PEsin .
 O=0
E EA M P
(b) -q p O =0 M
  90
•+q O E
d O  90o
d
 +q T=PxE
-Q P
-q l O l +q O

 
Direction of the torque is perpendicular to the plane containing both P and E

  
(c) In the vector form T  P E
 
(d) When the dipole moment P is perpendicular to the electric field E , maximum torque acts on the


dipole, i.e. Tmax  PE   900  1 

(e) Torque is minimum when dipole moment P is parallel to the electric +q
F = Eq

field E  E
[   0 ,   180 , sin   0 ] F = - Eq
-q

(f) S.I.Unit of torque is Nm.

(g) Net force on a dipole in an uniform electric field is zero.
(h) Net force on a dipole in a non uniform electric field is not zero.
17. Electric Polarisation. The process of inducing equal and opposite charges on the two opposite faces of the
dielectric on the application of electric field is called electric polarization.
18. Net electric field inside the dielectric, E  EA  E1  EA  r

 
(a) Electric flux through the small area (ds) } d  E . ds

(b) Electric flux through the entire surface of area    EdS cos 

(c) Electric flux a scalar quantity.

88
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

(d) S.I. Unit of flux is Nm2C1

(e) 
Dimensional formula for electric flux   ML3TA 1 
Q
19. Gauss theorem: (a) TNEF  dsE cos 


(a) Electric intensity near the surface of a charged conductor E 
0

(b) Electric intensity due to an electric, dipole is zero.

20. Interaction of electric field and charge:
(a) Electric field can exert force both on a stationary charge and also on a moving charge.
(b) The force exerted by the electric field on a charge (e) is F = Ee
(c) The ratio of the magnitude of the forces exerted by the electric field on proton and electron are in the
ratio 1 : 1.
(d) The ratio of the accelerations acquired by the charges in the electric field are in the ratio of their specific

Ee1 Ee1 e e  F Ee 
charges a1 : a2  :  1 : 2  a   
M1 M2 M1 M2  m m

(e) If a charged particle remains stationary in a uniform electric field then the net force acting on the
mg
particle is zero. Ee = mg  E 
e
(f) If the above case if the direction of the fixed is suddenly reversed
Ee
then the acceleration acquired by the particle is given by e • mg
2mg +++++++++++++++
 2g
m
21. Electric potential at a point:

work done W   W
(a) Electric potential V  V  
ch arg eq   q 

(b) Volt is the SI unit of electric potential

(c) Electric potential is a scalar


(d) The dimensional formula of electric potential is V  M 1L2 T 3A 1 
(e) The electric potential of the earth is taken as a reference of potential and assigned the value zero. Also
may body connected to the earth is also at zero potential.
dw
(f) Electric potential difference dV  V1  V2  .
q

(g) If a charged particle is accelerated through a potential difference of V volt then the KE acquired by the
1 2
particle is given by mv  eV  KE .
2
(h) The ratio of the K.E. acquired by the two particles accelerated from rest through the same potential are
in the ratio of their charges KE1 : KE2  e1 : e2 .

(i) The ratio of the velocities acquired by two particles accelerated from rest through the same P.D. are in

 i v e 
v1 e1 m1 e1m2  
the ratio    1
v2 e2 m2 e2m1 iiv m 
 

89
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

22. Calculation of electric potential.

q
(a) Electric potential due to a point charge q at distance r V 
4  0r q
V
(b) The potential due to positive charge is positive and due to negative 4  0r charge

is negative.
(c) Potential due to a charged hollow spherical conductor of radius R:
r>R
q
(i) V  Vmaxfor r  R Vmax  thus potential is O
4  0 R

constant from center to the surface of the conductor.

 1
(ii) Outside the conductor potential is inversely proportional to the distance from the center V 
 r

dv
23. Relation between electric field E and potential gradient E  
dx
24. Equipotential surface:
(a) The locus of all points which are at the same potential is known as equipotential surface.
(b) The electric lines of forces are normal to the equipotential surface.
(c) No work is required to move a charge from one point to another point on the equipotential surface.
(d) No two equipotential surface intersect with each other.
(e) Near an isolated point charge the equipotential surface is a sphere.
(f) P.D. between any two points on the equipotential surface is zero.

25. Electric Static Potential Energy:

The work done on a charge q in bringing it from infinity to a point in the field against the electrical force is called
electrostatic potential energy.
q1q2
(a) P.E. of a system of two point charges U 
4  0 d

1  q1q2 q2 q3 q3q1 
(b) P.E. of a system of three point charges U     
4  0  d1 d2 d3 

26. Important relations.

q q V
(a) q  ne (b)    (c) E 
ds 4 R 2 d

2
 1  q1   R2 
(d)   (for two spheres of different potentials)
 2  q2   R1 

 1 R2 q
(e)  (for two spheres of same potentials [for this become common)
 2 R1 R

F1 E1q1 m1a1 a1 m2E1q1 v1  e  m 

(f)   (g)  (h)   1  2 
F2 E2q2 m2 a2 a2 m1E2q2 v2  e2  m1 

90
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

Multiple choice questions:

1. Charge on a body can be detected using
(a) an electroscope (b) an electrometer (c) a voltmeter (d) an ammeter

2. The electric potential at a point distance r from a charge q is V. When the charge is replaced by a charge 4q
the potential at the point will be.

  
(a)  (b) (c) (d)
0 2 2 0

3. The electric potential at a point distance r from a charge q is V. when the charge is replaced by a charge 4q
the potential at the point will be
1
(a) same (b) (c) 2V (d) 4 V
2V

4. When a glass plate is introduced in between two charged bodies the force between them.
(a) increases (b) decreases (c) remains the same (d) become zero

5. A force of repulsion is felt by a charge in front of a charged plate. Keeping distance between the plates and
charge constant, the interface is filled with wax then the force of repulsion.
(a) changes to force of attraction (b) increases

(c) decreases (d) increase or decreases

6. The total normal induction over any charged closed surface is equal to
(a) total charge on the surface (b) the total charge enclosed by the surface

(c) half time the total charge on the surface (d) half time the total charge enclosed by the surface

7. Four charges of magnitude inC, - 4nC, 3nC and – 5nC are placed at corners ABC and D of a square ABCD of
side 6 cm the potential at the center is

(a) 75 2 (b) 15 2 (c)  750 2 (d)  1.5 2

8. Inside the hollow spherical conductor the electric field is found to be

(a) zero (b) function of the area of the sphere

(c) proportional to the distance from the center (d) a function of charge density of the surface

9. Consider the electric potential due to a charge at a distance. Potential due to 8 times this charge at 4 times the
above distance is
(a) half the original potential (b) twice the original potential

(c) same as the original potential (d) 4 times the original potential

10. Accomulation of charge on clouds, which produces lightening is caused by

(a) rain drops changing in to electrons (b) the electric field of the earth

(c) ionization by sun (d) electrification due to motion of water molecules

91
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

11. State which of the following statement is true.

(a) the number of times the electric lines of force cross depends on the charge distribution
(b) no two lines of forces can intersect each other
(c) two lines of forces intersect each other at least once
(d) lines of forces in a dielectric medium can intersect each other
12. Let V be the electric potential at a given point, then the electric field E along x direction at the point is given
by

dV dV dV
(a)
Vdx
0
(b)
dx
(c)
dx
(d)  V
dx

13. According to Gauss theorem the total outward normal induction over a closed surface is equal to
(a) The positive charge enclosed with in the surface
(b) 4 times the net charge outside the surface
(c) 4 times the total charge enclosed with in the surface
(d) the charge density on the surface
14. The slab of dielectric is introduced between two equal negative charges with a fixed separation as a result.
(a) force between the charge decreases (b) the slab gets heated up

(c) the two charges attract each other (d) an electric current passes through the slab

15. A hallow spherical conductor carries negative charge. A positive charge is placed at the center of the sphere
then this positive charge will
(a) Oscilalte between the opposite points of the conductor (b) Stick to the conductor
(c) Move in circle (d) Saty at the center

16. Electric intensity E and electric potential V at a point distance x from a point charge are connected by the
relation
V
(a) E = VX (b) E  VX2 (c) E  (d) V  EX2
X

17. Two equal small metal balls charged to + 5 and – 15 units are brought together and allowed to touch each
other than they are separated as before, the ratio between the forces in the two case is
(a) 1 : 3 (b) 1 : 9 (c) - 3 : 1 (d) - 9 : 1

18. A sphere of radius 5 cm is charged to 50 V, another uncharged sphere of radius 10 cm is allowed to touch it
the charge densities on the spheres are in the ratio
(a) 2 : 1 (b) 1 : 3 (c) 2 : 3 (d) 1 : 4
+q -q
A B
19. The electric field at ‘0’ the center of a square ABCD is
(a) along (QA) (b) along (OB)
0

(c) along (QC) (d) along (OD) D C

+q +q

92
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

20. Point charges 50 nc, 100 nc and – 75 nc are placed on the circumference of a circle of radius 0.5 m to form an
equilateral triangle ABC. The potential a the center of the circle is
(a) 1350 V (b) 13.50 C (c) 675 V (d) 6.75 V

21. The mass of proton is about 2000 times the mass of an electron. An electron and a proton are injected into a
uniform electric field at right angle to the direction of the filed with same initial K.E. then
(a) the electron trajectory is less curved than that
of proton
(b) the proton trajectory is less curved than that of  E

electron y
+ + + + + + + + + + + + ++
(c) both the trajectories will be equally curved
(d) both the trajectories will be straight
22. Two fixed point charges + 4q and – q units are separated by a distance a. the point where the resultant field
intensity is zero.

2 a 3a
(a)   a (b) (c) (d ) none of these
3 2 2

23. To move a unit positive charge from the point to another point on an equipotential surface
(a) work is done by the charge (b) work is done on the charge

(c) no work is done (d) workdone is a constant

24. Potential at any point inside a charged hollow sphere

(a) increases with the distance (b) is a constant

(c) decreases with distance from the center (d) is zero

25. Two point charges + 2C and + 6C repel each other with a force of 12 newton. If a charge of – 2C is given to
each of these charges what will be the force now?
(a) zero (b) 8 newtons (attractive)

(c) 8 newtons repulsive (d) none of these

26. A polythene piece rubbed with wool is found to have a negative charge of 1.6  106 C . Then the number of
electrons transferred is

(a) 1013 from wool to polythene (b) 1013 from polythene towool

(c) 2.56  1015 from wool to polythene (d) 1013 from wool to polythene

27. Which of the following figures cannot possible to represent electrostatic field lines.

A B C D

(a)

93
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

ABCD (b) ABC only (c) ACD only (d) BCD only

28. 10 coulombs of charge are situated at each of the vertices of a 1cm cube then the electric field at the center of
the cube is
(a) 5 N/C (b) 10 N/C (c) 40 N/C (d) zero

29. Which of the following substance is an insulator

(a) Aluminium (b) Copper (c) Silver (d) Glass

30. A certain charge Q is to be divided into two parts q and (Q-q) what is the relation between Q and q, if two
parts placed at a given distance apart are to have a maximum force of repulsion?
(a) Q = 3q (b) Q = 1.5 q (c) Q = 2q (d) Q = 4q

31. Three point charges of 0.67 nC 0.97 nC and – 0.35 nC are placed at the corners A, B and C of a square ABCD.
Find what charge must be placed at the corner D of the square so that the net potential at the center of the
square is zero.
(a) - 1.99 nC (b) – 1.29 nC (c) 1.29 nC (d) 1.99 nC

32. Charges of 10 nC and – 10 nC are placed at A and B. P and Q are two points lying on the perpendicular
bisector of the line AB. Work done in taking a a charge of 5nC from P to Q.
(a) depends only on the charge shifted (b) is zero

(c) depends on the distance PQ (d) depends on the distance AB

33. Check only the true statement below, A deuteron and triton are placed in the same electric field.
(a) force on deuteron is thrice the force on triton
(b) acceleration of triton is 1.5 times that of deuteron
(c) force on triton is twice the force on deuteron
(d) acceleration of deuteron is 1.5 times that of triton
34. A particle of charge Q and mass m travels through a potential difference V from rest. The final momentum
of the particles is

mV 2QV
(a) (b) 2Q mV (c) 2 mQV (d)
Q m

35. The electric field intensity due to a hollow spherical conductor is maximum
(a) out side the sphere (b) on the surface of the sphere

(c) at any point inside the sphere (d) only at the center of the sphere

36. A spherical conductor of radius R placed in air is given a charge Q. Then the potential at a point inside the
conductor and at a distance R/2 from its center is
Q Q
(a) V  (b) V  (c) V  4 0 R (d) V  4  R
4 0 R 8 0 R

94
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

37. Two spherical conductors of radii 4m and 5m are charge to the same potential. If  1 and  2 be respectively

1
the values of the surface density of charge on the two conductors then the ratio is
2

26 16 5 4
(a) (b) (c) (d)
16 25 4 5

38. A point charge A of charge + 4 micro coulomb and another point charge B of – 1 micro coulomb are placed
in air at a distance of 1 meter apart. Then the distance of the point on the line joining the charges and from
the charge B, where the resultant electric field is zero (in meter)
(a) 1.5 (b) 0.5 (c) 1 (d) 2

39. When a positively charged conductor is earth connected

(a) electron flows from earth to the conductor
(b) protons flows from the conductor to the earth
(c) no charge flow occurs
(d) electrons flow from the conductor to the earth

40. Electric charges 10 C , 5C and d 8C are placed at the corners of a square of side 2m the potential at

the center of the square (V)

(a) 18 105 (b) 1.8  106 (c) 1.8 (d) 1.8  105

41. When 1019 electrons are removed fro the neutral metal plate, the electric charge on it is (coulomb)

(a) 1019 (b) + 1.6 (c) – 1.6 (d) 1019

42. Two metal spheres of radii R1 and R2 are charged to the same potential, the ratio of the charge on the two

spheres is
R1
(a) (b) 2.5 (c) 2 (d) R1  R2
R2

43. Two spheres of radii 2cm and 3cm have equal surface charge density. Calculate the ratio of their charges
(a) 2 : 3 (b) 3 : 2 (c) 8 : 27 (d) 4 : 9

44. The force between two charges situated in air is F. The force between the same charges if the distance
between them is reduced to half and they are situated in a medium having dielectric constant 4 is
(a) F/4 (b) 4F (c) 16 F (d) F

45. A pith ball of mass 0.05  103 Kg carries a charge of 5  108 C . The charge on a second pith ball placed

1  101 m above the first pith ball which will keep the first ball in equilibrium in coulomb is (assume

g  9.9ms2 ).

(a) 3.3  108 (b)  3.3  108 (c)  1.1  108 (d) 9.9  108
46. Two identical metallic sphere A and B of exactly equal masses are charged to + QC and – QC respectively
their masses after charging
(a) mass of A greater than mass of B (b) mass of B greater than mass of A

95
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

(c) mass of A is equal to mass of B (d) depends on the mass of charging

47. Two identical spheres A & B carry charges + Q & - 2Q respectively the force between them is F Newton
when they are separated by a distance d in air. The spheres are allowed to touch each other and move back
to their initial position the force between them now is
(a) 2F (b) F/8 (c) F/4 (d) 8 F

48. Consider a point charge q  1.5  108C . The radius of an equipotential surface having a potential of 30 volt

is
(a) 9 m (b) 3m (c) 4.5 m (d) 9.5 m

49. n identical mercury droplets charged to the same potential V coalesce to form a single bigger drop. The
potential of the new drop will be
n
(a) nV 2 (b) n2 3V (c) (d) nV
V

50. If a positive charge Q is located at a point then the work done to move a unit positive charge once
completely around this charge in a circle of radius r is

(a) 2R (b) r (c) zero (d) 2 rQ

51. A uniform electric field of 20NC 1 exist in the vertically downward direction. What will be the increase in
the electric potential of this field if one goes up through a distance of 50 cm.
(a) 30 volts (b) 40 volts (c) zero (d) 10 volts

52. A tin nucleus has charge + 50 e. If proton is at a distance of 1012 m from the nucleus then the potential V at
this position is (in volt)

(a) 14.4  104 (b) 7.2  104 (c) 7.2  108 (d) 14.4  108

53. Three charges 2q, - q, - q are located at the vertices of an equilateral triangle. At the circum center of the
triangle.
(a) the field is zero, but the potential is not zero
(b) the field is not zero, but potential is zero
(c) both field and potential are zero
(d) both field and potential are not zero
54. The proton and an alpha particle are accelerated from rest through the same P.D of V. If the K.E. acquired by
the proton is E, the K.E. acquired by the alpha particle is
(a) 2E (b) E (c) 4E (d) E/2

55. Two metallic charged spheres whose radii are 20 cm and 10 cm respectively have each 150 micro coulomb
positive charge. The common potential after they connected by a conduction wire is (in volts).

(a) 9  106 (b) 4.5  106 (c) 1.8  106 (d) 13.5  106

96
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

56. Two identical charges Q each are at a distance r apart. If the distance between them is to be halved the work
to be done is

Q2 2Q 2 Q2 2Q 2
(a) (b) (c) 2
(d)
4 0 r 4 0 r 4 0 r 4 0 r 2

57. When two spherical conductors charged to different potentials are connected by a wire
(a) charges flows from the one at higher potential to the one at lower potential
(b) electrons flows from the one at higher potential to the one at lower potential
(c) electrons flows from the one at lower potential to the one at higher potential
(d) either a or c correct

58. A hollow metallic sphere of radius 10 cm is given a charge of 3.2  109 coulomb the electric potential at a
point 4 cm from the center is (in volt)

(a) 9  109 (b) 288 (c) 2.88 (d) zero

59. The variation of electric potential with distance X from the fixed
point is as shown in figure. The intensity of the electric field in
volt/meter.
5
(i) at x = 1m (ii) at x = 3m (iii) at x = 5m are
V
(a) 0, 0, 0 (b) - 2, 5, 0, - 2, 5 0
2 4 6x

(c) 2.5, 0, - 2.5 (d) – 2.5, 0, 2.5

60. A charge of 3C experience a force of 3000 N when placed in a uniform electric field. The P.D. between two
points separated by a distance of 1 cm along the field lines is
(a) 10 V (b) 90 V (c) 1000 V (d) 9000 V

61. 64 small drops of mercury each of radius r and charge q coalesce to for ma big drop. The ratio of surface
density of charge of each small drop with that of the big drop is
(a) 4 :1 (b) 1 : 4 (c) 1 : 64 (d) 64 : 1

62. Three point charges are placed at the corners of an equilateral triangle. Assuming only electrostatic forces
are acting
(a) the system will be in equilibrium if the charges have different magnitudes and different signs
(b) the system will be in equilibrium if the charges have the same magnitude but different sign
(c) the system can never be in equilibrium
(d) the system will be in equilibrium if the charges rotate about the center of the triangle

63. Two copper balls each weighing 10g are kept in air 10 cm apart. If one electron from every 106 atoms is
transferred from one ball to the other the coulomb force between them is (atomic weight of copper is 63.5 g
m)

(a) 2  108 N (b) 2  106 N (c) 2  1010 N (d) 2  104 N

64. A charge q is placed at the center of the line joining two equal charges Q. The system of three charges will be
in equilibrium if q is equal to

97
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

Q Q Q Q
(a)  (b)  (c) + (d) 
4 2 2 4

65. The two equal negative charges – q are fixed at the points (0, a) and (0, - a) on the y – axis. A positive charge
Q is released from rest at the point (2a, 0) on the x – axis the charge Q will
(a) move to infinity (b) move to the origin and remains at rest

(c) execute oscillatory but not simple harmonic motion

(d) execute simple harmonic motion about the origin

66. A ball of mass 1 gm and charge 108 C moves from a point A whose potential is 600 volt to the point whose

potential is zero. Velocity of the ball at the point B is 20 cms 1 . Velocity of the ball at the point A is

(a) 16.7ms1 (b) 16.7cms 1 (c) 2.8cms 1 (d) 2.8ms1

67. An infinite number of charges q coulombs each are placed along the x-axis at x = 1, x = 2, x = 8 m and so on.
If charges are alternately positive and negative. The intensity of the electric field at the point x = 0 is
q q q q
(a) (b) (c) (d)
3 0 5 0 4 0 16 0

68. A metallic sphere is placed in a uniform electric field. The lines of forces follow the path(s) shown in the
figure as
(a) 1 (b) 2 1 1
2 2
(c) 3 (d) 4 3 3
4 4

69. If an infinite number of charges each equal to 1  109 C are placed along the x-axis at x = 1m, x = 2, x= 4, x
= 8m and so on the electric potential at the point x = 0 is (in volt)
(a) zero (b) 9 (c) 18 (d) 27

70. If an infinite number of charges each equal to 5  109 C are placed along the x – axis at x  1m , x  2 ,

x  4 , x  8m and so on. If charges are alternately positive and negative, the intensity of the electric field at
the point x  0 is (in volt)
(a) 30 (b) 6 (c) 18 (d) zero

71. The inward and outward electric flux from a closed surface are respectively 8  103 and 4  103 units then the
net charge inside the closed surface is

 4  10 3
(a) coulomb (b)  4  103 0 coulomb
0

(c)  4  103 coulomb (d) 4  103 coulomb

98
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur


72. A charged particle of mass m and charge q is released from rest in an uniform electric field E . Neglecting
the effect of gravity, the KE of the charged particle after t second is

Eqm E2 q 2t 2 2E2t 2 Eq 2 m
(a) (b) (c) (d)
t 2m mq 2t 2

73. An electron is accelerated through at a P.D of 45.5 volt. The velocity acquired by it is (in m/s)…………….

(a) 106 (b) zero (c) 4  106 (d) 4  104

74. A cylinder of radius r and length  is placed in an uniform electric field E parallel to the axis of the cylinder.
The total flux for the surface of the cylinder is given by ………………

(a) zero (b) 2 r 2E (c)  r 2 E 

(d)  t 2   2 E
75. When a body is earth connected, electrons form the earth flow in to the body. This means the body is
……………
(a) charged negatively (b) an insulator

(c) uncharged (d) charged positively

76. An uncharged sphere of metal is placed inside a charged parallel plate capacitor. The lines of force will looks
like ………………………

+ + + + + + + + + +

- - - - - - - - - -

(a) (b)

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + +

77. The electric flux

through a

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - Gaussian Surface
A that encloses the
(c) (d)
charged particles
in free space is [given q1  14nc , q2  78.85nc , q3  56nc ]

(a) 103 Nm2C (b) 103 CN 1m2

(c) 6.32  103 Nm2C 1 (d) 6.32  103CN1m2

99
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

78. Four metal conductors having different shapes

Gaussian
(a) a sphere (b) cylindrical
q3
Surface A
q1
(c) cubic (d) cone

q2 Gaussian

Surface
79. The potential to which a conductor is raised depends on
(a) the amount of charge (b) Geometry and size of the conductor

(c) both (a) and (b) (d) only on a

80. The work done in carrying a charge q once round a circle of radius r with a charge Q at the center is

qQ qQ qQ
(a) (b) (c) (d) zero
4  0r 4  0r 2
4  0 2 r

81. If two charges + q and – q are placed at a distance 2 apart the points at which the resultant electric field is
parallel to the line joining the two charges is
(a) at all points on the line joining the above charges
(b) at all points on the perpendicular bisector
(c) both (a) and (b)
(d) none of these
82. An electric dipole is kept in non uniform electric field. It experiences.
(a) a force and a torque (b) a force but not torque

(c) a torque but not a force (d) neither force nor a torque

83. The work done in rotating an electric dipole moment P in an electric field E through an angle  form the
direction of the field is

(a) PE 1  cos   (b) 2 PE (c) zero (d) PE cos

 
84. Electric flux in an electric field E through area ds is given by
 
     E . ds  
(a) E . ds (b) 0  E . ds  (c) (d) E  ds
  0

 
85. An electric dipole moment P is located in a region of constant electric field E at an angle  to the field. The

dipole is to be rotated by 180 o about an axis perpendicular to P . The work required to achieve this is
(a) PE cos (b) 2PE sin  (c) 2PE cos (d) PE sin 

86. An electric dipole in a uniform electric field has potential energy U. The magnitude of the torque acting on
the dipole due to the field is T then,
(a) U is minimum and T is zero when dipole is perpendicular to the field
(b) U is zero and T is maximum when dipole is perpendicular to the right

100
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

(c) U is minimum and T is maximum. When dipole is perpendicular to the field.

(d) U is minimum and T is zero. When the dipole is antiparallel to the field
87. Identify the wrong statement in the following coulomb’s law correctly describe the electric force that
(a) binds the electrons of an atom to its nucleus
(b) binds protons and neutrons in the nucleus of an atom
(c) binds atoms together to form the molecules
(d) binds atoms and molecules to form solids
88. If an electron is brought towards another electron. The electric potential energy of the system
(a) increases (b) decreases (c) zero (d) remains the same

89. A coumb runs through once dry hair attracts small bits of paper this is due to
(a) paper is a good conductor (b) comb is a good conductor

(c) comb possesses magnetic properties

(d) the atoms in the paper get polarized by the charged comb

90. The top of the atmosphere is at about 400 KV with respect to the surface of the earth corresponding to an

electric field that decreases with altitude. Near the surface of the earth the field is about 100 vm1 . Still we do
not get an electric shock as we step out of our house in to the open (assumed that there is no field inside)

(a) 100 vm1 is not high electric field so that we do not feel the shock

(b) there is a PD between the body and the ground

(c) atmosphere is not a conductor
(d) our body and the ground forms equipotential surface

91. Electric intensity due to an electric dipole varies with distance (r) as Er n where n is
(a) 3 (b) -3 (c) 2 (d) - 2

92. A conducting sphere of radius R has surface chare density  the electric potential on its surface is
R R 
(a) (b) 0 R (c) (d)
0 0  0 R

93. A conducting sphere of radius R carrying charge + Q is connected to an uncharged conducting sphere of
radius 2R. The charge that flows between them is
Q Q Q 2Q
(a) (b) (c) (d)
2 3 4 3

94. Two identical charges repel each other with a force equal to 10 gwt when they are 0.6 m apart in air

g  10ms2  . The value of each charge is

(a) 2 mC (b) 2  107 C (c) 2 nC (d) 2 C

95. The potential of the electric field produced by a point charge at any point x, y , z  is given by V  3x 2  5 ,

where x, y , z  are in metres and V is in volts. The intensity of the electric field at (- 2, 1, 0) is

101
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

(a)  17 Vm1 (b)  17Vm1 (c) 12Vm1 (d)  12Vm1

96. The potential of a large liquid drop when 8 liquid drops are combined is 20 V. Then potential of each single
drop was
(a) 10 V (b) 7.5 V (c) 5 volt (d) 2.5 V

97. If gE and gM are the accelerations due to gravity on the surfaces of the earth and the moon respectively and

if Millikan’s oil drop experiment could be performed on the two surfaces, one will find the ratio
electronic chargeon the moon
to be
electronic chargeon the earth

(a) gE gM (b) gM gE (c) 1 (d) 0

98. An electric charge 10 3 C is placed at the origin (0, 0) of X – Y co-ordinate system. Two pints A and B are

situated at  2 , 2  and (2, 0) respectively. The potential difference between the points A and B will be
(a) 2 volt (b) 4.5 volt (c) 9 volt (d) zero


99. Charge are placed on the vertices of a square as shown. Let E be the electric field and V and potential at the
center. If the charges on A and B are interchanged with those on D and C respectively, then

(a) E and V remain unchanged q A B q

(b) E changes, V remains unchanged

 D C
(c) E remains unchanged, V changes -q -q


(d) both E and V change

100. The potential at a point x (measured in m ) due to some charges situated on the x – axis is given by

V x  
20
x  4 volts. The electric field E at x  4m is given by
2

(a) 10/9 volt / m and in the – ve x direction

(b) 10/9 volt/ m and in the + ve x direction

(c) 5/3 volt / m and in the – ve x direction

(d) 5/3 volt/  m and in the +ve x direction

101. Two electrons are approaching each other with a relative velocity of 106 ms1 . The closest distance of their
approach is

(a) 0.51 nm (b) 0.51 nm (c) 0.51 A (d) 0.51 m

102. The ratio of forces between two point charges in two cases when their separation is halved and when it is
doubled is
(a) 1 : 2 (b) 4 : 1 (c) 8 : 1 (d) 16 : 1

102
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

Answer
1. a 2. b 3. d 4. b 5. c 6. b 7. c 8. a 9. b 10. d
11. b 12. c 13. a 14. a 15. d 16. c 17. c 18. a 19. b 20. a
21. b 22. d 23. c 24. b 25. a 26. a 27. c 28. d 29. d 30. d
31. b 32. b 33. d 34. c 35. b 36. a 37. c 38. c 39. a 40. d
41. b 42. a 43. d 44. d 45. c 46. b 47. b 48. c 49. b 50. c
51. d 52. b 53. b 54. a 55. a 56. a 57. c 58. b 59. d 60. a
61. b 62. c 63. a 64. a 65. c 66. b 67. b 68. d 69. c 70. a
71. b 72. b 73. c 74. a 75. d 76. a 77. a 78. c 79. c 80. d
81. d 82. a 83. a 84. a 85. a 86. b 87. b 88. a 89. d 90. d
91. b 92. a 93. d 94. d 95. c 96. c 97. c 98. d 99. b 100. b
101. a

103
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

CAPACITOR
Q
1. (a) The capacity of a conductor C 
V
 1 coulomb 
(b) The SI unit of capacity is farad  IF  
 1 volt 


(c) Dimensional formula for electrical capacity C  M 1L2 T 4A 2 
(d) Capacity of a spherical conductor C  4  0 R CR

[Spherical conductor may be solid or hollow]

2. Capacitor and capacitance

(a) The device used to store electric charges is called a capacitor. [It store the charge in the form of electric
field.]

A0r  A 
(b) Capacity of a parallel plate capacitor C  
d d
(c) Capacity of the capacitor does not depend on the material of the plates, P.D. between the plates, and
charges given to the plates.
(d) If the upper plate of the parallel plate is connected to the lower plate then its electrical capacity becomes
infinity (d = 0)
(e) If n parallel plates are used to form a capacitor then its effective capacitance

n  1A 0
C
d

Cmedium Cm
(f) Dielectric constant r  
C air Ca

(g) Dielectric constant of the metal conductor is infinity   . [Water is not used as dielectric since the

impurities dissolved in water gets ionized and conducts electricity through it.]
(h) If a metal slab of thickness d/2 is inserted in between the plates then capacity becomes
0 A 2 0 A
C1    2C A
d d
d
2
d2 d

0 A 0 A
C In general C 1 
d  t   t d  t 
r

4 0 ab 
(i) Capacitance of a spherical capacitor C 
b  a

C1 C2 C3

Q Q Q
V1 V2 V3
V 104
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

C3
Q3

C2
Q2
2 0 L
(j) Capacitance of a cylindrical capacitor C 
2.303logb a Q1
C1
V

3. Grouping of capacitors:
(a) Series grouping of capacitors
(i) Q1  Q2  Q3  Q1 : Q2 : Q3  1 : 1 : 1

(ii) V  V1  V2  V3

1 1 1 1
(iii)    (and Cs  Cmin )
Cs C1 C 2 C 3

1 1 1  1
(iv) V1 : V2 : V3  : : V 
C1 C 2 C 3  C

C
(v) If n capacitors each of capacity C are connected in a series then the effective capacity is Cs  .
n

(b) Parallel grouping of capacitors.

(i) V1  V2  V3  V1 : V2 : V3  1 : 1 : 1 (ii) Q  Q1  Q2  Q3

(iii) C p  C1  C 2  C 3 (and C p  C max )

(iv) Q1 : Q2 : Q3  C1 : C2 : C3 QC 

(v) If n capacitors each of capacity C are connected in parallel then the equivalent capacity

Cp
(vi) C p  nC (vii)  n2 C1 C2
CS

Q •Q
(viii) for two capacitors
V1 V2

C1C 2
(a) Cs  (b) C p  C1  C 2
C1  C 2

(c) C sC p  C 1C 2
C1
Q1
4. Energy stored in a capacitor:
Q2 C2
2
1 Q QV
(a) U  CV 2   V
2 2C 2

5. Regrouping of capacitors.

105
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

(a) Two capacitors of capacities C1 and C 2 are charged separately to potentials V1 and V2 , if capacitors

are connected with plates of like polarity together then, according to the law of conservation of energy,
C1V1  C2V2  C1  C2 V  Q1  Q2  QT

C1V1  C 2V2
(i) Common potential V 
C1  C 2

1 1
(ii) Initial energy stored  C1V12  C 2V22
2 2

1
(iii) Final energy stored  C1  C2 V 2
2

1  C1C 2  1
(iv) Loss of energy dU   V1  V2 2 dU   Cs V 2
2  C1  C 2 
 2

(v) Loss of energy appear in the form of heat or E.M. waves.

(b) Three capacitors of capacitance C1C2 and C3 are connected in series with a battery. If the capacitors are

disconnected and reconnected in parallel with positively charged plates together then, common potential

3Q C V  C2V2  C3V3
V  1 1
C1  C 2  C 3 C1  C 2  C 3

(c) Two capacitors of capacities C1 and C 2 are charged separately to potential V1 and V2 . If they are

connected in parallel with negatively charged plate of one which positively charged plate of the other then

C1V1  C 2V2
the common potential V 
C1  C 2
(d) Effect of inserting dielectric slab between the plates of a capacitor on capacity. When capacitor is connected
in a circuit with,
(1) Battery connected (2) Battery disconnected

C1  KC Q 1  KQ C1  KC Q1  Q

V1  V E1  E V1  V K E1  E K

U1  KU U1  U K

(3) If distance between plates is increase during insulating handle

(a) C = decreases (b) PD = increases (c) E – Same Q – Same U = Increase

If n drops each of radius r and charge q combined to form a bigger drop then,

(a) qB  nq (b) CB  n1 3CS (c) VB  n 2 3rs

(d) UB  n 5 3Us (e) n1 3σ s  σ B (f) fB  n1 3rs

106
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

Multiple choice questions

1. Capacitance of a parallel plate condenser is equal to

 A t t
(a) (b) (c) (d)
At t A A

2. If the distance between the plates of a parallel plate condenser is increased then the capacity
(a) increases (b) decreases (c) remains same (d) either a or b or c

3. When the dielectric medium is introduced between charged plates of a condenser the capacity
(a) decreases (b) increases (c) remains same (d) either a or b or c

4
4. Two capacitors of capacitances 2 F and 3 F are connected in series and another capacitor of capacity F
5
is connected in parallel with the combination the effective capacity is in F 

29 20
(a) (b) (c) 2 (d) 1
20 29

5. Two capacitors of capacities 5F and 10F are connected in series two more capacitors of capacities 2F and 4F
are separately connected in series if the two combinations are connected in parallel the effective capacity is

13 14 3 3
(a) F (b) F (c) F (d) F
3 3 14 13

6. A set of capacitors consisting of three capacitors each having a capacity of 7.2 micro farad connected in series
another identical set is connected to first in parallel. The effective capacity of the group as a whole is in (micro
farad)
(a) 4.8 (b) 3.0 (c) 10.8 (d) 43.2

7. An air filled parallel plate condenser has a capacity of 2  102 Farad. The separation of the plate is doubled

and the interspace filled with wax. If the capacity is increased to 6  102 F . The dielectric coefficient of wax is
(a) 2.0 (b) 3.0 (c) 4.0 (d) 6.0

8. Two conductors of capacitance 3 F and 5 F are charged until their potentials are 5V and 7V respectively. If

the conductors are now connected by a wire their common potential will be
(a) 6.26 V (b) 6.25 V (c) 7.34 V (d) 9.52 V

9. The capacity of a parallel plate condenser of area A with the distance between the plates equal to t and
having a medium of dielectric constant K separating the two plates is given by

0 Kt At 0 K 0 KA
(a) (b) (c) (d)
A 0 K At t

10. Three condensers of capacities C1C2 and C3 are connected in series the equivalent capacity is

C1C2C3
(a) C1  C2  C3 (b)
C1C2  C2C3  C3C1

107
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

C1C2 C2C3 C3C1 C 1C 2  C 2C 3  C 3C 1

(c)   (d)
C3 C1 C2 C1  C 2  C 3

11. Three condensers each of capacity C micro farads are connected in series. An exactly similar set is connected
in parallel to the first one. The effective capacity of the combination is 4 microfarad. Then the value of C in
microfarads is
(a) 8 (b) 6 (c) 4 (d) 2

12. Consider two conductors one of them has capacity of 2 units and the capacity of the other is unknown they
are charged until their potentials are 4 and 5 units respectively. The two conductors are now connected by a
wire when their common potential is found to be 4.6 units, then the unknown capacity has the value
(a) 6 (b) 5 (c) 3 (d) 4

13. A parallel plate condenser is charged if the plates are pulled a part
(a) the potential difference increases (b) the capacitance increases

(c) more in circles (d) stay at the center

14. When the three condensers of capacity 3, 4 and 5 are connected in series the equivalent capacity is
(a) 12 (b) 60 (c) 1.28 (d) 0.3

15. The capacitance of a capacitor is measured in unit of

(a) coulomb (b) farad (c) joule (d) Watt

16. When two capacitors are connected in series the equivalent capacitance
(a) is lesser than the each of the two capacitances
(b) equal to the same of the two capacitances
(c) lies between the two capacitances (d) none of these

17. Two capacitors of capacities 3 F and 2 F are connected in series then in parallel, the effective capacities in

the two cases are in the ratio

(a) 3 : 2 (b) 2 : 3 (c) 6 : 25 (d) 25 : 6

18. Combined capacity of a parallel combination of two capacitors in parallel is 64/15 times the combined
capacity in series. The individual capacities are

8 8 8 8
(a) 20, 1.5 (b) , (c) , (d) 3, 5
3 5 3 6

19. In a parallel plate capacitor of capacitance ‘C’, a metal sheet is inserted between the plates parallel to them.
The thickness of the sheet is half of the separation between the plates, the capacitance now becomes
(a) 2 C (b) 4C (c) C/4 (d) C/2

20. In a gurad ring condenser the purpose of the guest ring is

(a) to increase the capacitance (b) to decrease the capacitance

(c) to increase the effective area of the capacitor (d) to avoid the variation of the intensity at the
edges

108
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

21. Which one of the following equations is correct for a capacitor?

(a) capacitance = charge x potential difference
(b) charge = capacitance x potential difference
(c) potential difference = charge x dielectric constant
(d) potential difference = charge x capacitance

22. A parallel plate air capacitor consists of two circular plates of 1cm2 area each and separated by a distance of
1mm. If the gap between the plates is doubled the capacitance changes to
(a) double the original value (b) half the original value

(c) one fourth original value (d) none of these

23. A 10 mF capacitor has been charged to potential of 100 Volt. Suddenly it explodes the energy given out in this
explosion is

(a) 50 J (b) 10 5 J (c) 10 3 J (d) 5mJ

24. Vande Graaf generator is used to

(a) measure high P.D (b) produce high D.C. potential

(c) produce high A.C. potential (d) compare high D.C. potential

25. Two identical capacitors are joined in parallel, charge to a potential V, separated and they are connected in
series i.e. the positive plate of one is connected to the negative of the other then,
(a) the charge on the free plates connected together are destroyed
(b) the charge on the free plates are enhanced
(c) the energy stored in the system increases
(d) the P.D. between the free plates becomes 2V
26. A condenser having capacity 2.0 micro farad is charged to 200 volt and then the capacitor is connected to a
resistance wire the heat produced in joules will be

(a) 4  10 4 J (b) 4  10 10 J (c) 4  10 2 J (d) 2  10 2 J

27. Two identical charged spherical drops each of capacitance C merge to form a single drop the resultant
capacitance is
(a) equal to 2C (b) greater than 2C

(c) less than 2C but greater than C (d) less than C

28. A solid sphere and a hollow sphere of equal diameters are raised to the same potentials then
(a) only hollow sphere has charge (b) solid sphere has more charge

(c) hollow sphere has more charge (d) both have equal charge

29. When air is replaced by a dielectric medium of constant K the maximum capacity of the condenser
(a) increases K times (b) remains unchanged

(c) increases by K 2 times (d) decreases K times

109
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

30. Two capacitors of capacitance C1  2 microfard and C  3 micro farad are connected in series across 10V.

The PD across the plates of the capacitor C1 is

(a) 2V (b) 3V (c) 6V (d) 4 V

31. When two charged conductors share their charges due to contact there will be ………….of energy.
(a) no chare (b) no conversion (c) again (d) a loss

32. In the circuit below, capacitors A and B have identical geometry but a material of
dielectric constant 3 is present between the plates of B. The P.D across A and B
10v K=3
are respectively
CA CB
(a) 2.5 V, 7.5V (b) 2Vand 8V

(c) 7.5V, 2.5V (d) 8V, 2V

33. 1000 drops of water of radius 1 cm, each carrying a charge of 10 combine to form a single drop the
capacitance of the combined drop increases
(a) 1 time (b) 10 times (c) 100 times (d) 1000 times

34. A parallel plate air capacitor is charged by connecting its plates to a battery, without disconnecting the
battery a dielectric is introduced between its plates as a result
(a) P.D. between the plates increases (b) charge on the plate decreases

(c) capacitance of the capacitor decreases (d) none of the above

35. The effective capacitance between the point A and B in the circuit
A
shown is (capacitance of each capacitor is 1 micro farad)
(a) 0.4 (b) 3

B
(c) 4 (d) 2

36. While a capacitor remains connected to a battery, a dielectric slab is slipped between the plates
(a) charges flow from the battery to the capacitor
(b) the P.D between the plates is changed
(c) the energy stored in the capacitor decreases
(d) the electric field between the plates increase
37. In the electric circuit given below. Capacitance of each capacitor is 1 micro farad
D
the effective capacitance between the points A and B is (in F ) A
(a) 2/ 3 (b) 3/2 (c) 1/6
(d) 6
B
3
When a PD of 10 V is applied between A and B a charge of 0.75 mc is stored in the
2F 2F
system of capacitors the value of C in micro farad A D

103 volt 2F

CF
B C
110
2F
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

(a) 3 (b) 2.5

(c) 2 (d) 1/2

38. The equivalent capacitances of three capacitors of capacitance C1 ,C2 and C3 connected in parallel is 12 units

and the product C1C2C3  48 when the capacitors C1 and C 2 are connected in parallel the equivalent

capacitance is 6 units then the capacitance are

(a) 1, 5, 6 (b) 1.5, 2.5, 5.8 (c) 2, 3, 7 (d) 2, 4, 6

39. A parallel plate air capacitor is charged to a P.D of V volt. After disconnecting the battery, the distance
between the plates of the capacitor is increased using an insulating handle. As a result the P.D. between the
plates
(a) decrease (b) does not change (c) becomes zero (d) increases

40. In a charged capacitors energy is stored in

(a) the edges of capacitor plates (b) the electric field between the plates

(c) both in positive and negative charges (d) positive charges

41. Two capacitors with capacitance C1 and C 2 are charged to the potentials V1 and V2 respectively. When they

are connected in parallel the ratio of their respective charges is

V12 C 12 C1 V1
(a) (b) (c) (d)
V22 C 22 C2 V2

42. Two charged bodies are connected by a copper wire with the electric charge on them is shared
(a) inversely as their capacities (b) is proportional to their capacities

(c) equally among two bodies (d) none of those

43. A capacitor
(a) blocks dc but allows ac (b) blocks ac but allows dc

(c) blocks both ac and dc (d) allows both ac and dc

44. Twenty seven drops of mercury of equal radii and capacity C possessing equal charge q and potential V
combine to form a bigger drop then the charge on the bigger drop as a compared to individual drop is
(a) q (b) 9q (c) 27 q (d) 3q

45. In a capacitor, introduction of second plate

(a) decreases capacity and increases electric potential
(b) increases electric potential and increases capacity
(c) decrease electric potential and decrease capacity

111
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

(d) decreases electric potential and increases capacity

46. The insulating property of air breaks down at E  a  106 V m the maximum charge that can be given to a

sphere of radius 1 m is
(a) 3mc (b) 1/3 mc (c) 1/9 mc (d) 9 mc

A C 2C B
47. The effective capacity between A and B is
(a) 5C (b) C
C

(c) 2C (d) 7C/3

2C 4C

2F
48. The effective capacitance between A and B is (in F )

3 4 1F
(a) (b) 2F 2F
4 3
A B
2 5F
(c) 6 F (d) F
3

49. A 2mm thick glass plate of dielectric constant 8 is introduced between the plates of a parallel plate capacitor.
It is then charged to a potential of 40V the electric field between the plates of the capacitor is

(a) 20Vm1 (b) 20 ,000Vm 1 (c) 2 ,000Vm 1 (d) 16000Vm1

50. A parallel plate air capacitor is filled with two dielectrics materials as shown in the figure are of each plate is
A and separation between the plates is d. If dielectric constants are K 1 and K 2 respectively then capacity of

the capacitor is
A
0 A
K1  K2   A  K  K2 
(a) (b)  0  1
d  d  2
K1 K2 d

 2 0 A   A 
(c)  K1  K2  (d)  0 K1  K 2 
 d   2d 

51. A parallel plate capacitor with plate area A and separation d is filled with dielectric media of dielectric
constants K 1 and K 2 as shown in figure then effective capacity is
A
d/2 K1
d
 A  1 0 AK1  K2  d/2 K2
(a)  0  (b)
 d  K2  K2 dK1K2

112
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

2 0 A  K1K 2  2 0 A  K1  K 2 
(c)    (d)  
 d  K1  K 2  d  K1K 2 


52. Effective capacity between A and B is (in  F)

(a) 6 (b) 2/3 2F

A B
2F 2F

(c) 4/3 (d) 3/2

53. The effective capacity between A and B is

(a) 8 C (b) C/2 (c) 2C (d) 8/C

54. Two capacitors of capacitances 3 F and 6 F are charged to a potential of 12 volt

2C
each they are now connected to each other, with the positive plate of each joined to 2C
the negative plate of the other the P.D. across each will be 2C B
2C
(a) 3 volt (b) zero volt

(c) 6 volt (d) 4 volt

55. What fraction of the energy drawn from the charging battery is stored in a capacitor
(a) 50% (b) 25% (c) 100% (d) 75%

56. Four metallic plates each with surface area of one side ‘A’ are placed at a distance ‘d’ apart from each other
the plates are connected as shown in figures, then the capacitance of the system in figure (a) and (b) are
respectively
(a) 2 A 0 d , 3A 0 d Fig (a)
B
(b) 30 A d, A0 d
A

(c) 3A0 d ,20 A d Fig (b)

B
(d) 20 d,0 A d A

57. Two spherical conductors of radii R1 and R2 carry charges q1 and q 2 respectively they are connected by a

copper wire as shown. Then the equivalent capacity of the system is

R2
q1

q2 R1
113
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

(a) 4 0 R1 (b) 4 0 R2

4 0 R1R2 4 0 R1R2
(c) (d)
R1  R2  R1  R2 

58. In the circuit as shown in figure effective capacitance between A and B is

A 4F
(a) 8 F (b) 4 F

2F 2F
(c) 2 F (d) 3 F 4F

4F B

4
59. Capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor become   times its original value if a a dielectric slab of thickness
3

d
t is inserted between the plates [d is the separation between the plates]. The dielectric constant of the slab
2
is
(a) 2 (b) 6 (c) 4 (d) 8

60. Effective capacitance between A and B in the figure shown is (all capacitance in F ) in microfarad.

(a) 3/14 (b) 14/3

3 6

(c) 21 (d) 23
A B
2
4 8

61. A spherical drop of capacitance 1 F is broken into eight drops of equal radius. Then the capacitance of each

small drop is in F ……….

(a) 1/ 2 (b) 1/ 4 (c) 1/ 8 (d) 8

62. A number of charged liquid drops coalesces, the quantity which does not change is
(a) charge (b) capacitance (c) potential (d) electrostatic charge

63. A gang capacitor is formed by interlocking a number of plates as shown in figure. The distance between the

consecutive plates is 0.885 cm and overlapping area of the plates is 5 cm2 the capacity of the unit is
(a) 4 PF (b) 1.06 PF

(c) 12.72 PF (d) 6.36 PF

64. Two capacitors 6 F ,100V  and 4 F ,100V  are connected in series.

The capacitance and break down voltage of the combination will be

(a) 10 F ,100V (b) 2.4 F ,100V (c) 2.4 F ,200V (d) 10 F ,200V

114
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

65. Two air capacitors 5 F and 10 F charged to 10 v each are connected in parallel. The space between the first

capacitor is filled with a material of dielectric constant 3. Potential difference across the capacitors become.
(a) 10 V (b) 5 V (c) 3V (d) 6V

66. ‘n’ identical capacitors are grouped in series n such capacitors are grouped in parallel. These two groups are
connected in series. The effective capacitance of combination is

n 2C nC n2  1C
(a) nc (b)
n 2
1  (c)
n 2
1  (d)
n

67. A parallel plate capacitor has a capacitance C. When it is half filled with a dielectric of dielectric constant 5.
The percentage increase in the capacitance will be
(a) 66.6% (b) 400% (c) 200% (d) 33.3%

68. Two identical capacitor each of capacitance 5 F are charged to potentials 2 kV and 1 kV respectively. The –

ve ends are connected together. When the + ve ends are connected together, the loss of energy of the system
is
(a) 160 J (b) 0 J (c) 5 J (d) 1.25 J

69. A parallel plate capacitor with air as the dielectric has capacitance C. A slab of dielectric constant K and
having the same thickness as the separation between the plates is introduced so as to fill one – forth of the
capacitor as shown in the figure. The new capacitance will be

C C
(a) K  3 (b) K  2 
4 4
K air t

C KC
(c) K  1
t
(d)
4 4

70. The capacitance of the Earth considered as a conducting sphere of radius 6408 km is

(a) 7.12 pF (b) 7.12 nF (c) 712 F (d) 71.2 F

71. Three capacitors 4 F ,6 F and 12 F are connected in series to a 20 volt source. The charge on the middle

capacitor is

(a) 40 C (b) 10 C (c) 400 C (d) 0.9 C

72. A 2 F capacitor is charged to 200 V and then the plates of the capacitor are connected to a distance wire of

10 k  . The energy dissipated in the resistance is

(a) 4  104 (b) 4  10 10 J (c) 4  10 2 J (d) 2  10 2 J

115
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

73. A parallel plate condenser with a dielectric of dielectric constant K between the plates has a capacity C and is
charged to a potential V volts. The dielectric slab is slowly removed from between the plates and then
reinserted. The net work done by the system in this process is

1
(a) K  1CV 2 (b) zero (c) K  1CV 2 (d) CV 2 K  1 K
2

74. A battery used to charge a parallel plate capacitor till the potential difference between the plates becomes
equal to the electromotive force of the battery. The ratio of the energy stored in the capacitor and the work
done by the battery will be
(a) 1/ 4 (b) 1/ 2 (c) 1 (d) 2

Answer keys:
1. b 2. b 3. b 4. c 5. b 6. a 7. d 8. b 9. d 10. b
11. b 12. c 13. a 14. c 15. b 16. a 17. c 18. d 19. a 20. d
21. b 22. b 23. a 24. b 25. d 26. c 27. c 28. d 29. a 30. c
31. d 32. c 33. b 34. d 35. a 36. a 37. a 38. c 39. d 40. d
41. b 42. c 43. b 44. a 45. c 46. d 47. b 48. c 49. c 50. b
51. b 52. c 53. a 54. a 55. d 56. a 57. c 58. b 59. b 60. a
61. b 62. a 63. a 64. a 65. c 66. d 67. c 68. a 69. d 70. a
71. c 72. a 73. c 74. b 75. b

116
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

MAGNETIC MATERIALS

Mag Moment M
1. Intensity of magnetization I   [   AB cos  ] Bcos
Volume V  A

Pole strength(m) m B
Also, I  
Cross sectionarea (A) A
A
2. SI unit of Intensity of magnetization (I) in Am-1.

MagneticFlux 
3. Magnetic Induction (Mag. Flux density) B  
Cross Sectional A
4. SI unit of B is weber/m2 OR Tesla (T)

Be  oH 
Be
5. Magnetic field intensity H  Am-1
e
Where 0  4  107 Hm-1 = permeability of free space

6.   0r where  = permeability of the medium, r  relative permeability

I
7. Magnetic susceptibility  [It has no unit]
H
8. B  0 H  I 

9. r  1  X

10. Mag. Flux   = the number of magnetic lines of forces passing normally [ unit of  is weber (wb)] through a

surface.
11. Diamagnetic materials : (a) They tend to move from stronger to weaker region of the non uniform mag.
Field.
(b) They are repelled by the magnets

(c) Ex. Water., alcohol, table salt, antimony, gold, copper, silver, zinc, diamond, nitrogen, hydrogen and all
organic compounds.

(d) r  I

(e) Susceptibility   is low negative

(f)  is independent of absolute temperature (T) and H.

(g) In general, atoms with paired electrons exhibit diamagnetism.

117
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

12. Paramagnetic materials

(a) They tends to move from weaker to stronger region of the non uniform magnetic fields.
(b) They are feebly attracted by the magnets
(c) Ex. Aluminium Sodium, Manganese, Platinum, Oxygen
(d) r is slightly greater than one r  I 

(e)  
is small and positive 10 1 to 10 -5 
1
(f)  (curie law)
T
(g)  decreases with increases of magnetizing field

(h) Ingeneral atoms with fimite magnetic moment are paramagnetic. Such materials have
unpaired electrons in their valance orbits
13. Feromagnetic Materials
(a) They are strongly attracted towards t he magnets
(b) Ex. Iron, cabalt, Nickel
(c) They have large positive value of relative permeability

(d)  
is positive and very high 10 2  10 6 
(e)  is fairly high and constant up to a temperature TC  called curie temperature above which it

1
varies with temperature according to the equation   (Curie – Weiss law)
T  Tc

(f) Above TC  curie temperature, ferromagnetic substance behaves as paramagnetic

(g) Ferromagnetic material exhibit the phenomenon of Hysterisis and magnetostriction.

14. Hysterisis loss  0 (Area 1 – H curve)

15. The materials used to construct transformers electromagnetic should have

(a) low hyslerisis loss (b) low cocreivity

(c) high retentivity (d) high susceptibility (e) high permeability

Ex. Soft iron, permalloy, stalloy, mumetal, hypernic, perminvar

16. The material used for permanent magnets should have

(a) high retentivity (b) high coercivity

Ex. Steel, tinconal, alnico, tungsten steel

17. Horizontal component of earth’s field BH  is zero at the magnetic poles and maximum at the magnetic

equator.
18. Terrestrial Magnetism
(a) The magnitude and direction of the magnetic field of the earth at a place completely given by three
quantities known as magnetic elements.

They are (i) Dip (Magnetic inclination ) (ii) Magnetic Diclination (iii) Horizontal component of Earth’s
magnetic field.

118
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

(i) Dip   : It is the angle made by the direction of total intensity of the earth’s magnetic field BE w.r.t. the

horizontal BH  line drawn in the magnetic meridian

(ii) Declination :   at the place : It is the angle between the magnetic meridian and geographic meridian.

(iii) Horizontal Component of earth’s magnetic field BH at a place is the component of the Earth’s magnetic

field BE along horizontal drawn in the magnetic meridian

(b) A magnetic needle capable of rotating in a vertical plane in the magnetic meridian comes to rest along the
earths magnetic field BE .

(c) The magnetic needle capable of rotating in a horizontal plane comes to rest along BH

(d) Dip can be measured using a dip circle

(e) BH is measured using a T.G

(f) At the poles (i) BH  O (ii) BV  BE  maximum (iii) dip   90

(g) At the equator (i) BH  BE  maximum (ii) Bv  0 (iii) dip   0

(h) (i) BE 2  BH 2  Bv 2 (ii) BH  BE cos

B
(iii) Bv  BE sin (iv) tan  V
BH

(i) Magnetic Maps : (i) Lines passing through places of equal declination are called isogonals.

(ii) The lines through places of zero dip is called aclinic linr or magnetic equator.

(iii) Lines passing through places of equal dip are called isoclinals

(iv) The lines passing through places of the same value of horizontal component are called isodynamic
lines.

119
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

(j) Magnetic elements at a place are found to vary continuously with time. These changes are called
magnetic variation and are classified as

(i) Daily changes (ii) Lunar variation (iii) Magnetic stroms

(k) The probable factors that give rise to earth’s magnetic field are

(i) Electric current circulating with in the earth

(ii) Convection currents set up in the ionosphere round the earth

Magnetic Effect of Electric Current

1. The magnetic effect of electric current was first discovered by Oersted.

2. When a current is passed through the conductor magnetic field is produced around it.
(i) The direction of the magnetic field is give by

(a) Maxwell’s cork’s screw rule (b) Ampere’s swimming rule

(c) right hand clasp rule

3. The magnetitude of the magnetic field if given by the Laplace’s law

(Biot and Savart law)

   IdL sin 
dB   0   Tesla
 4  r 2 

in the vector form

 
dB   0 
  
 1 dl  r 
 4   r 3 

(i) If a current I ampere pass through a long and straight conductor, the magnetic conductor, the magnetic
induction B produced by the current at a perpendicular distance r from conductor is

0 I
B
2r

4. Circular coil carrying current : (a) The coil acts as a magnetic shell (b) Field at the centre of the coil is

0nI
perpendicular to the plane of the coil B 
2r

120
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

 2Ir 2 
 
(c) Magnetic field at any point on the axis of a circular coil B   0  
 
 4   r 2  x 2 3 2 
 

(d) If an electron of charge e  revolving in a circular path of radius r with a frequency n , then the

0ne
magnetic field at the centre of circular path. B 
2r

B1 r2
(e) For two identical coils of radii r1 and r2 are connected in series, then 
B2 r1

(In series connections current same)

1
(f) For two identical coils connected in parallel B 2
r

0nI 0nv 0nv

2
B1  r2   1
  B     B 2
B2  r1   2 r 2 rR 4r 
2
r 

(g) Long wire with semi circular loop of radius r  and

carrying current, I magnetic field at the centre of circular

0 I  dL 0 I r  0 I r  0 I
loop B    
4r 2 4r 2 4r 2 4r

(h) If a current of I ampere flows in a circular path of radius r  subtending an angle   (in rad) at the

centre. The magnetic induction at the centre is

0 I  0 I1L1 B1 IL  1 dL
(a) B  (b) (c)  l 1 1 I   (d) 
4r 4r 2 B2 I 2 L2  L r

121
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

5. (a) Current in a circular loop behaves as a magnetic dipole. [This is equivalent to a short magnet of length 2l

and pole strength m ] P  mX 2e
 
(i) Magnitude of magnetic moment of a current loop P  IxA


(ii) the direction of the magnetic moment is in the direction of area vector or in the direction of B

(b) Comparison between electric dipole and magnetic dipole

Electric dipole Magnetic dipole

   
(1) Electric dipole moment P  q  2l (1) Magnetic dipole moment P  m  2i


 F  F 
(2) E  (2) B  PIA
q qv

    
(3) T  P  E (3) T  P  B

2P 0 2 P 
(4) E  (4) B 
4 0 d 3
4d 3
A
2l
2l
I
-m +m
+
S N
 
P  q  2l  
P  m  2l  
PIA

6. Solenoid
(a) Magnetic field along the axis of a solenoid carrying current
µ𝑜 𝑛𝐼
𝐵= [𝑐𝑜𝑠𝜃1 − 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝜃2 ]
2𝐿
(b) Magnetic field at the central point of the solenoid
µ𝑜 𝑛𝐼
𝐵𝐶0 =
𝐿

122
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

0nI
(c) Magnetic field at the ends of the solenoid Be 
2L
(d) It should be noted that BC  2BE

(e) A solonoid carrying current is equivalent to a bar magent

7. Tangent law B  BH tan

8. T. G works on the principle of tangent law

(a) T. G can not be used to measure current at magnetic poles (because BH  0 at poles)

(b) Current through T.G. I  K tan

Where
 4  rBH  2rBH
K   
 
 0  2n  0 n

I n
(c) Sensitivity of TG =  0
K 2rBH
(d) Acentric error (ii) alignment error (to minimize these errors 4 readings are taken)

(e) When   45 . [ and coil must be along BH ]

I  K

9.
  
Force experienced by a moving charge in a magnetic field F  q V  B  
F  aVBsin

 
(a) The direction of F is perpendicular to both V and B . It is given by Fleming’s left hand rule.

(b) It is an example for cross product of two vectors

(c) Fleming’s left hand rule applied only for positive charges. If it is a negative charge. It’s direction of
motion should be reversed.

(d) If charge is at rest v  0 , F  0 (Particle remain at rest)

(e) If the chargeis moving parallel to B, then θ=0 or 1800. =>F=0. It continues to move with constant
speed parallel to the magnetic field

123
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

(f) If the charge moves perpendicular to the magnetic field the force is maximum (when   90 )

 Fmax  qVB

mv 2
(i) It describes circular path-condition  qVB
r

(ii) No work is done by mag. Field on the charged particles

V
(iii) Radius of the circular path r  mV qB

(iv) Angular speed W  v r   qB m q

O F m
(v) Period T  2 w  2m qB

(vi) Frequency f  qB 2m

(vii) Particle does not gain K.E

(viii) If the angle between V and B is different from 0, 180 o or 90o the path is helical (spiral)

10. Lorentz force relation : If the charged particle is moving through a region where both the electric and
magnetic fields are present. Then the resultant force acting on the charged particle.
   
F  qE  q V  B 

Mechanical Effect of Electric current

1. Force experienced by a current carrying conductor placed in a

  
magnetic field F  BIL sin . In the vector form F  IL  B  

(a) Direction of the force F is given by Flemings left hand rule (Direction of F is
perpendicular to the plane containing both (IL) and dB.

(b) Fmax  BIL when   90

(c) F  0 when   0 ,   180 , that means when conductor is placed

parallel to B

124
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

2. Force between two parallel conductors carrying current

0 I1I 2
(a) Force acting per unit length of the conductor F 
2r
(b) When the current is in the same direction they attract
(c) When the current is in the opposite direction they repel
(d) When the current flows in the same direction the net Magnetic induction is zero, at P from the
conductor carrying current I1 I 2  I1  . They the distance of the Point P from conductor

rI1
carrying current I1 is X 
I 2  I1 
(e) When the current are flowing in opposite direction the net

rI1
magnetic induction is zero, at , such that X  with
P
I 2  I1 
I 2  I1 

(f) When a current carrying conductor is just hanging

below the another current carrying conductor the force

0 I1I 2 L
required to support the wire F  mg 
2r

(g) The net force in long straight wire due to the current

  I I L   1  1 
in the loop is F   0 1 2     
 2    a  a  b

(h) If the two conductors are held at right angle to each

other then no force act between the two conductors

125
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

3. Torque on a current loop placed in a magnetic field B .



 
T  I A B 
(i) Magnitude of Torque T  IAB sin where I is current in
the loop, A is Area of current loop, B is magnetic flux density,
 
 is angle between the Area vector A and B .
 
(ii) Direction of Torque is perpendicular to the plane containing both A and B loop

(iii) Torque tends to rotate the current loop about an axis in the magnetic field

  
(iv) When plane of the loop is perpendicular to B . Then  0, T  0 (Since A is parallel to B )

(v) Torque acting on the current loop is maximum when the loop is parallel to field vector Tmax  BIA

  90 
sin 90  1
(vi) The Torque acting on a coil consisting of n
  
turns T  nI A  B 
4. Suspended Coil Galvanometer

(a) It is used for accurate measurement of very small current I  10 9 A  

(b) It works on the principle of mechanical effect of electric current
(c) In Both suspended coil and a pointer galvanometers deflection produced is proportional to

current passed I  k where k C nBA (C- couple per unit twist)

C p  nIAB, CR  C 

1  nBA
(d) Current sensitivity  
K I C
5. Conversion of galvanometer in to ammeter
(a) Shunt : A low resistance connected parallel to
galvanometer

I gG GS
(a) S  (b) Re  (c)
I  Ig G  S 
Ig
I  I g 

(b) Ammeter used to measure current

(c) A low resistance is connected parallel to G to convert it in to ammeter
(d) Resistance of an ideal ammeter is zero
(e) Conductance of an ideal ammeter is infinity

6. Conversion of galvanometer into voltmeter

(a) Voltmeter used to measure PD between two points in a circuit

126
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

(b) A high resistance is connected inseries to G to convert in to voltmeter

(c)  
R  V Ig  G I g G  R  V 
(d) Rg  R  G

(e) Resistance of an ideal voltmeter is infinity

(f) Conductance of an ideal voltmeter is zero

I. Magnetic Materials

1. Property possessed by ferromagnetic substance only is

(a) directional property (b) attracting magnetic substance

(c) hysteresis

(d) susceptibility is independence of temperature

2. Susceptibility of a magnetic substance is found to depend on temperature and the strength of the
magnetizing field, the material is a
(a) super conductor (b) parameter

(c) Ferromagnet (d) diamagnet

3. 1 and 2 are the susceptibilities of the diamagnetic substance at temperatures T1K and T2 K
respectively then

(a) 1T2  2T1 (b) Z1 T1   2 T2 (c) 1  2 (d) 1T1  2T2

4. Above curie temperature

(a) A diamagnetic substance becomes paramamagnetic
(b) A paramagnetic substance becomes antiparamagnetic
(c) A paramagnetic substance becomes ferromagnetic
(d) A ferromagnetic substance becomes paramagnetic
5. Which of the following demonstrates that earth has a magnetic field?
(a) A large quantity of iron – ore is found in the earth
(b) The earth is surrounded by an ionosphere
(c) Earth is a planet rotating about the North-South axis
(d) The intensity of cosmic rays is more at the poles that at the quator
6. The susceptibility of a ferromagnetic material is K at 27 deg C. At what temperature will its susceptibility be
0.5 K ?
(a) 600oC (b) 237oC (c) 54oC (d) 327oC

7. The ratio of magnetic Induction to the intensity of the magnetizing field is called
(a) Susceptiability (b) retentivity

(c) relative permeability (d) abolsute permiability

127
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

8. A compass needle will show the following direction at the earth’s magnetic pole
(a) Vertical (b) No perticalar direction

(c) bent at 45o to the vertical (d) Horizontal

9. The north of metal was through magnetic is near the geographical

(a) south (b) north (c) east (d) west

10. If a piece of metal was through to be a magnetic which one of the following observations would offer
conclusive evidence?
(a) It attracts a known magnet (b) It repels a known magnet

(c) None of these (d) It attracts a steel screw driver

11. The area of B-H hysteresis loop is an indiction

(a) the paramiability of the medium (b) the susceptibility of the substance

(c) the retentivity of the material (d) the energy dissipated per cycle

12. The material of paramanent magnet has

(a) High retentivity, low coercivity (b) low retentivity, high coercivity.

(c) low retentivity, low coercivity. (d) High retentivity, high coercivity

13. The magnet can be completely demagntised by

(a) Breaking the magnet into small piece (b) Heating it slightly

(c) Dropping it into ice cold water (d) A reverse field of appropriate strength

14. Which of the following instrument is used to measure magnetic field?

(a) thermometer (b) Pyrometer (c) flux meter (d) hygrometer

15. Which of the following is ferromagnetic?

(a) Aluminium (b) Quartz (c) Nickel (d) Bismuth

16. For protecting a sensitive equipment from external magnetic field it should be
(a) Placed inside an iron can
(b) Wrapped with insulated wire through which a current is passed
(c) Surrounded with fine copper gauze
(d) Placed inside an aluminimum can
17. A uniform magnetic field is obtained in
(a) a bar magnet (b) a horse shoe magnet

(c) a circular coil carrying a current (d) a cylindrical coil carrying current

18. A ferromagnetic substance when heated beyond the curie temperature

(a) becomes diamagnetic (b) remains ferromagnetic

128
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

(c) becomes non magnetic (d) becomes paramagnetic

19. SI unit of magnetic field is

(a) Gauss (b) Oersted (c) Tesla (d) Pascal

20. The absence of a magnetic monopole is explained by

(a) Coulomb’s law (b) Lorentz law (c) Gauss’s law (d) Fleming’s law

21. The hysteresis curve of a magnetic material is generally studied for materials
(a) diamagnetic (b) Ferromagnetic (c) para magnetic (d) dielectric

22. In a normal iron piece

(a) there are no magnetic dipoles (b) magnetic dipoles are arranged in a specific direction

(c) magnetic dipoles are arranged in random direction

(d) none of these

23. In cassette tapes, the sound is recorded in the form of

(a) variable electrical resistance on the tape (b) sound wave on the tape

(c) electrical energy (d) magnetic field on the tape

24. Which one of the following substances in not magnetic?

(a) Brass (b) Cobalt (c) Nickel (d) Iron

25. Magnetic hysteresis is lagging of

(a) I behind B (b) I behind H (c) H behind I (d) H behind B

26. Among the following properties describing diamagnetism identify the property that is wrongly stated
(a) Diamagnetic material have a small positive susceptibility
(b) The magnetic moment of individual electrons neutralize each other
(c) Magnetic material do not have permanent magnetic moment
(d) Diamagnetism is explained in terms of electromagnetic induction

27. The ratio of intensity of magnetization to the magnetizing field is called

(a) permeability (b) magnetic susceptibility

(c) magnetic intensity (d) magnetic induction

28. Vertical component of earth’s magnetic field is always non zero except at
(a) the longitude of 23o (b) the magnetic poles

(c) certain points of different location (d) the magnetic equator

29. An example for diamagnetic substance is

(a) Aluminimum (b) Platinum (c) Antimony (d) Cobalt

129
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

30. The core of a transformer is usually made of

(a) steel (b) copper (c) soft iron (d) Cobalt

31. The horizontal component of earth’s magnetic field vanishes at

(a) the geographic poles (b) the equator

(c) the longitude of 27o (d) the magnetic poles

32. An example for diamagnetic substance is

(a) Copper (b) iron (c) Nickel (d) aluminium

33. The subsceptibility of a diamagnetic substance

(a) decreases with temperature (b) does not very with temperature

(c) first decreases and then increases with temperature (d) increases with temperature

34. Which of the following is the unit of intensity of magnetization

(a) Am-1 (b) JT-1 m-3 (c) NT-1 m-2 (d) AT-1m-2

35. If the susceptibility of a medium is 600, what is its relative permeability

(a) 599 (b) 601 (c) 600 (d) 4  600  10 7

36. A magnetic field of intensity 1600 Am-1 produces a flux of 2.5  105 weber in a bar of metal of area of cross

section 2  105 m2 the relative permeability of the material is

(a) 5000 (b) 622 (c) 6100 (d) 497

37. Which one of the following material has highest retentivity

(a) cobalt (b) Nickel (c) steel (d) softiron

38. When a diamagnetic substances is brought near north or south pole of a bar magnet is
(a) attracted by the poles (b)repelled by poles

(c) attracted by North pole and repelled by south pole

(d) Repelled by North pole and attracted by south pole

39. The relative permeability of a magnetic material is 1000 then it is

(a) Diamagnetic (b) Paramagnetic (c) Ferromagnetic (d) non magnetic

40. Diamagnetic substance have net dipolement

(a) zero (b) high (c) low (d) moderately high

41. Which of the following has a narrow hysteresis loop

(a) Cobalt (b) alnico (c) Permalloy (d) stainless steel

42. The phenomenon of magnetostriction exhibited by ferromagnetic materials is used in the

(a) Production of light (b) Production of electricity

130
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

(c) Production of ultrasonic waves (d) none of these

43. The source of magnetic field in a magnet is

(a) the current flowing through the magnet
(b) A static charge present on the magnet
(c) Rotation of Nucleus
(d) The orbital and spin motion of electron in atoms
44. The retative permeability is represented by 1 and susceptibility by  for a magnetic substance. Then for a

paramagnetic substance

(a) r  1,   0 (b) r  1,   0 (c) r  1 ,   0 (d) r  1,   0

45. The variation of intensity of magnetization (I) w.r.t. the magnetizing field
(H) in a diamagnetic substance is described by the graph
(a) OB (b) OA

(c) OD (d) OC

II. Magnetic effect of electric current

1. When the radius of the T.G coil is decreased it’s sensitivity

(a) remains unaltered (b) increases

(c) may increase or decrease (d) decreases

2. A short magnetic needle is pivoted in a uniform magnetic field of strength 1T, when another magnetic field

of strength 3T is applied to the needle in a perpendicular direction the needle defects through an angle ,
where  is
(a) 30o (b) 45o (c) 90o (d) 60o

3. A cell is connected between the points A and C of a circular conductor

ABCD of centre 0, AOC  60 . If B1 and B2 the magnitudes of the

magnetic fields at O due to the currents in ABC and ADC respectively

B1
the ratio is
B2

(a) 1 5 (b) 6

(c) 1 (d) 5

4. A T.G. of reduction factor 1 A is placed with the plane of its coil perpendicular to the magnetic meridian
when a current of one ampere is passed through it then the deflection of the needle is

131
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

(a) 60 (b) 30 (c) zero (d) 45o

5. A current passing through a circular coil of two turns produced a magnetic field B at its centre. The coil is
then rewound so as to have 4 turns and the same current is passed through it. The magnetic field at its
centre now is
(a) 4B (b) 3 4B (c) B 2 (d) 2B

6. Magnetic field due to a long straight conductor of length L , carrying current I , at a point distance d from it,
is given by

   2  I    2I    2 IL
(a) B   0  2 (b) B   0  (c) B   0  (d) B   0 
 4  d  4 d  4  d  4  d

7. An electron in motion associated with

(a) Only an electric field (b) Only a magnetic field

(c) Both electric and magnetic field (d) Either electric or magnetic field

8. At the midpoint along the length of a long solenoid the magnetic field is equal to x . If the length of the
solenoid is doubled and the current is reduced to half the field at the new mid point will be nearest to

(a) x (b) 2x (c) x 2 (d) x 4

9. Figures below show four ways of making a regular hexagon out of two different kinds P, Q with current

beads at the middle of opposite wires the magnetic field at the centre of the hexagon is not zero in

(a) Case (a) only (b) Case (a) and (b) only

(c) Case (c) only (d) Case (c) and (d) only

10. Two concentric coplanar circular loops of radii 7 cm and 10 cm carry currents such that the net magnetic
induction at their common centre is zero. If the current in the outer loop is 7 A clockwise the current in the
inner loop must be
(a) 1 A clockwise (b) 4.9 A clockwise

132
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

(c) 10 A clock wise (d) 4.9 A anticlockwise

11. A man is sitting in a room with his back against a wall. An electron beam moving horizontally from the
back wall to the front wall is deflected to wards his right. What is the direction of the uniform magnetic field
in the room?
(a) Vertically downwards (b) To his right

(c) Vertically upwards (d) To his left

12. A tangent galvanometer is an instrument used to measure

(a) Electric current (b) electric voltage

(c) Magnetic field (d) Tangent of any geometrical angle

13. A current flows in a conductor from East to West, the direction of the magnetic field at a point above the
conductor is
(a) Towards north (b) Towards south

(c) Towards east (d) Towards west

14. A solenoid 1.5m long and 0.4 cm in diameter posses 10 turns per cm length. A current of 5 A flows through
it. The magnetic field at the axis inside the solenoid is

(a) 2  10 5 T (b) 4  10 3T (c) 2  10 2 T (d) 2  10 3T

15. The magnetic field at the centre of one loop of a circular wire of
radius r carrying current I may be taken as B0 if a particle of

charge q passes the centre of semicircular wire as shown below

along the axis of the wire the force on it due to the current (with V
as the particle speed ) is

1
(a) zero (b) qB0v 2
2

1
(c) qB0V (d) qB0V
2

16. Electron of mass m and charge q is travelling with a speed V along a circular path of radius r at right angles

to a uniform magnetic field of intensity B . If the speed of electron is doubled and the magnetic field is
halved the resulting path would have a radius
(a) 4r (b) 2r (c) r 4 (d) r 2

17. A compass needle is free to turn in a horizontal plane. It is placed at the centre of a circular coil of 20 turns

and radius 12 cm the coil is in vertical plane making an angle of 45 with the magnetic meridian. When the

current in the coil is 0.55 A the needle points west to east what is the horizontal camponent of earth’s
magnetic field at this location

133
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

(a) 0.38  104 T (b) 0.30  10 4 T (c) 0.48  10 4 T (d) zero T

18. You are sitting in a room in which uniform magnetic field is present in vertically down ward direction ,
when the electron is projected in horizontal direction, it will be moving in a circular path with constant
speed
(a) Clockwise in vertical plane (b) Clockwise in horizontal plane

(c) Anticlockwise in horizontal plane (d) Anticlockwise in vertical plane

19. A length wire carries a steady current it is bent first to form one turn. The same length is afterwards bent
more sharply to form a double loop of smaller radius. Then the magnetic flux density at the cenre cuased by
the same current is
(a) A quarter of the first value (b) Unaltered

(c) Four times the first value (d) A half of the first value

20. A steady current is flowing through a solenoid if a bundle of soft iron is inserted in the coil then the
magnetic field inside the solenoid
(a) increases (b) decreases

(c) remains unaffected (d) increases first and then decreases

21. Which of the following statement is false ?

(a) A magnetic field exerts no force on stationary electric charge
(b) The earth’s magnetic field varies in magnetic field take place it is called magnetic storm
(c) When a large change in the value of the earth’s magnetic field take place it is called magnetic
storm
(d) The magnetic field at any point due to a current carrying conductor is directly proportional to
the current flowing through the conductor.
22. A current of 5A flows through a closely wound circular coil of 6 turns and diameter 60 cm the magnetic field
at the centre of the coil is (Tesla)

(a) 2  10 5 (b) 5 105 (c) 10  10 5 (d) 6.28  105

23. The field at the centre of a circular coil carrying current is along
(a) The perpendicular to the axis of the coil
(b) The perpendicular to the coil

(c) The line inclined at 45 to the axis of the coil

(d) None of these
24. Which of the following rules does not give direction of magnetic field due to current?
(a) ampere’s rule (b) Laplace’s rule

(c) Maxwell’s cork screw rule (d) Right hand clasp rule

25. The relation Br  BH tan can be used in the case of two magnetic field BF and BH when the fields are

inclined to each other at

134
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

(a) 30o (b) 60o (c) 90o (d) 45o

26. In a place where BH  3,2 105 tesla a T.G with a coil of 10 turns carrying a current of 6.40 A produces a

 22 
deflection of 45o provided the radius of coil in metre is    
 7 

(a) 2.8 (b) 1.25 (c) 0.14 (d) 0.28

27. Circular coil of radius 11 cm and 5 turns. In order to produce a magnetic field of 4  105T at the centre of the

22
coil, the current through it has to be (in amperes) (Take   )
7
(a) 2.4 (b) 1.4 (c) 0.14 (d) 0.28

28. A conductor of length 2 cm is bent into an arc of a circular of radius 1 cm to generate a magnetic field of

2  105T at the centre the current to be passed through the conductor (in A) is
(a) 1 (b) 2 (c) 3 (d) 4

29. A long a power line , a current flows from west to east neglecting the earths field the direction of the
magnetic field below it is towards
(a) North (b) East (c) West (d) South

30. A long straight conductor carries an electric current the direction of the magnetic field near it is
(a) Parallel to the plane containing the conductor and the point
(b) Anti parallel to the current
(c) Parallel to the current
(d) Perpendicular to the plane containing the conductor and the point
31. The magnetic fields at two points on the axis of a circular coil at distance of 0.05 m and 0.2 m from the centre

are in the ratio 8 : 1 the radius of the coil is

(a) 1.0 m (b) 0.1 m (c) 0.15 m (d) 0.2 m

32. The coil of TG has 10 turns of 11 cm radius assume BH  3 105T , then the value of current (in amp) that

produces a 45o deflection is

(a) 0.121 (b) 0.525 (c) 0.223 (d) 0.660

33. The tangent law is applicable only when

(a) There are more than two magnetic fields (b) There are at least two magnetic fields

(c) Two uniform, mutually perpendicular magnetic field is present

(d) Horizontal component of the earth magnetic field is present

34. A circular coil of the 14 turns carries a current of 1.6 amperes there by generating a magnetic field of

3  105T at its centre the radius of the coil in metere is

(a) 0.11 m (b) 0.47 m (c) 0.32 m (d) 0.42 m

135
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

35. The direction of the magnetic field above the power line with current flowing north is (neglecting the earth’s
field)
(a) South (b) North (c) East (d) West

36. Two coils are placed such that their planes are at right angles to each and have common centre. If each coil
carries the same current and produces the same magnetic field B , then the resultant field will be

(a) 2 B (b) 2B (c) B 2 (d) zero

37. The basic instrument employed to detect current

(a) Galvanometer (b) Ammeter (c) Watt meter (d) Voltmeter

38. A long wire is bent into the shape as shown in figure without cross contact at P , then the magnetic induction
B at the centre of the coil is

0 I o I
(a) (b)
2R 2R

  I  1
(c) zero (d)  0  1  
 2 R   

39. Field at the centre of a circular coil of radius r through which a current I flows is
(a) Directly proportional to r (b) Inversely proportional to I

(c) Directly proportional to I (d) Directly proportional to I

40. A charge moving with velocity V in X direction is subjected to a field of magnetic induction in the negative
X direction. As a result the charge will
(a) Remains unaffected (b) Start moving in a circular path in Y-Z plane

(c) Retard along X- axis (d) Moving along helical path around X - axis

 
41. An electron m  9  10 31 kg, e  1.6  10 19 c moving with a velocity of 106 ms -1 enters a region where a

magnetic field exists. If it describes a circle of radius 0.1m the intensity of the magnetic field must be
(a) 1.8  10 4 T (b) 5.62  10 5T (c) 14.5  105T (d) 1.4  10 5 T

42. The magnetic field at a point at a large distance X from the axis of a circular coil of current of small radius is
proportional to

(a) x 2 (b) 1 x 2 (c) x 3 (d) 1 x3

43. If a long hallow copper pipe carries a current the magnetic field produced will be
(a) inside the pipe only (b) outside the pipe only

(c) Neither inside nor outside the pipe (d) Both outside and inside the pipe

44. A current carrying conductor produces in the neighbour hood

(a) Electric and magnetic field (b) Electric field only

136
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

(c) Magnetic field only (d) no field

45. Which of the graphs as shown in figure represents the variation of magnetic induction B with distance of the
point from a long wire carrying a current is
(a) (iii) (b) (ii) (c) (iv) (d) (i)

46. ABCD is a square loop made of an uniform conducting

wire. The currents enters the loop at A and leaves the
loop at D the magnetic field is
(a) Maximum at the centre
(b) Zero only at the centre of the loop
(c) Zero at all points inside the loop
(d) Zero at all points outside the loop

47. Pickout the statement which is not true

(a) A short magnet is used in a T.G. since a long magnet would be heavy and may not easily move
(b) A T.G. cannot be used in the polar region
(c) While taking readings with a T.G. the readings are repeated or by reversing the current to take
care of the fact that the plane of the coil may not be exactly along the earth’s magnetic
meridian.
(d) Measurement with T.G. will be more accurate when the deflection is around 45 o.

137
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

48. A wire carrying current i is shaped as shown section AB is a

quarter of radius r . The magnetic field is directed
(a) A long the bisector of the angle ACB towards AB
(b) Along the bisector of the angle ACB away from AB
(c) At an angle of  4 to the plane of paper

(d) Perpendicular to the plane of the paper and directed

into the paper
49. A wire loop formed by joining two semi circular sections or radii

R1 and R2 and centre C carries a current I as shown. The magnetic

field at C has a magnetic

  I  1 1  0 I  11 
(a)  0     (b)   
 4  1
R R2 4  R1 R2 

0 I  11  0 I  11 
(c)    (d)   
2  R1 R2  2  R1 R2 

50. An electron of mass m charge e is travelling with a speed V along a circular path of radius r at right angle
to a uniform magnetic field B . If speed of the electron is doubled and the magnetic field is halved the
resulting path would have the radius
(a) 2r (b) 4r (c) r 2 (d) r 4

51. A and B are two concentric circular conductors of centre O and

carrying current I1 and I2 as shown in the figure, the ratio of their

radii is 1 : 2 and ratio of flux densities at O due to A and B is 1: 3 the

value of I1 I 2 is

(a) 1 4 (b) 1 6

(c) 1 3 (d) 1 2

52. An electron moves with uniform velocity V and enters a region of uniform magnetic field B. If V and B are
parallel to each other then electron
(a) will not move (b) Moves in a circular path

(c) Moves in a direction perpendicular to B (d) Continues to move in the same direction

53. A vertical circular coil of radius 0.1 m and having 10 turns carries a steady current. When the plane of the
coil is normal to the magnetic meridian, a neutral point is observed at the centre of the coil. If
4
BH  0.314 10 T , the current in the coil is

(a) 0.5 A (b) 0.25 A (c) 2 A (d) 1 A

54. A charge is at rest in a magnetic field of flux density B, force acting on it is

(a) Q/B (b) Zero (c) Bq (d) B/q

138
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

55. A neutron, a proton, an electron and an  particle enter a region of

constant magnetic field with equal velocities, magnetic field being
along the inward normal to the paper proton follows the track (in
figure)
(a) A (b) B

(c) D (d) C

56. Positively charged particles are passed through a magnetic field the direction of the magnetic field is along
the direction of motion of the particles as a result charged particle will
(a) Not be deflected (b) be deflected but their speed will not change

(c) be deflected but their speed will change

(d) not be defected but their speed will change

57. The magnitude of magnetic force on a charge is zero when

(a) charge is at rest (b) when the charge is at rest or moving parallel to the field

(c) charge moving parallel to the magnetic field

(d) moving perpendicular to the magnetic field

58. The electrons in the beam of a television tube move horizontally from south to north. The vertical
component of the earth’s magnetic field points down. The electron is deflected towards
(a) west (b) no deflection (c) East (d) north to south

59. A T.G. has a reduction factor of 1 A and it is placed with the plane of its coil perpendicular to the magnetic
meridian. The deflection produced when a current of 1A is passed through it is
(a) 60o (b) 45o (c) 35o (d) none of these

60. An electric field of 1500 V/m and a magnetic field of 0.4 weber/metre 2 act on a moving electron. The
minimum uniform speed along a straight line the electron could have is
(a) 1.6 1015 m s (b) 6  1016 m s (c) 3.75  103 m s (d) 3.75  102 m s

III. Mechanical Effect of Electric current

1. A galvanometer has a resistance G and a current Ia flowing in it produces full scale deflection. S1 is the value

of the shunt, which converts it into an ammeter of range O-I and S 2 is the value of the shunt for the range

O-2I, the ratio S1 S2 is

S1 1 I  I a  S1 2I  I a 
(a) 1 (b) 2 (c)  (d) 
S2 2 2 I  I a  S2 I  I a 
139
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

2. To increase the range of a voltmeter

(a) A shunt must be used (b) The resistance of the voltmeter coil must be decreased

(c) The series resistance must be increased

(d) The series resistance must be removed

3. Three long straight A,B and C are carrying currents as shown in

figure than the resultant force on B is directed
(a) Perpendicular to the plane of paper and out ward
(b) Towards C
(c) Towards A
(d) Perpendicular to the plane of paper and inward
4. Resistance of an ideal ammeter is
(a) zero (b) small (c) very high (d) infinity

5. A motor converts
(a) Electrical energy into mechanical energy
(b) Mechanical energy into electric energy
(c) Electrical energy into magnetic energy
(d) Magnetic energy into mechanical energy
6. The direction of the force acting on a current carrying conductor at right angle to a mag. Field is given by
(a) Fleming’s left hand rule (b) Fleming’s right hand rule

(c) Maxwell’s right hand cork screw rule (d) Amperes swimming rule

7. Two parallel wires carry electric current in the same direction the wire
(a) attract each other (b) Repel each other

(c) Do not attract or repel (d) Oscillate

8. A zero to 20 mA ammeter has a resistance of 20 to convert this into a voltmeter of range zero to 10v the
resistance to be connected in series with it is (in ohm)
(a) 480 (b) 580 (c) 280 (d) 380

9. To convert a galvanometer into a voltmeter

(a) A high resistance is connected in parallel
(b) A high resistance is connected in series
(c) A low resistance is connected in parallel
(d) A low resistance is connected in series
10. To convert the range of g-ohm of resistance voltmeter from v to nv, the value of series resistance needed is
(a) (n-1) g (b) g/n (c) ng (d) g/(n-1)

11. The sensitiveness of the moving coil galvanometer can be increased by

(a) Increasing the number of turn (b) decreasing the number of turns

140
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

(c) decreasing the area of the coil (d) none of the above

12. A wire PQR is bent as shown in figure and is placed in a region of uniform

magnetic field B . The length of PQ  QR  l . A current I ampere flows

through the wire as shown. The magnitude of force on PQ and QR will be

(a) O, BIl (b) O,O

(c) BIl , O (d) 2 BIl, O

13. A high magnetic field is applied on a stationary negative charge then

(a) the charge moves in the magnetic field direction
(b) The charge moves in a direction opposite to the magnetic field
(c) The charge moves in a circular orbit
(d) The charge is not affected by the magnetic field
14. A galvanometer (G) gives full scale deflection with 0.1 mA. The resistance of the coil is 1000 ohm. This has
to be converted in to an ammeter to read current upto 10 A then the following is to be done.
(a) 0.01 ohm is to be connected in series to G
(b) 0.01 ohm is to be connected in parallel to G
(c) 10,000 ohm is to be connected in parallel to G
(d) 10,000 ohm is to be connected in series to G

15. With a resistance R connected in series with a galvanometer of resistance 100 it acts as a voltmeter of range
O – V. To double the range a resistance of 1000 is to be connected in series with R . Then the value of R is
(in )

(a) 1000 (b) 1100 (c) 800 (d) 900

16. An ammeter is obtained by shunting a 30 resistor what additional shunt should be connected across it to
double the range

(a) 30 (b) 15 (c) 10 (d) 5

17. A voltmeter reading upto 10 V has a resistance of 1000 ohm. It can be converted into an ammeter reading
upto 10 A by connecting a
(a) 0.5 ohm resistance inseries (b) shunt of 10 ohm

(c) shunt of 1 ohm (d) series resistance of 1 ohm

18. The mechanical force acting on a current element placed in a magnetic field is
(a) parallel to the field (b) perpendicular to the field but not the element

(c) perpendicular to the element but not the field

(d) perpendicular to the field and the element

19. When the two conductors carrying current in the same direction are placed parallel then,
(a) conductors move away (b) conductors come closer

141
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

(c) no change in observer

(d) either (a) or (b) depending on the strength of the current

20. A galvanometer can measure a current upto 20 mA when it is connected in series with a resistance of 2970
ohms it can read upto 60 volt, the galvanometer has a resistance (in ohm)
(a) 130 (b) 30 (c) 230 (d) 60

21. A voltmeter has a range O – V volt with a series resistance R , with a series resistance 2R the range is O  V '

the current relation between V and V ' is

(a) V '  2V (b) V '  2V (c) V '  2V (d) V '  2V

22. The reason a moving coil galvanometer cannot be used with an alternating current is that
(a) the coil bonds easily (b) The coil heats up too much

(c) sparks can be produced (d) The net magnetic field produced is zero

23. A milliameter of range 10 mA has a coil of resistance 1 . To use it as a voltmeter of range 10V the
resistance that must be connected in series with it is

(a) 99 (b) 9 (c) 1000 (d) 999 

24. Three long, straight and parallel wires, carrying current are
arranged as shown in figure. The force experienced by a 25 cm length

of wire C is
(a) zero (b) 103 N

(c) 2.5 103 N (d) 1.5  103 N

25. The sensitivity of moving coil galvanometer can be increases by using

(a) A thicker suspension (b) A thinner
suspension

(c) Both (a) and (b) (d) none of these

26. A straight wire of mass 200 gram and length 1.5m carries a current of 2A . It is suspended in mid air by a
uniform horizontal magnetic field B . The magnitude of B in tesls is

(a) 1 .5 (b) 0.66 (c) 0.55 (d) 2

27. Two long straight wires carrying the same current I and separated by a distance r exert force F on each
other. If the current is increased to 2I and separation is reduced to r 2 then force will become

(a) 8F (b) 2F (c) F 2 (d) F 8

28. In a region of magnetic field

142
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

(a) A static charge experience a force (b) A moving charge experience a force

(c) A current carrying conductor experience a force (d) Both (a) and (c)

29. The internal resistance of which of the following instrument is higher

(a) voltmeter (b) Galvanometer (c) Ammeter (d) Milliammeter

30. A rectangular coil of 2500 turns and area 3 cm  2 cm is suspended perpendicular to uniform magnetic field of
5  104 T . The moment of the couple in Nm on the coil for current of 1 mA is

(a) 3.75  10 8 (b) 7.5  107 (c) 1.5  10 7 (d) 2.25  107

31. The use of cylindrical pole pieces and soft iron cylinder inside the coil in a moving coil galvanometer makes
the field
(a) Powerful and parallel (b) Powerful and radial

(c) Weak and parallel (d) Weak and radial

32. If two straight parallel conductors carry steady currents of 1 A each and if they are separated by a distance of
1 m in air, then the force experienced by each conductor per unit length is

(a) 1 Nm-1 (b) 9  109 Nm-1 (c) 2  107 Nm-1 (d) 8.85  1012 Nm-1

33. Two wires carrying equal currents in opposite direction repel by a force 15  10 7 Nm-1 placed 30 cm apart.
The current in each conductor is

(a) 1.5 A (b) 1.3 A (c) 1.6 A (d) 2A

34. In a moving coil galvanometer the deflection is proportional to

(a) Potential difference (b) Current

(c) Charge (d) None of these

35. Which apparatus is used to protect sensitive galvanometer ?

(a) Shunt (b) A resistance in series

(c) Condenser (d) Transformer

36. Two long parallel straight conductors carrying currents 10 A and 30 A in the same direction are separated
by a distance of 0.30 meter calculate the point where the resultant magnetic induction due to the currents is
zero from the conductor carrying current 10 amp
(a) 0.071 m (b) 0.075 cm (c) 0.075 m (d) none of these

37. A current of 10 5 amp. Produces a deflection of 100 in a moving coil galvanometer. A current of 10 6 amp
in the same galvanometer produces a deflection of

1 o
(a) 1o (b) 0.1o (c) 10o (d)
100

143
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

38. Phosphor bronze is used in making the suspension wire of a moving coil galvanometer because it has
(a) the property to withstand large weight (b) A low couple/unit twist

(c) A high couple/unit twist (d) A high density

39. Long straight parallel conductors carrying current in the opposite directions
(a) do not exert any force on one another (b) Rotate about each other
(c) Attract each other (d) Repel each other

40. An ammeter and a voltmeter are joined in series to a cell. Their readings are A and V respectively. If a
resistance is now joined in parallel with the voltmeter
(a) Both A and V will decrease (b) Both A and V will increase

(c) A will increase, V will decrease (d) A will decrease, V will increase

41. A and B are two conductors carrying a current I in the same direction. X and Y are two electrons beams
moving in the same direction
(a) There will be repulsion between A and B and also X and Y
(b) There will be attraction between A and B and also X and Y
(c) There will be repulsion between A and B and attraction between X and Y
(d) There will be attraction between A and B repulsion between X and Y

I
X

I
Y

42. A rectangular loop carrying a current I is located near a long straight

A B
wire such that the wire is parallel to one of the sides of the loops and is
in the plane of the loop. If a steady current is established in the wire as
I I
shown the loop will I

(a) Move towards the wire

C D
(b) Move away from the wire
(c) Remain stationary
(d) Rotate about an axis parallel to the wire

43. In an ammeter only 2% of the main current flows through the galvanometer. If the resistance of the
galvanometer is G. The value shunt is
(a) 50 G (b) 49 G (c) 49 G/ 50 (d) G/49

44. The coil of a sensitive galvanometer swings too far on either side. The swinging motion an be quickly
stopped by
(a) Earthing the case of the galvanometer (b) Holding a strong magnet near the coil

(c) Connecting a small piece of copper wire across the ends of the coil

144
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

(e) Connecting a large resistance wire across the ends of the coil

45. To send 10% of main current through moving coil galvanometer of resistance 450  the shunt needed is in
ohm
(a) 50 (b) 5 (c) 45 (d) 9

46. Force per unit length between parallel wires in the circuit is
1.2 m
3.6  103 N m . Resistance of the circuit is
18 V
(a) 3 (b) 1.5 8m R
r 0

(c) 4.5 (d) 6

I

Answers
Magnetic materials

1. c 2. c 3. c 4. d 5. d 6. d 7. d 8. b 9. a 10. b
11. d 12. d 13. d 14. c 15. c 16. a 17. d 18. d 19. c 20. c
21. b 22. c 23. d 24. a 25. b 26. a 27. b 28. d 29. c 30. c
31. d 32. a 33. b 34. a 35. b 36. b 37. b 38. b 39. c 40. a
41. c 42. c 43. d 44. a 45. d

Magnetic effect of electric current

1. b 2. d 3. c 4. c 5. a 6. c 7. c 8. d 9. d 10. d
11. a 12. a 13. a 14. c 15. c 16. a 17. a 18. c 19. c 20. a
21. b 22. d 23. b 24. b 25. c 26. b 27. b 28. a 29. a 30. d
31. b 32. b 33. c 34. b 35. c 36. b 37. a 38. d 39. c 40. a
41. b 42. d 43. b 44. c 45. b 46. b 47. a 48. d 49. b 50. b
51. b 52. d 53. a 54. b 55. a 56. a 57. b 58. c 59. d 60. c

Mechanical effect of electric current

1. d 2. c 3. 4. b 5. a 6. a 7. a 8. a 9. a 10. b 11. a
12. a 13. a 14. 15. d 16. b 17. d 18. a 19. c 20. d 21. b 22. b
23. c 24. d 25. 26. d 27. a 28. b 29. b 30. a 31. d 32. a 33. b
34. b 35. c 36. 37. a 38. b 39. a 40. c 41. a 42. b 43. d 44. c
45. d 46. a 47. 48. d 49. c 50. a

145
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION
Synopsis
1. Faraday’s law’s of electromagnetic induction
(a) Law (I) : An emf is induced in a coil only when the magnetic flux   linked with coil changes w.r.t. the

time t  .

d
(b) Law (II) : Induced emf e 
dt

(c) Induced current is observed in a closed circuit only

d
2. Lenz’s law : The direction of the induced emf is always to oppose the cause of emf e   .
dt
3. In this phenomenon mechanical energy is converted into electrical energy
4. The direction of the induced emf and hence the current is given by the Fleming’s right hand rule (motor
Rule)
5. Fleming’s right hand Rule : (Generator rule)
(a) Fore finger – Mag. Field (B)
(b) Thumb – motion of the conductor (M)
(c) Middle finger – direction of induced
current (I)

6. (a) Expression for motional emf e  BLV

BLV
(b) Induced current I 
R  r 

(c) Change in mag. Flux linked with conductor in time dt .d  BA d  BLdx

7. Self Induction : When varying current pass through a coil an emf is developed by the coil in the opposite
direction.

 dI  0  r N 2 A
(a) Emf induced e   L  (b) Self inductance of the coil L 
 dt  L

(c) The self induced emf is called back emf since oppose the applied emf.

(d) The induced emf during break of the circuit is larger than during make  tm  tb 

(e) Application of self inductance is choke

(f) SI unit of self inductance is henry (H)

(g) An ideal inductor has negligible resistance but large self inductance (Solenoid)

146
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

8. Mutual Induction : The phenomenon in which current

passing through one coil induces an emf in the
neighboring coil
(a) Induced emf in the secondary coil

 dI p 
es   M  

 dt 

(b) Mutual inductance for a pair of coils

0 r N1N0 A
M
L
(c) SI unit of Mutual inductance is henry (H)
(d) Application (i) transformer (ii) induction coil

(e) The dimensional formula for inductance is ML2T 2 A2  

9. Induction coil : (a) Principle : Mutual induction

(b) Emf is maximum during the break of the circuit

(c) It is used as a high voltage source (in discharge tubes, X-rays, spark plugs in automobilies)

(d) It is a device used to derive high DC voltage from a low DC input voltage

(e) Induction coil was designed by Ruhmkorff.

(f) The capacitor in the induction coil helps in quenching of spark at the break of the primary circuit and
increases the efficiency.

1 2
10. (a) Energy stored in a coil U    LI , where L is the self induction, I is current in the coil.
2
(b) Energy stored in the coil in the form of magnetic field

11. Eddy currents : The currents induced in the thick conductor when it is placed in the changing magnetic field
are called eddy currents
(a) Eddy currents were discovered by Foucault
(b) Eddy currents are used in
(i) Electro magnetic damping (ii) Electromagnetic breaks

(c) Induction furnace (iii) Speedometer (iv) Induction motor

12. AC generator
It works on the principle of electro magnetic induction (i.e.
mechanical energy is converted into electrical energy)

(i) Flux passing through the coil   BAn cos   BAn cos t

(ii) Induced emf E  E0 sint [ E0  BAn ]

147
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

(iii) Induced current i  i0 sint

(iv) Induced emf varies sinusoidally with time

13. Alternating current : (a.c) Alternating current or voltage is one which varies periodically with time reversing
direction per every half a cycle

2I0 2V0
(a) Mean value of a.c. I m   0.637 I 0 Vm   0.637V0
 

(where I0 and V0 are the peak value of ac)

 I  V
(b) rms value of ac : I rms   0   0.707 I 0 and Vrms  0  0.707V0
 2 2

(c) Mean value of a.c. over a complete cycle is zero

2 2
(d) I mean    I rms

  

14. A.C. circuits containing a resistance

(a) V  V0 sint (b) I0  I0 sint

(c) Voltage and current are in phase   0

V 
(d) Impedence R   0 
 I0 

(e) Power factor cos  1

15. AC circuits containing a pure inductor

 
(a) V  V0 sint (b) I  I 0 sin t  
 2

  
(c) Current lags behind the voltage by   
2  2

(d) Impedance X L  L  2fL  inductive reactance (measured in )  XL  f

(e) Power factor cos   0 (For pure inductance coil, R  0)

16. AC Circuit containing a pure capacitor

(a) V  V0 sint

148
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

 
(b) I  I 0 sin t  
 2

 
(c) Current leads the applied voltage by   
2 2

1 1
(d) Capactitive reactance = impedance = XL  
C 2fc
(Measured in )

1
(d) Xc  (e) Power factor cos   0 (for pure capacitor R  0)
f

17. Series LCR circuit

(a) Effective voltage V  V R2  V L  VC 2

(b) V  V0 sint (c) I  I0 sint   

(d) Impedance Z  R 2   X L  X C 2 (e) I  V Z

V and I , tan 
X L  X C   VL  VC 
(f) Phase difference between
R VR

R
(g) Power factor cos    (h) Power Prms  I rmsVrms  cos
Z

18. At resonance (series LCR circuit)

(a) X L  X C (b) Impedance Z  R

(c) Power factor cos   I (d) I is in phase with V   0 

(e) Current in the circuit is maximum

1
19. Expression for resonance frequency f 0 
2 LC
20. (a) Band width of a resonant circuit B.W.  f 2  f1 where f! and f 2 are frequencies corresponding to half

power points.
(b) Sharpness of resonance,

f0 f0
SR  
BW f1  f 2

(c) Quality factor,

149
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

Energy stored I 2W Lt
Q  20
Energy dissipatred I Rt

W0 L X L
(i) Q   (in case of indicator)
R R

XC 1
(ii) Also Q   (in case of capacitor)
R W0CR

21. Watt less current : The current through the pure inductor or capacitor is called watt less current [current
leads or lags the voltage by  2 ]

22. Choke : Single coil made of thick copper wire. Hence power loss is minimum cos   0 therefore they

used to regulated current in AC circuits.

(a) High frequency chokes (small L) usually air core
(b) Low frequency chokes (high L) usually soft iron core chokes
23. Transformers : Used to increased or decrease an applied alternating voltage
(a) It work on mutual inductance

 n  V 
(b) Turns ratio T      
s S
(i) Vs n p  V p nS
 n p   VP 
(i) For an ideal transformer, power input = power out put V p I p  Vs I s

(c) In step up transformer ns  n p , in VS  VP , I S  I P

(d) In step down transformer ns  n p ,VS  V p , I s  I p

(e) Energy loss in transformer

(i) Loss due to heating (ii) Loss due to flux leakage

(iii) Loss due to eddy current (iv) Hysterisis loss

 P  V I 
(f) Efficiency of transformer n   0    S S 

 P1   VP I P 

 2
 Z R 
2

24. Self inductance of a coil L   

2f

25. AC meters : As average value of AC over a complete cycle is zero. Therefore DC ammeters and DC
voltmeters shows zero reading when used in AC circuits
AC meters are of two types

(i) Hot wire meter : It is based on heating effect of electric current (deflection produced is proportional to the
square of the current)

(ii) Moving iron meter : It is based on the principle of magnetic effect of electric current

150
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

Questions

1. In a series LCR circuit R  10 and an impedance Z  20 then the phase difference between current and
voltage is

(a) 30 (b) 45 (c) 90 (d) 60

2. A device which converts electrical energy in to mechanical energy is

(a) dynamo (b) Induction coil

(c) electrical motor (d) generator

3. In an induction coil the emf induced in the secondary is maximum

(a) at the break of the primary circuit
(b) either at the make or break of the primary circuit
(c) neither at the make nor break of the primary circuit
(d) at the make of the primary circuit
4. Choke used to limit high frequency AC has
(a) diamagnetic core (b) a paramagnetic core

(c) Iron core (d) air core

5. In an ideal transformer the voltage and current in the primary are 200 V, 2 A and that in the secondary are
2000 V, 1 A the value of I is (A)
(a) 1 (b) 0.2 (c) 2 (d) 20

6. Current in an inductance of 1 mH is reduced from 5A to 0 in 1 ms the emf induced in it is (inv)

1
(a) 5 (b) 50 (c) 10-6 (d)
5

 400 
7. Reactance of a capacitor of capacitance C F for AC of frequency   Hz is 25 ohm the value of C is
  
(a) 100 (b) 400 (c) 50 (d) 25

8. Relation between the mean I m  and the rms value I rms  of the sinusoidal AC is

2 2 I rms I 2 2Im
(a) I m  (b) I rms  2 I m (c) I rms  m (d) I m 
 2 

9. An electric bulb marked 40W, 200 V is used in a circuit of supply voltage 100 V. Its power now is
(a) 20 W (b) 10 W (c) 40 W (d) 100 W

10. In an LCR series circuit under conditions of resonance the current

(a) is in phase with voltage (b) leads the voltage by 45o

(c) leads the voltages by 90o (d) lags behind the voltage by 90o

151
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

5
11. An aeroplane having a wing span of 35 m. Flies due north at the speed of 90 ms -1 . Given By  4  10 T .

The p.d. between the tips of the wing s will be

(a) 1.26 V (b) 0.103 V (c) 0.126 V (d) 12.6V

12. A copper ring is moving quickly towards the south pole of powerful stationary bar magnetic as a result
(a) current flows through the copper ring (b) current flows in the magnet

(c) copper ring will get magnetised (d) copper ring will get attracted.

13. A magnet dropped in to a coil of conducting wire along its axis will fall with an acceleration
(a) equal to g in the beginning and more than g later (b) less than g

(c) more than g (d) equal to g

14. The bob of the simple pendulum is replaced by a magnet the oscillations are set along the length of the
magnet. A copper coil is added so that one pole of the magnet passes in and out of the coil is short circuited
then the following happens
(a) period decreases (b) period does not change

(c) oscillations are damped (d) amplitude increase

15. A hot wire ammeter reads 10 A in an AC circuit. The peak value of the current is

10 2
(a) 5A (b) 10 2 A (c) A (d) A
2 

16. To induce an emf in a coil the magnetic flux linking

(a) must decreases (b) can either increase or decrease

(c) must remain constant (d) must increase

17. The device that does not work on the principle of mutual induction is
(a) induction coil (b) Motor

(c) Tesla coil (d) Transformation

18. In a series resonant circuit, the a.c. voltage resistance R , Inductance L and capacitance C are 5V, 10V, and 10
V respectively. The a.c. voltage applied to the circuit will be
(a) 20 V (b) 10 V (c) 5 V (d) 25 V

19. Refer to the figure, the maximum deflection in the galvanometer (G) occurs when
(a) The magnet is pushed into the coil
(b) the magnet is rotated into the coil
(c) the magnet is stationary at the centre of
the coil
(d) the number of turns in the coil is
reduced

152
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

20. The core of the transformer is laminated to reduce

(a) hysteresis loss (b) Eddy current

(c) Magnetic loss (d) Copper loss

21. An a c supply may be used for all these except for one. Identity the one for which it cannot be used
(a) Heating (b) lighting

(c) transforming voltage (d) electroplating

22. A normal domestic electric supply is an alternating current whose average value is
(a) zero (b) Half the peak value

 
(c) the peak value multiplied by (d) the peak value divided by
2 2

23. A dynamo develops 0.5 amps at 6 volts the power produced is

(a) 3 watt (b) 12 watt (c) 0.083 watt (d) none of these

24. A 220V, 50 Hz, AC source is connected to an inductance of 0.2 hentry and a resistance of 20 ohm in series.
What is the current in the circuit?
(a) 10 amp (b) 5 amp (c) 33.3 amp (d) 3.33 amp

25. Eddy currents are

(a) Induced current due to a changing magnetic flux
(b) Induced current due to a high magnetic flux
(c) Induced currents in a in homogeneous material
(d) Unstable currents in a conductor
26. A transformer is used to change
(a) A mechanical energy into electrical energy
(b) Electrical energy into mechanical energy
(c) High voltage DC into low voltage DC
(d) High voltage AC into low voltage AC

27. A current in a coil changes from 4 amperes to zero in 0.1 second. If the average emf induced is 100 volt what
is the self inductance of the coil?
(a) 2.5 H (b) 26 H (c) 400 H (d) 40 H

28. The resonant frequency of an LCR circuit is

R 1
(a) 2 LC (b) 2RC (c) (d)
2 RC 2 LC

29. The switch (S) is closed and opened in the circuit periodically then galvanometer (G) shows
(a) No deflection (b) A steady deflection

(c) A steady deflection to the right (d) Periodic deflection

153
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

30. The motion of an electron is affected by

(a) Only an electric field (b) only a magnetic field

(c) Both electric field and magnetic field (d) either an electric or magnetic field

31. A transformer steps up the voltage from 220 V to 11000 volts. If the primary has 100 turn the secondary
should have turns

(a) 5000 (b) 20 (c) 22000 (d) 11 105

32. A magnet NS is suspended from a spring and while it oscillates the magnet

moves in an out of the coil C , the coil is connected to a galvanometer G, then

as the magnet oscillates
(a) G shows deflection to the right and left with constant amplitude
(b) G shows deflection on one side
(c) G shows no deflection
(d) G shows deflection to the left and right but the amplitude
steadily decreases

33. In an AC circuit the ratio between effective voltage and effective current is called
(a) Resistance (b) Reactance (c) Inductance (d) Impedance

34. Supply of AC mains is 220 V the peak voltage is

220
(a) 220 V (b) 220 2V (c) V (d) 110 V
2

35. Magnetic of induced emf is given by

(a) Coulomb’s law (b) Faraday’s law

(c) Kirchoff’s law (d) Lenz’s law

36. Induced emf in a circuit according to Faraday’s laws of electromagnetic induction is

(a) Inversely proportional to the total number of lines of force through the circuit
(b) Inversely proportional to the rate of change of lines of force through the circuit
(c) Directly proportional to the rate of change of lines of force through the circuit
(d) Directly proportional to the total number of lines of forces through the circuit
37. A 30 V, 90 W lamp is to be operated on a 120 V DC line for proper glow, a resistor of …….ohm should be
connected in series with the lamp
(a) 20 (b) 30 (c) 40 (d) 10

38. An inductance L, a capacitance C and a resistance R are connected in series and an AC current of frequency

f is passed through the system, the impedance is given by

12 12
 1 
2   1 
(a)  R   f    (b)  L  R   
  c 
   fc 

154
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

12 12
 1  
2  1  
2
2  2 
(c)  R   2fL   (d)  L   2fL  
  2fc     2fc  
   

39. The phenomenon of changing current in any one turn of the coil giving rise to emf in every turn of the coil is
known as
(a) Maxwell effect (b) Self induction
(c) Mutual induction (d) Magnetostriction
40. Lenz’s law states that the direction of the induced emf in a conductor is such as to
(a) Move the conductor parallel to itself
(b) Generate a magnetic field parallel to the conductor
(c) Align the conductor parallel to the earth’s magnetic field
(d) Develop force opposing the cause of induced emf
41. A choke is preferred to a resistance for limiting current in AC circuit because
(a) choke is compact in size (b) choke is cheap

(c) there is no wastage of power (d) choke is a good absorber heat

42. When current flows through a conductor heat is produced this is

(a) Seeback effect (b) Thomson effect (c) Peltier effect (d) Joule’s effect

43. The impedance of an AC (LCR) circuit is given by

(a) R 2   X L  X C 2 (b) R 2   X C  X L 2

(c) R 2   X C  X L 2 (d) R2  X C  X L 

44. In an AC circuit containing an inductance

(a) Current lags the voltage by 90 (b) current leads the voltage by 90

(c) Current lags the voltage by 180  (d) none of these

45. A train is moving towards north with a speed of 180 kmph. If the vertical component of the earths magnetic

field is 0.2  104 T . The emf induced in the axle of 1.5 m long is
(a) 1.5 mV (b) 15 mV (c) 54 mV (d) 5.4 mV

46. When 100 V dc is applied across the coil a current of 1A flows through it. When 100 V AC of 50 Hz is
applied to the same coil only 0.5 A flows. The inductance of the coil is
(a) 0.55 H (b) 55 mH (c) 0.55 mH (d) 5.5 mH

47. The equation of an ac voltage is V  200 sin 50t  then rms value of voltage is (volt)

(a) 100 2 (b) 200 2 (c) 100 V (d) 400 V

48. An alternating voltage is applied to the pure inductance such that inductive reactance is 10 ohm. If the
frequency of AC is doubled the reactance will become (in ohm)

155
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

(a) 5 (b) 10 (c) 15 (d) 20

 1 
49. The capacitive reactance of a capacitor of   F at 103 Hz is in ohm
 2 

 1   1 
(a)    10 3 (b)    10 3 (c) 2  103 (d) 10 3
 2   2 

50. In an ac circuit the ac metres measure

(a) rms value (b) Peak values (c) Mean value (d) Mean square value

51. A choke coil is used for controlling current in an

(a) ac circuit only (b) d.c. circuit only

(c) both ac and dc circuits (d) integrated circuit

52. A 1 mH inductance and 10 F capacitance when connected in series to an ac source posses equal reactance

the angular frequency of the ac source is

(a) 104 (b) 100 (c) 10 (d) 200

53. In an a.c. circuit power is consumed only in

(a) Inductance (b) capacitance (c) resistance (d) all the these

54. Wattless current is possible only in

(a) Resistance circuit (b) Non – resistive circuit
(c) LR circuit (d) LCR circuit
55. In an AC circuit the voltage across RL and C are 30 V, 60 V and 20 V respectively the applied voltage is
(a) 110 V (b) 70 V (c) 10 V (d) 50 V

56. The core of the transformer is laminated to

(a) Reduce eddy current losses (b) Increase magnetic flux
(c) Increase strength of magnetic field (d) Increase residual magnetism
57. A step down transformer is used to reduce 220 V supply to 11 V the primary draw 5A of current while the
secondary 90A the efficiency of the transformer is
(a) 20 % (b) 40 % (c) 70 % (d) 90 %

58. The current passing through a choke coil of 15 Henry is decreasing at the rate of 0.5 amp/second the emf
developed across the coil is
(a) 30 volt (b) -30 volt (c) 7.5 volt (d) –7.5 volt

59. The flux  in (weber) a closed circuit of resnstance 10 ohm varies with time t in second according to the

equation   6t 2  5t  1 . What is the magnitude of the induced current at 0.25 seconds

(a) 0.8 A (b) 1.2 A (c) 0.6 A (d) 0.2 A

60. A straight line conductor of length 0.4 m is moved with a speed of 7 ms -1 perpendicular to a magnetic field

of intensity 0.9T the induced emf across the conductor is

156
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

(a) 5.04 V (b) 1.26 A (c) 2.52 V (d) 25.2 V

61. In a step down transformer the turns ratio is 2 : 1 . A lechlanche cell of emf 1.5 volt is connected across the
primary coil the voltage across the secondary coil is

(a) 3 V (b) 0.75 V (c) zero (d) 1.5 volt

62. If L represents the self inductance of a coil which is in series with a capacitance C then which of the
following has unit of time

C 1
(a) LC (b) (c) (d) LC
L LC
63. Resonant frequency of a LCR circuit is 100 Hz if the LC product is increased 16 times, the new resonant
frequency is
(a) 1600 Hz (b) 116 Hz (c) 400 Hz (d) 25 Hz

64. Reciprocal of the impedance is called

(a) Admittance (b) Reactance (c) Conductance (d) Resistance

65. In an induction coil of high reactance

(a) Allow ac to pass but blocks DC (b) Allow DC to pass but blocks AC

(c) Both (a) and (b) (d) Blocks DC

66. The maximum induced emf in a coil of 1000 turns of area 0.1m  0.1m when rotated uniformly in a magnetic
field of 103T at the rate of 30 rpm is

(a)  3 (b) 0.01 (c) 103 (d) none of these

67. For a coil reactance in AC is equal to resistance at certain frequency then the phase difference between
voltage and current is radian
(a)  3 (b)  6 (c)  2 (d)  4

68. The magnetic flux linked with the coil varies with time as   3t 2  4t  9 the magnitude of induced emf at

t  2s is
(a) 16 V (b) 9V (c) 4 V (d) 3 V

69. In an AC circuit the reactance of a coil is 3 times its resistance the phase difference between the voltage

across the coil to the current through the coil is

(a)  4 (b)  6 (c)  2 (d)  3

70. A small magnet M is allowed to fall through a fixed horizontal conducting ring. Let g be the acceleration

due to gravity. Then acceleration of M will be

(a)  g when it is above R and moving towards R

(b)  g when it is above R and moving towards R

157
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

(c)  g when it is below or above R and moving towards or away from R

(d)  g when it is below and moving away from R

71. In the circuit shown in the figure, neglecting source

resistance, the voltmeter and ammeter readings will
respectively be
(a) 0V, 8 A (b) 150 V, 8A

(c) 150 V, 3A (d) 0V, 3A

72. An Aluminium ring B faces an electromagnet A the current I

through A can be altered
(a) If I increases, A will attract B

(b) If I increases, a will repel B

(c) If I decrease A will repel B

(d) whether I increases or decrease B will not experience any force

73. In the circuit shown in the figure, the a.c. source gives a voltage

V  20 cos 2000 t  . Neglecting source resistance, the voltmeter and

ammeter readings will be
(a) )V, 1.4 A (b) 5.6 V, 1.4 A

(c) 0V, 0.47 A (d) 1.68V, 0.47A

74. A current flowing form y to x is increasing in magnitude. The

direction of induced current, if any in the loop is
(a) Clockwise (b) anticlockwise

(c) No current is induced (d) oscillating

75. An inductor stores energy in the form of

(a) electric field (b) Magnetic field (c) Both electrical and magnetic field

(d) none of these

158
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

76. The ratio of secondary to the primary turns in a transformer is 3 : 2 and the output power is p, neglecting
all power losses the input power must be

2p 3p p
(a) (b) (c) (d) p
3 2 2

77. The time taken by AC of 50 Hz in reaching from zero to the maximum value is

(a) 1  10 2 sec (b) 5 103 sec (c) 50  103 sec (d) 2  10 2 sec

78. The magnetic flux linked with a coil at any instant t is given by   5t 3  100t  300 the emf induced in the

coil at t  2 seconds is
(a) 300 V (b) 140 V (c) 40 V (d) 40V

79. A charged particle moves along a line AB which lies in the same plane of a
circular loop of conducting wire as shown in the figure, then
(a) Current induced will be anticlockwise

(b) Current induced will be clockwise

(c) Current will not be induced in the loop

(d) The current induced in the loop will change its direction as the charged particle passes by

80. In the circuit shown the potential difference across the resistor at
the instant the switch is closed is
(a) zero (b) 50 V

(c) 10 V (d) 5 V

81. A rectangular coil of 300 turns has an average area of 25 cm speed of 50 cps in a uniform magnetic field of

strength 4  102 T about an axis perpendicular to the field. The peak value of the induced emf is in volt

(a) 300 (b) 3000 (c) 3 (d) 30

82. In a LCR circuit the PD between the terminals of the inductance is 60 V between the terminals of the
capacitor is 30 V and that between the terminals of resistance is 40 volt. The supply voltage will be equal to
(a) 130 V (b) 10 V (c) 50 V (d) 70 V

83. The square root of the product of inductance and capacitance has the dimension of
(a) length (b) mass (c) time (d) no dimension

159
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

Answers

46. d 47. c 48. a 49. d 50. b 51. a 52. c 53. a 54. b 55. a
56. c 57. a 58. b 59. c 60. b 61. b 62. b 63. c 64. a 65. b
66. d 67. d 68. a 69. d 70. a 71. d 72. a 73. d 74. d 75. c
76. a 77. d 78. d 79. b 80. b 81. c 82. b 83. c 84. b 85. d
86. c 87. d 88. b 89. a 90. a 91. a 92. a 93. d 94. d 95. a
96. a 97. a 98. c 99. b 100. d 101. a 102. a 103. c 104. d 105. c
106. c 107. d 108. d 109. a 110. b 111. b 112. d 113. a 114. d 115. b
116. a 117. b 118. b 119. b 120. b 121. d 122. b 123. c 124. b 125. a
126. d 127. c 128. c

160
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

OPTICS

Reflection of Light
1. Light travels in free space with velocity C  3 108 m s
N
 
2. Wavelength range of light waves is 4000 A    7500 A and frequency

is of the order of 10 15 Hertz. Incident ray lˆ r̂ reflected ray

3. Laws of reflection M O d M

(a) The angle of incidence iˆ is equal to angle of reflection r .

iˆ  rˆ .
(b) Angle of deviation d  180  2iˆ  180  2rˆ

(c) When light is incident normally on a surface iˆ  rˆ  0

(d) When the mirror rotates through an angle   . The reflected ray rotates through an angle 2 .
(e) When the incident ray rotates through an angle   about the point of incidence the reflected ray

also rotates through the same angle 

4. Reflection at plane mirror
(a) The image formed by a plane mirror is always virtual erect and laterally inverted.
(b) The size of the image is same as that of the object.
(c) The image distance is equal to the object distance.
(d) The minimum size of the plane mirror to observe full size of a person is half the size of that
person.
(e) The minimum size of the plane mirror hung on a wall of a room to observe the full size of the
opposite wall by a person standing at the centre of the room is one third of the height of the
rear wall.

(f) The radius of curvature of the plane mirror is infinity   .

(g) The focal length of the plane mirror is infinity  

(h) The number of images formed by two plane mirrors inclined at certain angle   is given by

360
n  1 (Objective is placed symmetrically)

360
(i) If the object is placed asymmetrically between mirrors, number of images n 


=0
 = 90 n=1
n= n=3  = 1800

(j) Net deviation produced by two plane mirrors inclined at an angle  is d  360   2

161
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

(k) If an object shift through a distance y towards plane mirror, its image shifts through the same

distance y towards the object.

O O2 I1 I
Y Y
M

(l) If the mirror is shifted through a distance x towards a stationary object its image shifts

through a distance 2 x towards the object

x1 = 2d – (2d – 2x)
d
= 2x
O I
I1
x (2 x)
(d – x)
(d – x)

(m) A When a person move towards a mirror with a velocity (V) (1) His image approaches the

mirror with the same velocity V , but (2) He observes his image as if it is approaching him with
a velocity 2V (relative velocity)
B When the mirror moves towards the person at rest with a velocity V (a) His image
approaches the mirror with a velocity V (b) He observes his image to be approaching him with
a velocity 2V .
(n) The property of rectilinear propagation of light is responsible for formation of shadows.

5. Reflection at Spherical mirrors

(a) There are two types of spherical mirrors (i) Concave mirror (ii) Convex mirror
(b) Concave mirror is converging mirror, where as convex mirror is diverging mirror

Concave Convex
I
Mirror mirror

(c) Concave mirror image formation

(i) It forms both real (diminished and magnified) and virtual (magnified) images
(ii) The minimum distance between the object and the real image is zero
(iii) They are used as reflectors, in solar cookers, by dentist, by eye specialists as shaving
mirrors and in reflecting telescope
(iv) Magnifying power is less than 1 or equal to I or greater than 1.
(d) Convex mirror image formation
(i) The image formed by a convex mirror is always virtual erect and diminished in size for any
position of the object.
(ii) Magnification is always less than 1

162
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

(iii) Convex mirrors are used as driver mirrors, praboloid are used in search lights
(iv) The maximum distance between the image and the mirror is equal to its focal length
6. Formulae
(a) For any spherical mirror R  2 f y
x
1 1 1 2 f  xy
(b)   
u v f R
I
hi v v  f f F 0
(c) Linear magnification m    
h0 u f u  f 
Area of image
(d) Area magnification=
Area of object

(e) If x and y are the distance of real object and real image from the focus then f  xy (It is

called Newton’s formula)

7. Sign convention
(a) The distance of real objects and real images is taken as positive
(b) The distance of virtual object and virtual image are taken as negative
(c) F and R of concave mirror are taken as positive where as that of convex mirror are taken as
negative
Refraction through Plane surface
8. Optical density (Change in velocity) is responsible for refraction of light
(a) The light ray bend towards the normal when it travels from rarer to denser medium. Bends away from
the normal when it travels from denser to rarer medium.

9. Laws of refraction

sin i n v
(a) 1 n2  2  1 N
sin r n1 v2 A
iˆ
n1 V1 d=i–r
(b) Angle of deviation d  iˆ ~ rˆ
d
(c) For normal incidence, iˆ  rˆ  d  0 n2 V2 r̂
c
C M D
(d) Absolute refractive index n  n2 < n1
V
(e) n1 sin i  n2 sin r

10. Lateral shift

t sin i  r  1 N
(a) Ls  (b) n   Ls P
cos r   i
Q
(c) Maximum lateral shift Ls  t (when iˆ  90 )
ir
(d) The length of the path of ray inside the glass slab is r̂
t Ls
t
QR  t secr  n
cosr T
M R
11. Normal shift B
S
(a) An object in a denser medium appears nearer as seen from a

A D
163
I n
t

O OI = Ns
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

rarer medium (man in air seeing a fish in a pond)

real deapth t
(i) Refractive index n  
apparent depth AD

 1
(ii) Normal shift N s  t 1  
 n
(b) An object in a rarer medium appears for away as seen from a denser medium (fish in a pond seeing a
bird in air)

(i) Refractive index n  

Apparent depth AD

Real depth t
(ii) Normal shift Ns  t n  1

R3  R1   RD
(iii) Problem based on travelling microscope : refractive index n 
R3  R2  AD
(iv) Refraction through multiple media T.M
t t t 
(a) Total apparent depth   1  2  3  ......
 n1 n2 n3 
R3
t t  AD
(b) Total normal shift = t1  t2  t3   1  2  3 
t R2
RD
 1
n n 2 n3
R1
 1
(v)  N s  n  
 

12. Consequence of reaction

(a) Due to refraction
(i) A coin placed in a beaker containing water appears to be raised
(ii) A stick appears bent and short when immersed obliquely in water
(iii) The bottom of tank appears to be concave

(b) Due to atmosphere refraction

(i) The starts twinkle (due to variation of R.I of atmosphere)
(ii) The sun is seen before the sun rise and still seen after the sunset
(iii) The duration of the day increases by 4 minutes
(iv) The sun appears bigger during Sun set or sun rise
(v) In the absence of atmosphere
(a) The sky appears dark (b) duration of the day decreases by 4 minutes
13. Total internal reflection
(a) Conditions :
(1) The light should travel from denser to rarer medium
(2) The angle of incidence must be greater than the critical angle for the given pair r = 90o
of media n i>c
1
(b) Refractive index of denser medium n 
sin C

164
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

R.I of rarer medium 1  1

(c) sin C  (i) sin C  (ii) sin C  2 n  2 
R.I of densermedium n   

(d) The critical angle (C) depends upon pair of media colour of light and temperature T  C 

(e) For a fish or a diver under water the outside world appears to be with in a cone of vertex angle

2C. (where C is the critical angle)

h
(f) R  h tan C 
n 1
2

(g) Consequence of total internal reflection R

(i) An air bubble in water appears shining B

(ii) A diamond glitters

c h c c
(iii) Mirages formed on hot surfaces or deserts A
n
(iv) Images are formed in cold countries due to looming O

(v) Optical fibres works on principle of total internal reflection

165
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

Multiple Choice Questions

1. Which mirror is to be used to obtain a parallel beam of light from a small lamp?
(a) Plane mirror (b) Convex mirror
(c) Concave mirror (d) Any of the above
2. A man runs towards a mirror at a rate of 6 m/s. If we assume mirror to be at rest his image will have a
velocity
(a) 12 m/s (b) 6 m/s (c) –6 m/s (d) –12 m/s
3. A man who is 1.40 m tall stands in front of a mirror and can just see himself from head to toe assuming that
his eyes are 0.14 m below the top of his head the minimum height of the mirror is
(a) 1.40 m (b) 1.26 m (c) 0.7 m (d) 0.63 m
4. To get three images of single object, one should have two plane mirrors at an angle of
(a) 50 (b) 60 (c) 30 (d) 90
5. A square wire of side 3.0 cm is placed 25 cm away from concave mirror of focal length 10 cm. What is the
area enclosed by the image of the wire (the centre of the wire on the axis of the mirror with its two sides
normal to the axis)
(a) 4 cm2 (b) 9 cm2 (c) 4.5 cm2 (d) 20.25 cm2

6. Plane mirrors A and B are kept at an angle  with respect to each other. Light falls on A is reflected then

falls on B and is reflected. The emergent ray is opposite to the incident directions. Then the angle  is equal
to
(a) 45o (b) 30o (c) 60o (d) 90o
7. A mirror produced a magnified erect image of an object the nature of the mirror is
(a) plane (b) Neither convex nor concave
(c) convex (d) concave
8. A mirror forms a real image of unit magnification its nature is
(a) Concave (b) Plane (c) Parabolic (d) Convex
9. On looking at a mirror you find that your face appears larger than normal. This mirror is
(a) Plane (b) concave (c) convex (d) all are true
10. A plane mirror is approaching the object with a velocity 2 m/s. Then the velocity of the image is (in m/s)
(a) 4 (b) 2 (c) zero (d) 1
11. If the object is placed 10 cm in front of a convex mirror of radius of curvature 20 cm, the magnification is
(a) 2 (b) 1 (c) –0.5 (d) zero
12. An object is placed 20 cm in front of a convex mirror of radius of curvature of 40 cm. The image is
(a) Real and 10 cm behind the mirror (b) Real and 10 cm in front of the mirror
(c) Virtual and 10 cm in front of the mirror (d) virtual and 10 cm behind the mirror
13. A small object is placed 10 cm in front of a plane mirror. If you stand behind the object 30 cm from the
mirror and look at its image for what distance must you focus your eyes
(a) 60 cm (b) 20 cm (c) 40 cm (d) 80 cm

14. A concave mirror of focal length f is immersed in water of RI (4/3). The focal length of the mirror in water

will be

(a) f (b) f 2 (c) 4 f 3 (d) 3 f 4

166
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

15. An object is placed 5m from the plane mirror, then the object is moved towards the mirror with a velocity
of 0.1 m/s after 10 seconds the distance between the object and the image is

(a) 9m (b) 8m (c) 7m (d) 6m

16. The light reflected by a plane mirror may form a real image
(a) If the object is placed very close to the mirror
(b) Under no circumstances
(c) If the rays incident on the mirror are diverging
(d) If the rays incident on the mirror are converging

17. A thin rod of length f 3 is placed along the optic axis of a concave mirror of focal length f such that its

image, which is real and elongated just touches the rod. The magnification is
(a) 1.5 (b) 3 (c) 2 3 (d) none of these

18. The velocity of light in a medium is 2  108 m s the refractive index of the medium is

(a) 1.4 (b) 2.3 (c) 1.0 (d) 1.5

19. If Cg Cw and Cv are velocities of light in glass water and vacuum then

(a) Cw  Cg  Cv (b) C g  Cv , C w  C g

(c) Cv  Cg , Cg  Cw (d) Cg  Cw , Cw  Cv

20. If C1 and C2 are velocities of light in two media and respective angle of incidence and refraction are 1 and

 2 then
(a) C1 cos1  C2 cosec2 (b) C1 cot1  C2 cot2

(c) C1 tan1  C2 tan2 (d) C1 sin1  C2 sin2

21. The critical angle for a medium is 45o the R.I is

(a) 1 2 (b) 2 (c) 3 2 (d) 2 3

22. Total internal reflection take place when light passes from
(a) Water to glass (b) Glass to diamond
(c) Air to water (d) Glass to air
23. The brilliance of diamond is
(a) entirely due to refractive index (b) Entirely due to total internal reflection
(c) Partly due to refractive reflection (d) none of these

24. Travelling microscope is focused on a ink dot marked on a piece of paper. When the glass slab n  1.5 of

thickness 9 cm is placed on the ink dot the T.M has to be moved (in order to restore the focus)
(a) 3 cm upward (b) 5 cm upward
(c) 3 cm downward (d) 5 cm downward
25. A swimmer is inside a tank, supposing that the surface is calm. The swimmer when looking up sees the
outside in an angular separation of (assume critical angle for what air interface is 49 o)
(a) 40o (b) 90o (c) 980 (d) 101o
26. Mirages are observed on sunny day when
(a) Density of air decreases with height (b) Density of air increases with height
(c) Earth acts like a mirror (d) Air is dense uniformly

167
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

27. The angle of total reflecting prism are

(a) 40o 50o 85o (b) 45o 45o 90o (c) 90o 90o 90o (d) 45o 45o 45o
28. Optical fibres are used in
(a) Polarimeter (b) Photometer (c) Voltmeter (d) Gastroscope
29. A fish under water viewing obliquely a fisherman standing on the bank of a lake, man looks
(a) Shorter than what actually is (b) depends on the obliquity
(c) The same height as he actually is (d) taller than what he actually is
30. A fish looking up through the water sees the outside world contained in a circular horizon. If R.I of water is
4/3 and the fish is 12 cm below the surface of water, the radius of the circle in centimeter is

12  3 12  3
(a) 12  3  7 (b) (c) (d) 12  3  5
5 7
31. The cause of mirage is one of the following
(a) the RI of the atmosphere deceases with height
(b) The hot ground reflects the light
(c) The hot air oscillates continuously
(d) The RI of the atmosphere increases with height
32. A man is swimming under water with undisturbed surface looking up at the bright sky through the water.
He will see
(a) A bright patch directly above whose angular size is independent of the depth
(b) A shining surface of water
(c) Just darkness
(d) A bright patch directly above whose angular size depends upon the depth of the swimmer

33. A mark is made on the bottom of a beaker and a liquid of RI n is poured to a height h when viewed
vertically from the top the marks seems to be raised by the amount given by

 n 1  n 1  n 1 
(a) h  h (b) h  h (c) h  h
' ' '
   (d)
 n   n  nh

 n 1
h'   
 nh 
34. A bulb is kept at a depth-h inside water of refractive index – n. Area of bright patch on water surface is

(a)
h 2
n 1
2
 
(b)  n 2  1 h 2 (c) h 2 (d)
h 2
n2
n2  1

35. A spot is placed on the bottom of the slab made of transparent material of RI 1.5 the spot is viewed
vertically from the top, it seems to be raised by 2 cm, then the height of the slab is
(a) 10 cm (b) 8 cm (c) 6 cm (d) 4 cm
36. The RI of a transparent material is 1.54 this means that the speed of light in this material is

(a) 4.6  1010 (b) 1.54  108 (c) 3 108 (d) 1.95  108

37. Va ,Vg and Vw are the values of the velocity of light in air glass and water respectively which of the

following relations is true?

168
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

Vw V Vg Va
(a)  1 and g  1 (b)  1 and 1
Vg Va Vw Vw

Vw V Va V
(c)  1 and w  1 (d)  1 and w  1
Vg Va Vw Vg

38. RI of glass is 1.5 and that of diamond is 2.4 the RI for refraction from diamond to glass is
(a) 1.6 (b) 3.6 (c) 0.625 (d) none of these
39. Total internal reflection occurs when
(a) Light passes from air to glass with an angle of incidence greater than the critical
(b) Light passes from air to glass with an angle of incidence less than the critical angle
(c) Light passes from glass to air with an angle of incidence greater than the critical angle
(d) Light passes from glass to air with an angle of incidence less than the critical angle
40. Light from air to glass is refracted, as is light passing glass to air. However when you look out of a window
at the view outside, the light does not seen to have been distorted. This is because
(a) The angle of refraction is too small to observe
(b) Light incident upon the glass is partially reflected and this tends to make the effect of
refraction
(c) The emergent ray is parallel to the incident ray and only displacement occurs
(d) The window pan is too thin for refraction to occurs
41. The velocity of light in vacuum is 3 108 m s the RI of water is 1.33 the velocity of light in water is (in m/s)

(a) 3 108 (b) 2.2  108 (c) 4  108 (d) none of these
42. A transparent cube of 0.21m edge contains a small air bubble. Its apparent distance when viewed through
one face of the cube is 0.10 m and when viewed from the opposite face 0.04 m. The actual distance of the
bubble from the second face of the cube is
(a) 0.06 m (b) 0.17 m (c) 0.04 m (d) 0.05 m
43. A glass slab of thickness 4 cm contains the same number of waves as 5 cm of water when both are traversed
by the same monochromatic light. If RI of water is 4/3 what is the RI of glass?
(a) 5/3 (b) 5/4 (c) 16/15 (d) 1.5

44. The index of refraction a certain glass is 1.50 for light whose wavelength in vacuum is 6000 A , what is the
wavelength of this light as it pass through glass?
  
(a) 6000 A (b) 9000 A (c) 4000 A (d) none of
these
45. If a glass rod is put in a beaker containing a colourless liquid, the glass rod immediately seems to disappear
it is so because
(a) The liquid and glass have some colour (b) The glass and liquid have the same density
(c) The glass and liquid have same refractive index (d) The glass reflected the light transmitted by the
liquid
46. Which one of the following object will appear invisible?
(a) A blue object on a white background seen through a blue filter
(b) As in (a) but seen through a red filter
(c) A green object on a red background illuminated by red light

169
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

(d) A white object on a blue background seen through a red filter

47. The critical angle of light passing from glass to air is minimum for
(a) Red (b) Green (c) Yellow (d) Violet
48. The time required for light to pass through a glass slab of thickness t and RI n is

tc tn nc t
(a) (b) (c) (d)
n c t c
49. In optical fibres the following principle is used
(a) Refraction (b) Scattering (c) Successive reflection (d) total internal
reflection
50. A man standing in a swimming pool look at a stone lying at the bottom. The depth of the swimming pool is

h . At what distance from the surface of the water is the image of the stone formed? (Line of vision is
normal) the RI of water is n

(a) h n (b) n h (c) h (d) hn

51. When a ray of light emerges from a block of glass the critical angle is
(a) Equal to angle of refraction (b) The angle between the reflected ray and normal
(c) The angle of incidence for which the refracted ray travel along the glass air boundary
(d) The angle of incidence
52. On heating a liquid refractive index generally?
(a) Decreases (b) Increases or decreases on the rate of heating
(c) Does not change (d) increases

53. A ray of light is incident in glass 31 42' on a glass water boundary. If the angle of deviation of the ray is 4.5
degree the angle of refraction in water will be

(a) 2691' (b) 3612' (c) 27 12' (d) 3592'

54. A vertical shift produced due to normal refraction
(a) Decreases with increases of depth (b) does not depend on these factors
(c) Increase with increase of refractive index (d) Decreases with increases of refractive index

55. A ray of light travels from an optically denser to rarer medium. The critical angle for the two media is C the
maximum possible deviation of the ray will be

 
(a)   2c (b)  c (c)   C  (d) 2c
2 
56. A ray of light in glass of RI 1.5 is incident at angle of 50 o on glass air boundary. Calculate the angle of
deviation of the ray
(a) 80o (b) cannot found out (c) 96o (d) 48o36’
57. When light passes from one medium to another there is a change in
(a) Frequency and velocity (b) Frequency and wavelength
(c) Wavelength and velocity (d) Frequency, wavelength and velocity
58. A ray of light is travelling from glass to air (RI of glass is 1.5) . The angle of incidence is 50o. The deviation
of the ray is

170
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

1
 sin 50  
(a) sin    50 (b) 0o (c) 80 (d)
 1.5 

 sin 50 
50  sin 1  
 1.5 

59. A ray of light enters a rectangular glass slab of refractive index 3 at an angle of incidence 60 . It travels a

distance of 5 cm inside the slab and emerges out of the slab. The perpendicular distance between the
incident ray and emergent ray is

5 3 5 4
(a) 4 3 cm (b) cm (c) cm (d) cm
2 2 3
60. A red flower seen through a green glass looks
(a) Yellow (b) Red (c) Green (d) Black
61. A, B and C are three optical media of respective critical angles C1,C2 and C3 T.I.R of light can occur from

A to B and also from B to C but not from C to A then the correct relation between the critical angles is
(a) C1  C2  C3 (b) C3  C1  C2 (c) C1  C2  C3 (d) C1  C2  C3

62. Two optical media of RI n1 and n2 contain X and Y waves of same colour in the same thickness. Then their

relative RI 1 n2 is equal to

x y yx
(a) (b) x y (c) (d)
yx x x
63. A small object is placed 20 cm in front of a block of glass 10 cm thick and its farther side silvered. The image
is formed 22 cm behind the silvered face then the refractive index of the glass is
(a) 1.15 (b) 1.25 (c) 1.67 (d) 1.1
64. The bottom of beaker containing a liquid appears to rise 4 cm. On increasing the depth of the liquid by 12
cm the bottom appears to raise by 7 cm. The refractive index of the liquid is
(a) 3 4 (b) 4 3 (c) 3 2 (d) 5 3

65. A vessel of height 2d is half filled with a liquid of R.I. 2 and the other half with a liquid of R.I n . (the
given liquids are immiscible). Then the apparent depth of the inner surface of the bottom of the vessel
(neglecting the thickness of the bottom of the vessel) will be

nd 
d n 2  n
 
2n
(a) (b) (c) (d)
d  2n 
d n 2  n 2 d n 2

66. A ray of light travelling in air incidents on air water interface at an angle of 30 then it passes through water
glass interface and finally enters into air. The angle of emergences is
(a) Less than 30o (b) Greater than 30o (c) Equal to 30o (d) none of these
67. A ray of light passes from vacuum into a medium of R.I. n. The angle of incidence is found to be twice the
angle of refraction. The angle of incidence is

1 n  1  n  1 n 
(a) cos   (b) 2 cos   (c) 2 sin1 n (d) 2 sin  
2 2 2

171
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

68. While a moving picture is being screened, a boy introduced a glass slab of thickness 3 cm and R.I. 1.5
between the projector and the screen. In order to have a clear picture on the screen, the screen should be
moved through a distance of
(a) 1 cm away (b) 2 cm away (c) 1 cm nearer (d) 3 cm away
69. A beaker contains water and alcohol with a pin at its bottom. The depth of water and alcohol are 8 cm and

 4 6
12 cm respectively. The apparent depth of the pin is  nw  and na  
 3 5
(a) 12 cm (b) 10 cm (c) 4 cm (d) 16 cm
70. Snell’s law of refraction holds good in
(a) Light (b) Sound (c) Electro magnetic wave (d) All of these

71. A ray of light travelling inside a rectangular glass block of R.I. 2 is incident on the glass air surface at an

angle of incidence of 45 . Under these conditions the ray

(a) Will emerge into the air without any deviation (b) Will be reflected back into the glass
(c) Will be absorbed (d) Will emerge into the air with an angle of refraction equal to 90 o
72. A glass slab is placed in the path of a beam of convergence light. The point of convergence of light
(a) move towards the glass slab (b) move away from glass slab
(c) Remains at the same point (d) undergoes a lateral shift
73. On passing through a glass slab red light suffers a change of
(a) Wave length (b) Frequency
(c) amplitude (d) both frequency and wavelength
74. Critical angle of light passing from glass to air is maximum for
(a) Violet (b) blue (c) yellow (d) red

75. If the refractive indices for water and diamond relative to air are 1.33 and 2.4 respectively. Then R.I. of
diamond relative to water is
(a) 0.55 (b) 1.80 (c) 3.19 (d) none of these
76. When viewed vertically a fist appears to be 4 metre below the surface of the lake. If R.I. of water is 1.33 then
true depth of fish is metres
(a) 5.32 (b) 3.32 (c) 4.32 (d) 6.32
77. A mirage occurs because
(a) The R.I. of atmospheric increases with height (b) The R.I. of atmospheric decreases with height
(c) The hot ground acts like a mirror (d) R.I. remains constant with height
78. If the velocity of light in water is 2.25  108 m s and that in glass is 2  108 m s . A slab of this glass is

immersed in water, what will be the critical angle of incidence of a ray of light tending to go from glass to
water?

1  3  1  8  1  4  1  3 
(a) sin   (b) sin   (c) sin   (d) sin  
5 9 5 4
79. Lateral shift produced by a glass slab is X. When the slab is immersed in a liquid, for the same incident ray
lateral shift produced will be
(a) X (b) greater than X (c) less than X (d) zero

172
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

80. A rectangular block of glass is placed on a printed page lying on a horizontal plane. Find the minimum
value of R.I. of glass for which the letters on the page are not visible from any of the vertical faces of the
block
(a) 0.72 (b) 2.32 (c) 1.414 (d) 2.02

81. Optical fibres may be used

(a) to transmit signals with appreciable loss of energy
(b) to transmit signals without appreciable loss of energy
(c) to store solar energy
(d) to arrange rains
82. A glass plate has thickness t and refractive index n . The angle of incidence of a ray from air into the plate is
equal to the critical angle for glass – air interface the displacement of ray is given by

 1   1  t 1  t n 
(a) t 1   (b) n t   (c) 1   (d) t  
 n 2  1   n 2  1  n
 n 2  1  n
 n 2  1 

83. A fish rising vertically with speed 3 m s to the surface of water sees a bird diving vertically towards it with

speed 9 m/s. The actual velocity of the dive of the bird is

(a) 6 m/s (b) 4 m/s (c) 8.4 m/s (d) 4.5 m/s

Answers
129. c 130. c 131. c 132. d 133. a 134. d 135. c 136. a 137. b 138. a
139. c 140. d 141. c 142. a 143. b 144. d 145. a 146. d 147. c 148. a
149. b 150. d 151. b 152. a 153. c 154. b 155. b 156. d 157. d 158. c
159. d 160. d 161. a 162. a 163. c 164. d 165. b 166. c 167. c 168. c
169. b 170. a 171. a 172. c 173. c 174. a 175. d 176. b 177. d 178. a
179. c 180. c 181. b 182. c 183. a 184. a 185. c 186. c 187. c 188. a
189. a 190. c 191. c 192. b 193. c 194. c 195. b 196. a 197. d 198. d
199. d 200. b 201. a 202. d 203. b 204. a 205. a 206. b 207. c 208. c
209. b 210. c 211. d

173
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

REFRACTION OF LIGHT THROUGH PRISM

14. (a) The phenomenon of splitting up of white light into its constituent colours is known as dispersion of light.
(b) A devise which is used for dispersion of light is called prism

15. (a) When the prism is in the minimum deviation position

 A D
sin 
(i) iˆ1  iˆ2  iˆ (ii) rˆ1  rˆ2  rˆ (iii) R.I. prism n   2 
 A
sin 
2

(b) At minimum deviation position the refracted ray inside the prism is parallel to the base (the
light ray is symmetric about the base of the prism)

(i) d  iˆ1  iˆ2  A (ii) A  rˆ1  rˆ2 (iii) d  2i  A

(c) If light ray incident normally on one face of the prism and emergent
A
ray just grazes form the second face then
(i) i1  r1  0 and (ii) i2  90 and r2  C
i2 = 90
I1 = r1 = 0 r2 = c
1 1
(iii) A  r1  r2  C (iv) n  
sin C sin A

(v) Angle of deviation d  i1  i2  A  90  C

(d) If the light ray incident grazing the first face and after refraction grazes out from the second face
then

(i) i1  i2  90 (ii) rˆ1  rˆ2  c

(iii) A  r1  r2  2C (iv) n  1

1
sin C  A
sin  
2

(v) d  180  2C

(e) Limiting angle of incidence i1  sin1n sin A  C 

A
 A D
sin  r̂1
(f) 1 n2 
 2 
i1  90 Iˆ2  90
 A n1
sin  n2 r̂2
2
n1- RI of surrounding, n2- R.I of prism

(i) If n2  n1 the refracted ray deviated towards the base

(ii) If n2  n1 the refracted ray is deviated away from the base

(iii) The angle of deviation is maximum for violet and minimum for red

174
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

B 1
(g) Total reflecting prisms [Cauchy’s formula n  A  2  .....  n  2 ]
 
(i) They are right angled isosceles prisms
(ii) They are made of crown glass (glass) of critical angle 42o
(iii) The image produced by total reflecting prisms is more brighter than the image
produced by a plane mirror
(iv) Deviation through 90o this arrangement is used in periscope
(v) Deviation through 180o this arrangement is used in Binoculars
16. Deviation in a small angled prisms
(a) i1  nr1 (b) i2  nr2

(c) d  n  1A
d1 A1
(d) For given monochromatic light 
d 2 A2

17. Prisms immersed in a liquid

 ng  
(i) d     1 A
 nL  

(ii) If ng  nL then deviation produced is zero

(iii) When prism is immersed in a liquid the deviation decreases and the emergent ray moves away
from the base

(iv) Dispersion of light was discovered by Newton

A
(v) The angular dispersion  dv  dr  nv  nr A n1 R
V

Angulardispersion dv  dr n
(vi) Depressive power W  
mean deviation d A1

w
dv  d r  nv  nr 

 where n 
nv  nr 
n  1A n  1 2

 A'  n  1 
(vii) Dispersion without deviation . The condition is 
 A
 '
 
n  1 


(a) The negative sign indicates that the refracting angles of the two prisms are in the opposite
direction
(b) Prisms should be made of different materials
(viii) Depressive Power of the flint glass Prism is greater than that of crown glass Prism


(ix) For net dispersion without deviation dv  d R      ' n  1A 

175
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

Multiple choice Questions

1. The angle of incidence and emergence of an equilateral prism are 50 and 40 the angle of deviation is

(a) 40 (b) 50 (c) 60 (d) 30

2. When the deviation of yellow line of a spectrum is minimum then the refracted ray is
(a) parallel to base (b) Perpendicular to base

(c) Either (a) or (b) (d) none of these

3. The largest angle of minimum deviation occurs when light of one of the following colours passes through a
prism
(a)Indigo (b) Green (c) Red (d) Yellow

4. The angle of minimum deviation of a ray in a glass prism is least for the light of colour
(a) Red (b) Violet (c) Green (d) Yellow

5. A ray of light goes through an equilateral prism in the position of minimum deviation is 30 the refractive
index of the prism is
(a) 1.52 (b) 1.41 (c) 1.33 (d) 1.64

6. A transparent material has three RI 1.665, 1.650 and 1.68 for yellow red and blue light respectively. The
dispersive power of the substance is
(a) 0.03 (b) 0.018 (c) 2.0 (d) 0.045

7. The dispersive power of the material of a prism is maximum for the colours
(a) Violet and green (b) Violet and red (c) Rea and green (d) Blue and red

8. Rainbow is observed when sun is

(a) In front of the observer (b) behind the observer

(c) Vertically above the observer (d) in any of these position

9. The spreading out of white light into its component

(a) Refraction (b) Deviations (c) Dispersion (d) Diffractions

10. A glass prism placed in a homogeneous transparent medium will deviate an incident ray
(a) always towards its base (b) always away from its base

(c) Towards its base only if the medium has refractive index greater than that of glass

(d) Towards the base only if the medium has a refractive index less than that of glass

11. The R.I. of an equilateral prism is 3 . what is the angle of minimum deviation?

(a) 45o (b) 60o (c) 37o (d) 72o

12. On a right angled prism the rays, A, B and C are incident as shown in the figure. Before emerging from the
prism which ray or rays will experience total internal reflection

176
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

(a) A (b) B (c) C (d) none of these

13. When viewed in a green light a flag that is red and green will appear to be
(a) Black (b) Black and Green (c) Green (d) Green and Yellow

14. To measure the RI of the material of a prism we have to use

(a) The prism of any angle and light of any wavelength

(b) The prism with angle 60 and the white light only

(c) The prism of angle 60 and sodium light only

(d) The prism of angle 90 and any wavelength of light

15. A white screen illuminated by green and red lights appears to be
(a) Green (b) Red (c) Yellow (d) White

16. White light is incident on one of the refracting surfaces of a prism of refracting angle 5 . If R.I for red and

blue colours are 1.641 and 1.659 respectively. The angular dispersion between these two colours when they
emerge out of prism is

(a) 0.09 (b) 0.9 (c) 1.2 (d) 1.8

17. When light is refracted through a prism, maximum deviation occurs when
(a) the ray is incident grazing the first face
(b) The ray emerges out grazing its second face
(c) Either of the above happens
(d) Neither of the above happens

18. A ray of monochromatic light is incident at an angle 49 on the first face of an equilateral prism placed in the
minimum deviation position. Find the angle between the emergent and incident rays

(a) 11 (b) 22 (c) 38 (d) 19

19. Which of the following diagrams shows correctly the dispersion of white light by the prism

v v
R v
R v
R R

(1) (2) (3) (4)

20. A thin prism P1 with angle 4 and made from a glass of R.I. 1.54 is combined with another thin prism P2

from glass of R.I. 1.72 to produce dispersion without deviation. The angle of prism P2 is

(a) 4 (b) 5.33 (c) 2.6 (d) 3

177
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

21. For a prism of RI 3 the angle of the prism is equal to the angle of minimum deviation the value of angle of

minimum deviation is

(a) 50 (b) 45 (c) 350 (d) 600

22. If the angle of incidence is 42 in the minimum deviation position of an equilateral prism, the angle of
minimum deviation is

(a) 22 (b) 45 (c) 24 (d) none of these

23. A ray of light incident normally on one of the faces of prism of angle 30 and RI 2 .The angle of deviation
of the ray is

(a) 12.5 (b) 0 (c) 3 (d) 15

24. The deviation produced in a prism of angle 2 and RI 1.5 is

(a) 1 (b) 2 (c) 3 (d) 1.5

25. Rainbow is due to

(a) Scattering of light by water droplets
(b) Refraction and total internal reflection of light by water droplets
(c) Dispersion and total internal reflection of light by water droplets
(d) All of these
26. Reflecting prisms used in periscope deviated a ray of light through

(a) 45 (b) 60 (c) 90 (d) 120 

27. For refraction through a prism angle of minimum deviation is minimum when
(a) i1  i2  A (b) i2  i2  r1  r2 (c) i1  r1   i2  r2  (d) none of these

28. Yellow and blue pigments when mixed looks

(a) Red (b) Green (c) White (d) Black

29. A given ray of a light suffers minimum deviation in an equilateral prism P .

Additional prism Q and R of identical shape and material are now added to P
Q
as shown in figure. The ray will suffer
(a) Total internal reflection (b) No deviation P R

(c) same deviation (d) greater deviation

30. A ray of light is incident normally on one face of a right angled isosceles prism. It then grazes the
hypotenuse. The refractive index of the material of the prism is

(a) 1.414 (b) 1.33 (c) 1.732 (d) 1 .5

178
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

31. A prism of certain angle deviates the red and blue rays by 8 and 12 respectively. Another prism of same

angle deviates the red and blue rays by 10 and 14 respectively. The prisms are small angled and made of
different materials. The dispersive powers of the materials of the prisms are in the ratio

(a) 9 : 11 (b) 5:6 (c) 11 : 9 (d) 6:5

32. Angle of minimum deviation of an equilateral prism is equal to the angle of the prism. The R.I. of the prism
material is

(a) 1.50 (b) 1.73 (c) 1.62 (d) 1.43

33. Dispersive power of the prism material is

(a) more near violet line (b) more near red line

(c) less towards violet line (d) same near all spectral lines observed

34. If one face of a prism is silvered having prism angle of 30 and n  2 . What will be angle of incidence so
that the incident ray retraces the path?

(a) 60  (b) 30 (c) 45 (d) 90

35. What is the liming angle of prism of RI 2

(a) 45 (b) 60  (c) 90 (d) 120 

36. The angle of minimum deviation for a 75 prism of dense glass is found to be 45 when in air . It is 15 when
immersed in certain liquid. The RI of liquid is

3 3 3
(a) (b) (c) (d) 3
2 2 2

37. A glass prism is immersed in a certain liquid. The angle of deviation is found to be zero. Which of the
following is correct?
(a) RI of glass is greater than liquid (b) RI of glass is less than liquid

(c) RI of glass is equal to that of liquid (d) none of these

38. A crown glass prism of angle 6.2 is to be combined with a flint glass prism in such way that the mean ray
passes undeviated. What is the angle of the flint glass prism needed if the RI of crown and flint glass yellow

light are 1.517 and 1.620 respectively?

(a) 1.5 (b) 5.17  (c) 51.7 (d) 150

39. A graph is drawn between the angles of incidence and deviation using an equilateral prism. The deviation is

45 for an angle of incidence 52 . The other angle of incidence for the same deviation is

(a) 67 (b) 53 (c) 48.5 (d) none of these

179
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

40. If a light ray incident normally on one of the faces of the prism of R.I. 2 and the emergent ray just grazes
the second face of the prism, the angle of the prism is

(a) 60 (b) 30 (c) 45 (d) none of these

41. On entering a glass prism, sun rays are

(a) deviated but not dispersed (b) deviated and dispersed

(c) dispersed but not deviated (d) neither deviated nor dispersed

42. The light incident on an equilateral prism of R.I. 2 suffers minimum deviation. The minimum angle of
deviated and angle of incidence are (in degree)
(a) 45, 30 (b) 30, 45 (c) 45, 45 (d) 30, 30

43. Prism spectrum and first order grating spectrum of a given light are under study then
(a) Prism spectrum will be more bright (b) grating spectrum will be more study then

(c) both are equally bright (d) intensities of two spectra are unpredictable

44. A thin prism P1 of angle 4 and made from glass of R.I. 1.54 is combined with another prism P2 made from

glass of R.I. 1.72 to produce dispersion without deviation the angle of prism P2 is

(a) 8 (b)  3 (c)  5 (d) 9

45. Light ray is incident perpendicularly to one face of a 90 prism and is totally internally reflected at the glass

air interface. If the angle of reflection is 45 . We conclude that the refractive index n of the prism is

1 1
(a) n  2 (b) n  (c) n  2 (d) n 
2 2

46. A ray of light is incident on an equilateral glass prism placed on horizontal

table. For minimum deviation . Which of the following is true? Q R S
(a) PQ is horizontal (b) QR is horizontal P

(c) RS is horizontal (d) either PQ or RS is horizontal

47. In a thin prism n  1.5 , r is the angle of refraction and Dm is the angle of minimum deviation. Then which

of the relation is correct?

(a) Dm  r (b) Dm  1.5 (c) Dm  2r (d) Dm  r 2

48. A light ray is incident on a prism in minimum deviation position and suffers deviation of 34 . If shaded half
of the section is removed off, then same ray will suffer a deviation of

(a) 18 (b) 17  (c) 34 (d) 14

180
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

49. A certain prism is that to produce minimum deviation of 38 . It produces a deviation of 44 . When the

angle of incidence is either 42 OR 62 what is R.I. of the material of the prism
(a) 1.33 (b) 1.41 (c) 1.51 (d) 1.72

50. There is prism with RI equal to 2 and refracting angle equal to 30 . One of the refracting surfaces of the
prism is polished. A beam of monochromatic light will retrace its path. Find the angle of incidence over the
refracting surface of the prism.

(a) 30 (b) 60 (c) 45 (d) 90

51. White light is passed through a prism of angle 5 of refractive indices for red and blue colors are 1.641 and
1.659 respectively. The angle of dispersion between them is

(a) 0.09 (b) 0.018  (c) 2.7 (d) 0.0027 

52. In direct vision spectro scope there is

(a) no deviation for any ray of the composite light (b) no deviation for the extreme rays

(c) no deviation for the mean ray (d) All the rays of composite light are equally deviated

53. If a glass prism is placed in a liquid of refractive index grater than that of glass with which the prism is
made. The ray deviates towards
(a) the base of the prism (b) refracting edge of the prism

(c) the normal to the base (d) the second face of the prism

Answers
1. d 2. a 3. a 4. a 5. b 6. d 7. b 8. b 9. c 10. d
11. b 12. b 13. b 14. a 15. c 16. a 17. a 18. c 19. b 20. a
21. d 22. c 23. d 24. a 25. c 26. c 27. c 28. d 29. c 30. a
31. d 32. b 33. a 34. c 35. c 36. c 37. c 38. b 39. b 40. c
41. b 42. b 43. a 44. b 45. a 46. b 47. a 48. b 49. b 50. c
51. a 52. a 53. b

181
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

REFRACTION THROUGH CURVED SURFACE

1.
n n n  n  
Formula for refraction through cured surface  0  1  1 0 
u v R 

n1  n0 
2. Power of refraction surface P 
R
SI unit of power of a refracting surface is Dioptre (D)

3. Formation of images by convex lens

(a) The convex lens forms both real (diminished and magnified) and virtual magnified images
(b) It’s linear magnification is either equal to 1 or less than 1 or greater than 1

(c) The minimum distance between the object and its real images 4 f

4. Image formation by concave lens

(a) The image formed by a concave lens is always virtual erect, diminished in size for any position of
the object.
(b) The image is formed on the same side as the object
(c) The magnification is always less than one

(d) The maximum distance between the images and the concave lens is f

5. The relation between u,v,f and m

1 1 1 uv
(a)   or f 
f u v uv

size of the image h1 v

(b) (i) Linear magnification  m  
size of the object h0 u

Area of image
(ii) Area magnification
Area of object

v f
(c) m 
f

f
(d) m 
u f

(e) If X and Y are the distance of real object and real image measured from the focus of convex lens than

f  xy

x
(f) For conjugate positions of the lens

y object
D2  S 2
(i) f  F O F
4D Image

Lens
182
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

S
(ii) f 
m1  m2 

(iii) 0  I2I2

(iv) D  u  v and s  v u

1
(g) (i) Power of lens P 
focal length  f 

(ii) SI unit of power of a lens is dioptre

1 1 
(h) Lens makers formula
1

 ng  1   
f  1
R R2

(i) Lens placed in a liquid of R.I nL then

(ii)
1
 l ng  1 R1 
1  
ng  nL  1 1 
'    
f  1 R2  nL  R1 R2 

(iii)
f'


nL n g  1   R1R2 
(iv) n  1  
f 
n g  nL  
 f R1  R2  

(v) If ng  nL the nature of lens does not change. Focal length of lens increases and power decreases

(vi) If ng  nL . A convex lens behaves as a concave lens and concave lens behaves as convex lens.

(vii) An air bubble in a liquid behaves as a divergent lens.

6. (i) Combination of thin lenses in contact

1 1 1
(a)    ...... (b) Power p  p1  p2  p3  .....
f f1 f 2

(ii) Combination of two thin lenses separated by a distance, d

1 1 1 d
(a)    (b) Power, P  P1  P2  dP1P2
f f1 f 2 f1 f 2

7. Silvering of lenses at one faces

R f
(i) F   1 (i) f1 fm  
2n  1 2

R
(ii) F  (ii) f1 fm  R 2
2n

183
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

R
(iii) F  (iii) f1 fm  R 2
22n  1

8. Defects of eye
(a) Short sightedness (Myopia) : A person with this defect can see the near objects clearly but not the
distance objects. (It is rectified by using a suitable concave lens)
(b) Long sightedness (hyper metropia) : A person with this defect can see distance object clearly. But
can not see clearly the object situated at a distance of 25 cm. It is rectified by using a suitable convex
lens
9. The defects in the optical images is known as aberration
(a) Chromatic aberration
(b) Monochromatic aberration
(c) If the image of white object is mutli coloured and blurred this defect is called chromatic aberration
(d) This is due to the fact that the focal length of the lens varies with wave length (colour)
nv  nr  f R  fv 
(e) Chromatic aberration can be eliminated by an achromatic doublet. The condition to be satisfied is

w1 f
 1
w2 f2
(f) Chromatic aberration can also be minimized by using two convex lenses separated by distance

f1  f 2
d [Both lenses are made of same material]
2
(g) Monochromatic aberration : [Spherical aberration, Astigmatism, coma, distortion, curvature]
(h) Spherical aberration : The inability of the lenses to form a point image of an axial point object is called
spherical aberration
(i) This is caused due to the spherical shape of the lens

(ii) By using a convex and concave lens spherical aberration can be minimized

(iii) Spherical aberration can be minimized by using two plano convex lenses separated by distance
d  f1  f 2 facing the incident (parallel) rays

(iv) It also can be minimized by using stops.

184
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

Multiple Choice Questions

1. The focal length of an equiconvex lens n  1.5 is 30 cm, the radii of curvature of the faces are respectively

(a) 15, 30 (b) 14,28 (c) 30,30 (d) 15,15

2. A lens of power 2 D and 1D are kept in contract. The focal length of the combination behaves as a lens
of power

(a) 3D (b) 3D (c) 1D (d) 1D

3. Two lens of power 2 D and 5D are kept in contact. The focal length of the combination is
1 1
(a)  m (b) m (c) 3m (d) 3m
3 3

4. An object is placed at a distance of 18 cm from a convex lens. The image is formed at a distance of 9 cm. The
focal length of the lens is

(a) 6 cm (b) 9 cm (c) 10 cm (d) 3m

5. The focal length of a convex lens of radii of curvature 20 cm and 30 cm is 24 cm. Then refractive index is
(a) 1.0 (b) 1.3 (c) 1.5 (d) 2/4

6. For a given lens the magnification was found to be twice as large as when the object was 0.15 m distant from
it. The focal length of the lens is
(a) 0.2 m (b) 0.1 m (c) 0.005 m (d) 0.15 m

7. The radii of curvature of the two faces of the lens are 10 cm and 15 cm. If RI of the lens is 1.54 then the focal
length of the lens is (in cm)
(a) 9.0 (b) 16.2 (c) 38.5 (d) 11.1

8. In the case of convex lens made of flint glass the focal length
(a) is shorter for green colour than for yellow
(b) Is longer for blue than fed
(c) Is the same for all colours
(d) Depends on the colour only when it is used with another lens
9. A beam of parallel rays is brought to focus by a Plano convex lens. A thin concave lens of same focal length
is joined to the first lens the effect of this is
(a) the focal point shift away from the lens by a small distance
(b) the focus shift to infinity
(c) the focus remains undisturbed
(d) the focus moves side wards

10. An image of 2 cm is formed by a convex lens when an object of height 8 cm is placed at a distance of 80 cm
from it the focal length of the lens is
(a) 10 cm (b) 16 cm (c) 4 cm (d) 5 cm

185
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

11. The radii of curvature of the two faces of the lens have a value r1 and r2 . If the RI of the lens is n then its

focal length is given by

r1r2 1 1 
(a) f  (b) f  n  1  
n  1r1  r2   r1 r2 

 r   r  r  
(c) f  n  1r2r1  1  (d) f  n  2 1 2 
 r2  2 

12. Consider a convex lens made of glass. Let its focal length corresponding to the colour red, yellow and blue
respectively f r , f y and fb which of the following relation is true?

(a) f r  f y  fb (b) f y  fb and f y  f r

(c) f y  fb and f y  f r (d) f y  f r and f y  fb

13. Inside a quantity of transparent oil kept in a rectangular glass vessel there is an air bubble. The bubble
behave as
(a) Concave lens (b) Concave mirror (c) convex lens (d) convex mirror

14. A lens of power 4 D is kept in contact with another lens. The combination has the focal length of the 40 cm
the power of the second lens is

(a) 2 D (b) 1.5D (c) 2.5D (d) 3.00 D

15. Two converging lenses of equal focal lengths f are placed in contact the focal length of the combination is

(a) f (b) 2 f (c) f 2 (d) 3 f

16. A camera is focused to take the picture of a girl standing 2m away from the camera lens. If the film is 10 cm,
from the lens, the focal length of the lens expressed in cm is
(a) 20 (b) 9.5 (c) 200 (d) 10.0

17. It is desired to produce a real image on a screen, using a convex lens of focal length 10 cm the minimum
distance between the object and screen should be
(a) 20 cm (b) 60 cm (c) 100 cm (d) 40 cm

18. Two Plano convex lenses each having focal length of 0.4m are pressed against each other at their plane faces.
This forms a double convex lens. At what distance from this lens must an object be placed to obtain a real,
inverted image with magnification one?
(a) 0.8 m (b) 0.4 m (c) 0.2 m (d) 1.6 m

19. To produce an image in the position shown the object would

have to be placed
A B F 2
(a) Between B and Q (b) At B
O O

(c) Between A and B (d) At A

186
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

20. A double convex lens made of material of RI 1.5 and having a focal length 10 cm is immersed in a liquid of
RI 3.0 the lens will behave as
(a) Converging lens of focal length 10 cm
(b) Diverging lens of focal length 10 cm
(c) Converging lens focal length 10/3 cm
(d) Converging lens of focal length 30 cm
21. How will an image produce by a lens change. If half the lens is wrapped in black paper
(a) There will be no effect (b) The size of the image will reduce to one half

(c) The image will disappear (d) The brightness of the image will be reduced

22. The power of a lens is measured in

(a) Lumen (b) Watt (c) Horse power (d) Dioptre

23. The convex lens of glass is immersed in water. Compared to its power in air it’s power in water will
(a) Diminish for red light and increase for blue light
(b) Remain same
(c) Increase
(d) Diminish
24. A virtual image larger than object is produced by
(a) Concave lens (b) Convex mirror (c) Plane mirror (d) Convex lens

25. The graph drawn with object distance along abscissa and image distance as ordinate for a convex lens is
(a) A straight line (b) A circle
(c) A parabola (d) A rectangular hyperbola
26. A parallel beam of light in air is incident on a glass sphere of RI 1.5 and diameter 20 cm parallel to its
horizontal diameter. The rays converge to a point at a distance of from the centre of the sphere is
(A) 10 cm (b) 15 cm (c) 20 cm (d) 5 cm

27. The projection lens of a projector has a focal length of 5 cm. It is desired to get an image with a
magnification 30. The distance of the screen from the lens must be
(a) 1.55 m (b) 20 m (c) 0.3 m (d) 3 m

28. A convex lens placed at a distance of 0.1 m from an object produces a magnified image on the screen, with
out disturbing the object or the screen the lens is moved by 0.2 m towards the screen and a diminished
image is formed on the screen. The focal length of the lens must be
(a) 15 cm (b) 20 cm (c) 7.5 cm (d) 3 m

29. A convex lens and a concave lens of unknown powers given to you the lens of higher power is
(a) Determined by the nature of the image formed by the lens combination
(b) Determined by the colour of light used
(c) Always convex
(d) Always concave

187
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

30. Whenever composite light is not refracted by the surface of an optical medium light will
(a) Get deviated as well as dispersed (b) neither get deviated not get dispersed

(c) Get dispersed but not deviated (d) Get deviated but not dispersed

31. Shown in the figure is convergent lens placed inside a cell filled with liquid. The lens has
Liquid
a focal length 20 cm, when in air and material has RI 1.5 if the liquid has RI 1.6 the focal
length of the system is Lens
(a) 80 cm (b) – 80 cm

(c) –24 cm (d) –100 cm

32. The focal length of a plano convex lens is equal to its radius of curvature. The value of the RI of the material
is
(a) 1.33 (b) 1.6 (c) 1.5 (d) 2

33. A convex lens of RI n behaves as convex lens of smaller power in a liquid of RI n1 and as a concave lens in

another liquid of RI n2 then relation between n,n1 and n2 is

(a) n  n1  n2 (b) n2  n  n1 (c) n1  n  n2 (d) n  n1  n2

34. The relation between n1 and n2 if the behaviour of light ray is as shown in figure

(a) n1  n2 (b) n2  n1 2

(c) n1  n2 (d) n1  n2 n1

35. Two thin lenses of focal length 20 cm and 25 cm are placed in contact. The effective power of the
combination is (dioptre)
(a) 0.5 (b) 2 (c) 45 (d) 9

36. A luminous object is separated from a screen by a distance D . What is the greatest focal length a lens could
have to focus the object on the screen ?
(a) D 2 (b) D 4 (c) 4D (d) D

37. A plano convex lens has a thickness of 3 cm and radius of curvature of its curved surface is 5 cm. When seen
normally through the flat surface the thickness found to be 2 cm. The RI of the material is
(a) 0.45 (b) 1.5 (c) 2.3 (d) 3.5

38. A thin lens of RI 1.5 has a focal length of 15 cm in air. When the lens is placed in a medium of RI 4/3 its focal
length will be
(a) 15 cm (b) 30 cm (c) 45 cm (d) 60 cm

39. A projector lens has focal length of 10 cm. It throws an image of 2cm x 2 cm slide on a screen 5 metre from
the lens find the size of the picture on the screen
(a) 98 cm x 98 cm (b) 196 cm2 (c) 98 cm2 (d) 9.8 x 9.8 cm2

188
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

40. An object is placed 12 cm to the left of a converging lens of focal length 8 cm. Another converging lens 6 cm
focal length is placed at a distance of 30 cm to the right of the first lens. The second lens will produce
(a) A real enlarged image (b) A real inverted image

(c) No image (d) A virtual enlarged image

41. How will the image formed by a convex lens be affected. If the central position of the lens is wrapped in
black paper as shown in figure
(a) Full image will be formed but it is less bright
(b) No image will be formed
(c) Two images will be formed one due to each exposed half
(d) Full image will be formed but without the central position
42. The convex lens is made up of three different materials as shown in figure, for a point object
placed on a its axis, the number of images formed are
(a) 4 (b) 3

(c) 1 (d) 5

43. A beam of parallel rays brought to focus by a plano convex lens, A thin concave lens of same focal length is
joined to the first lens. The effect of this is
(a) The focus shift to infinity (b) The focus remains undisturbed

(c) The focal point shifts away from the lens by a small distance

(d) A focal point shifts towards the lens by a small distance

44. A thin Plano convex lens acts like a concave mirror of focal length 0.2 m when silvered from its plane
surface. The R.I of the material of the lens is 1.5. The radius of curvature of the convex surface of the lens
will be
(a) 0.1 m (b) 0.75 m (c) 0.4m (d) 0.2 m

45. Which of the following is a wrong state meant?

1
(a) D  where f is the focal length and D is called the Refracting power of a lens
f

(b) Power is called a dioptre when f is in metre

(c) Power is called a dioptre and does not depend on the system of unit used to measure f

(d) D is positive for convergent lens and negative for divergent lens

46.

F F F

189
(a) (b) (c) (d)
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

Identify the wrong description of the above figure

(a) represents far sightedness (b) Correction for short sightedness

(c) represents far sightedness (d) Correction for far sightedness

47. Figure shows the behaviour of light rays w.r.t. a Plano convex lens. The plane
24 cm
surface being silvered the radius of curvature of the curved surface of the lens
n  1.5 is
X
(a) 48 cm (b) 24 cm
O X

(c) 12 cm (d) 6 cm

48. Two thin convex lenses each of focal length 0.2m are placed coaxially with their optic centres 0.5 m apart.
Then the focal length of the combination is
(a) 0.4 m (b) –0.4 m (c) 0 (d) –0.1 m

49. A convex lens made of material of refractive index n1 is placed inside two liquids of refractive indices n2

and n3 as shown n2  n1  n3 parallel beam of light ht is incident on it. The lens will give rise to

(a) Single convergent beam

(b) Two different convergent beams n2 n2
n1
(c) Two different divergent beams n3 n3
(d) a convergent and a divergent beam

50. Two convex lenses separated by a distance are brought in contact. The focal length of the combination
(a) decreases (b) increases

(c) Decreases only when d is smaller than the focal length

(d) Increases only when d is smaller than the focal length

51. In a medium of R.I 1.6 and have a convex surface has a point object in
it at a distance of 12 cm from the pole. The radius of curvature is 6 cm. Rarer –
n2I
Locate the image as seen from air
O
(a) A real image at 30 cm (b) A virtual image a t 30 cm
Rarer – n1

(c) a real image at 4.28 cm (d) a virtual image at 4.28 cm

52. A square hole of area 16 cm2 is placed at a distance of 24 cm from a lens of focal length 18 cm. The area of
the image is
(a) 48 cm2 (b) 144 cm2 (c) 10 cm2 (d) none of these

190
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

53. A convex lens made of glass n  3 2 has a focal length F . When immersed in water of R.I. 4/3, its focal

length becomes

(a) 2F (b) 4F (c) F 4 (d) 3F

54. A converging meniscus of radii of curvature 12 cm and 36 cm has R.I. 3/2. Find its focal length
(a) 18 cm (b) 36 cm
R2 R1 R2 > R1
(c) 6 cm (d) none of these

55. An equi convex lens of focal length 5 cm is cut as shown in the figure, the focal length of part 1 is
(a) 5 cm (b) 10 cm
1
2
(c) 2.5 cm (d) 20 cm 3

56. There is an equi convex lens of focal length 20 cm. If the lens is cut in to two equal parts perpendicular to
the principal axis. The focal length of each part will be
(a) 20 cm (b) 40 cm (c) 10 cm (d) 15 cm

57. A beam of parallel rays is brought to a focus by a convex lens. If a thin concave lens of equal focal length is
joined to the convex lens the focus will be
(a) shifted to infinity (b) shifted to a small distance

(c) remained undisturbed (d) shifted to the back side

58. A convex lens forms a virtual image of an object placed at 15 cm from the lens. The focal length of lens can
be
(a) 2 cm (b) 8 cm (c) 15 cm (d) 18 cm

59. The nature of the u-v graph for a converging lens is part of a
(a) Circle (b) Parabola (c) Hyper bola (d) Straight line

60. Light rays A and B fall on an optical component and comes out as
C and D. The optical component is C
A
(a) Prism (b) concave lens
B
D
(c) Convex lens (d) Convex mirror

61. Two chain convex lenses each of focal length 0.5 m are kept co-axially separated by a distance 0.5 m. The
focal length of the combination is
(a) 0.5 m (b) 1 m (c) 0.25 m (d) 1.5 m

191
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

62. A plano convex lens is made of glass of R.I n and R is radius of curvature of curved surface. Its curved
surface is silvered. It behaves as
(a) Convex mirror of focal length R 2n

(b) Concave mirror of focal length R 2n

(c) Convex mirror of focal length R 2n  1

(d) Concave mirror of focal length R 2n  1

63. In compound microscope, length of microscope is 21.5 cm focal length of objective is 1.6 cm the focal length
of eye piece is 2.1 cm and if final image is formed at infinity then distance of the object from objective lens is
(a) 3 cm (b) 1.74 cm (c) 6 cm (d) 4.8 cm

64. An object is placed at a distance of 75 cm from a screen where should a convex lens of length 12 cm be
placed so as to obtain a real image of the object?
(a) 6 cm (b) 60 cm (c) 600 cm (d) 75 cm

65. The rays of light are incident on a concave lens of R.I n from a medium
n -1
of R.I n1 after refraction. If converges in a medium of R.I n2 the n -2 relation

between n1,n2 and n is

(a) n1  n  n2 (b) n1  n  n2
n-
(c) n1  n  n2 (d) n1  n  n2

66. A Plano convex lens of R.I 1.5 and radius of curvature 30 cm is silvered at the curved surface. Now this lens
h as been used to form the image of an object. At what distance from this lens an object be placed in order to
have a real image of the size of the object ?
(a) 20 cm (b) 30 cm (c) 60 cm (d) 80 cm

67. The distance between the two sources of light is 24 cm. Where should a convergent lens of focal length 9 cm
be placed between them to obtain images of both and sources at the same point
(a) u=6, 18 cm (b) u=4, 12 cm (c) u=3, 6 cm (d) u=2 , 4 cm

68. Find the power of a thin glass lens n  1.5 in a liquid with R.I n  1.7 . If its power in air is 5D
(a) 4 D (b) 1.2D (c) 4 D (d) 2 D

69. Find the power of a biconvex lens n  1.5 with air on the left side and water n  1.33 on the right side.

The power of lens in air is 10 D

(a) 3.2 D (b) 4.4 D (c) 6.23 D (d) 2.4 D

70. The medium on both sides of the lens is air. The distance of object O . Image 1 from first and second foci F1
and F2 are shown in figure. The focal length of the lens is
F1 F2
(a) 20 cm (b) 16 cm • • • •
O
16 cm 25 cm
(c) 25 cm (d) 40 cm

192
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

Aberration
1. The rays of light traveling from distant object are incapable of converging at a common point after refraction
through a thick lens this is due to
(a) Spherical aberration (b) Chromatic aberration

(c) Astigmatism (d) All the above

2. The inability of rays of different colours of light starting from a distant source of white light to converge to a
common point after passing through a convex lens is referred to as
(a) Spherical aberration (b) Optical illusion

(c) Chromatic aberration (d) Astigmatism

3. An achromatic combination of lenses produces

(a) Images in black and white (b) Coloured image

(c) Highly enlarged images

(d) Images unaffected by variation of refractive index with wavelength

4. To eliminate chromatic aberration lens combination should have

(a) f r  fv  0 (b) f R  fv  0 (c) f R  fV (d) f R  fv

5. Chromatic aberration in a lens is due to

(a) Interference (b) Dispersion (c) Diffraction (d) Refraction

6. The inability of a lens due to which all the rays passing through the lens are not focused at a single point is
called
(a) Chromatic aberration (b) spherical aberration

(c) Astigmatism (d) Coma

7. A stop is used in a lens to eliminate

(a) Spherical aberration (b) Chromatic aberration

(c) Either (a) or (b) (d) Neither (a) nor (b)

193
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

Answers

54. c 55. c 56. a 57. a 58. c 59. b 60. d 61. a 62. b 63. b
64. a 65. b 66. a 67. b 68. c 69. b 70. d 71. b 72. d 73. b
1. d 2. d 3. d 4. d 5. d 6. a 7. a 8. c 9. a 10. d
11. d 12. d 13. b 14. b 15. d 16. b 17. b 18. b 19. a 20. c
21. a 22. b 23. a 24. d 25. c 26. a 27. b 28. b 29. d 30. a
31. b 32. b 33. b 34. b 35. b 36. b 37. a 38. d 39. c 40. b
41. a 42. b 43. b 44. b 45. a 46. a 47. a 48. b 49. c 50. a

Aberration

1. a 2. c 3. d 4. b 5. b 6. c 7. a

194
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

WAVE OPTICS
INTERFERENCE OF LIGHT
THEORIES OF LIGHT
1. Corpuscular theory of Light: It was put forth by Sir Isaac Newton in 1675.
(a) According to this theory light consists of very small, light material particles called carpuscles.
(b) It successfully explained reflection, rectilinear propagation and dispersion (corpuscles of different
colours are of different size)
(c) But it failed to explain interference, diffraction and polarization.
(d) According to this theory light travels faster in denser medium.
2. Wave theory of light: It was proposed by Christian Huygen in 1679.
(a) According to this theory a source of light sends out disturbance in all directions in a hypothetical
medium called ether.
(b) Light waves according to this theory are mechanical in nature and longitudinal in character.
(c) It could explain the reflection, refraction, interference and diffraction, but not polarisation.
(d) Wave front : The locus of all the particles vibrating in the same phase is called wave front.
(i) Point source – spherical wave front
(ii) Linear source – cylindrical wave front
(iii) When the sources is at infinity – plane wave front
3. Electromagnetic wave theory of light: It was proposed by James clerk Maxwell in 1870.
(a) This theory showed that light waves are transverse in nature.
(b) This theory accounted for all known properties of light, except those involving the interaction of
radiation with matter.

1
(c) In 1887 Heinrich Rudolf Hertz generated Electro magnetic waves. f 
2π LC
1
(d) Velocity of an electromagnetic wave in a medium C 


 Absolute permeability of the medium,  - absolute permittity of the medium

1
(e) Velocity of electromagnetic wave in vacuum C 
 0 0

0  4  107 Hm1 ,  0  8.85  1012 Fm1

(f) Electro magnetic waves are produced by (Oscillating) accelerating electric charges.
(g) Electro magnetic waves consists of the time varying electric field and magnetic field which are mutually
perpendicular to each other and also perpendicular to the direction of propagation of wave.

4. Quantum theory of radiation: It was put forth by Max plank in 1900.

(a) According to quantum theory a body absorbs or emits energy in discrete packets of energy called
quanta or photons.

(b) Energy of each photon E  h where   frequency of radiation and h is the Planck’s constant.

195
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

5. Modern theory of light: Light exhibit dual nature. During propagation light behaves like a wave and during
interaction with matter it behaves like particles – quanta (photons)
(a) de Broglies hypothesis on matter waves confirmed the dual nature of light

h
(b) wavelength of de Broglie wave 
mv
(c) Wavicle  Wave particle object.
INTERFERENCE
1. (i) The modification in the distribution of light energy due to superposition of two or more waves called
interference of light.
(ii) Thomas young demonstrated the interference of light.

2. If a1 ,a2 are the amplitudes of interfering waves and  is the phase difference between them, then
2 2
(i) Resultant amplitude R  a1  a1  2 a1a2 cos
x

(ii) Resultant intensity 

I  KR2  K a12  a22  a1a2 cos  S1 I

 Xn
(iii)Resultant phase angle   tan  1 
a2 sin  d
 S
 1  a2 cos 
a B
n
(iv) Resultant maximum amplitude  a1  a2
S2
D
(v) Maximum intensity I max a1  a2 2 y

(vi) Minimum amplitude  a1  a2

(vii) Minimum intensity Imin α a1  a2 2

(viii)
2
I max amax a  a 2
 2  1 2 2 
 I1  I 2 2 contrast ratio.
I min amin a1  a2   I1  I2 
2

(ix) Intensity is directly proportional to the width of the slit IW , a 2W ,
where I = Intensity of the wave, a – amplitude of the wave, w – width of the slit

3. Conditions for constructive interference:

(i) The phase difference between the two waves d  2n

(ii) The path difference between the two waves dx  n  d sin 

where n = 0, 1, 2, 3….. and   wavelength of light

4. Conditions for destructive interference:

(i) The phase difference d  2n  1

(ii) The path difference dx  2n  1 / 2 where n 0, 1, 2……….

5. (a) Coherent sources: The two source of light send the waves of same wavelength, same amplitude and of
constant phase difference.
Ex: Fresnell’s Biprism, Billet Split lens, laser etc..
6. There are two ways of Producing coherent sources.

196
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

(i) Division of amplitude (Fresnels Biprism)

(ii) Division of wave front (air wedge)
7. Examples of formation of interference fringes:
(i) Colours of soap bubbles (ii) Colours of thin films of oil on water surface

8. Expression for fringe width   D d

Where D – distance of the screen from the double slits.

d – distance between double slits.  -Wavelength of monochromatic light

9. Conditions for sustained interference pattern:
(a) Two sources of light must be coherent.
(b) The separation between the two slits must be small   1 d 

(c) The distance of the screen from the slits must be large   D

(d) The two slits must be narrow.

(e) The two interfering waves must have the same amplitude.
(f) In the case of interference by polarized waves, the planes of vibration of polarized waves (parallel) must
be same.
10. Young’s double slit experiment :
(a) The bright fringes are equally bright
(b) Dark fringes are equally dark
(c) Width of dark fringe = width of bright fringe
(d) If white light is used instead of monochromatic light central fringe is still white but . It is surrounded by
different colors.
(e) If one of the slit is closed fringe pattern disappears.
(f) If the width of the slits is increased then also fringe pattern disappears.
Since the waves meeting at a point on the screen may not have constant phase difference.

(g) Position of nth bright fringe XB  n D d (n = 0,1, 2)

2n  1D
(h) Position of n  1th dark fringe XD 
2d
(i) Angular position of nth maximum B  Xn D  n D

Xn  1
(j) Angular position of n  1th minimum D  2n  1 | 2 d 
D
(k) In young’s double slit experiment if a thin glass plate is placed in the path of one of the interfering
waves then fringe patter is shifted.

D
The Fringe pattern shifted through a distance S   n  1 t where n is the R.I. of medium (glass) and
d
t is the thickness of the medium.

(l) If the interfering waves are polarized. Then both the waves should have the same plane of vibration.

197
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

11. Path difference dx   | 2  (phase difference) => dx   2 d

12. Interference in thin film : (a) Reflected system : -

(i) Condition for constructive interference
i Reflected light
or maximum intensity
Incident light
2nt cosr  2m  1 2
r Thin film
where m  0 ,1,2 , ……… n
t
(ii) Condition for destructive interference
or minimum intensity.

2nt cos r  m  1 Transmitted system

(b) Transmitted System : (i) For constructive interference, 2nt cos r  m

(ii) For destructive interference, 2nt cos r  2m  1 / 2 where m  0,1,2,.....

(c) When the film is illuminated by white light only certain colours can be seen in reflected system for
which condition for constructive interference is satisfied. But these colours will be absent in the
transmitted system. [Reflected and transmitted system are complements to each other]
(d) When a ray of light reflected at surface backed by adenser medium suffers an abrupt phase of  .
(OR a path difference of  2 )

L
13. Air wedge : Expression for fringe width  
2d
Where  is wave length of light, L is length of the wedge, d is diameter of the specimen.

14. Newton’s rings: (a) Reflected system (i) Center of Newton’s rings is dark.

2m  1R
(ii) Radius of mth Bright ring rm 
2

(iii) Radius of mth Dark ring rm  m R where m  0 ,1,2 ……… where R is radius of curvature of the

convex surface of the lens,  is wave length of the light used.

(b) Transmitted System : (i) Centre of the Newton’s rings is bright
(ii) Radius of mth Bright ring rm  mR

2m  1 R
(iii) Radius of mth dark ring rm 
2
(c) In the reflected System if the Newton’s rings produced by liquid film of refractive index n ,,

2m  1 R
(i) Radius of mth Bright ring rm 
2n2

m R
(ii) Radius of mth Dark ring rm 
n2

198
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

SPEED OF LIGHT
1. The first attempt to find the speed of light was made by Galielo.
2. The first successful attempt to find the speed of light was made by Danish Astronomer Romer [Foucault
determined the speed of light more accurately]
3. The rotating mirror experiment performed by Michelson is considered as one of the accurate methods of
determination of speed of light.
4. In Michelson rotating mirror experiment (i) Speed of light is calculated using the relation C = 8 fd.
Where f is number of rotation made by the octagonal mirror per second,

d is the distance covered by the light in reaching the telescope from the source.

(ii) Velocity of light in vacuum determined by this method is C  2.9979 108  400 m s 
5. According to Einstein’s special theory of relativity.
m0
Mass of the particle moving with velocity V , m 

1  v2 /
C2


Multiple Choice Questions

1. Which one of the following statement is correct?
(a) in vacuum the speed of light depends upon wavelength
(b) in vacuum the speed of light depends upon frequency
(c) in vacuum the speed of light does not depend upon frequency but depends on the wavelength
(d) in vacuum the speed of light is independent of frequency and wavelength
2. The electromagnetic theory of light failed to explain
(a) polarization (b) diffraction (c) interference (d) photo electric
effect
3. The wavelength (or frequency) of light can be experimentally determined using
(a) ripple tank (b) diffraction gratin (c) plane mirror (d) glass prism
4. There are n1 photons of frequency  1 in a beam of light. In an equally energetic beam there are n2 photons of

frequency  2 then the correct relation is

n1  1 n1  2 n1
(a) n1   1
2
(b)  (c)  (d) 1
n 2  22 n2  2 n2  2 n2

5. The electromagnetic theory of light was developed by

(a) max planck (b) Maxwell (c) Newton (d) Huygen
6. Light has the following wave property
(a) transverse (b) sometimes longitudinal sometimes transverse
(c) neither transverse nor longitudinal (d) longitudinal
7. Velocity of light according to this theory is greater in a denser medium than in a rarer medium
(a) Quantum theory (b) electromagnetic theory (c) wave theory (d) corpuscular theory
8. A beam of monochromatic light is passing from one medium in to another, which one of the following
quantities does not change
(a) frequency (b) wavelength (c) velocity (d) intensity

199
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

9. Oscillating electric field associated with an electro magnetic wave is inclined to the direction of propagation
of the oscillating magnetic field at the following angles respectively.

(a) 90 o ,45 o (b) 45 o ,45 o (c) 90 o ,90 o (d) 5 o ,90 o

10. Which of the following not the property of light according to the corpuscular theory
(a) light travels in a straight line (b) the velocity of light does not change on reflection
(c) the velocity of light changes on refraction (d) the velocity of light is more in air than in water
11. The velocity of electromagnetic radiation in free space is

(a) zero ms 1 (b) 3  1010 ms 1 (c) 3  108 ms1 (d) 310ms1

12. Newton’s corpuscular theory could not satisfactorily explain

(a) reflection of light (b) rectilinear propagation of light
(c) formation of shadows (d) interference of light
13. Electromagnetic theory of light was experimentally verified by
(a) Maxwell (b) huygens (c) Young (d) Hertz
14. The unique and distinguishable characteristics of a monochromatic light wave irrespective of medium is
(a) wavelength (b) frequency (c) velocity (d) intensity
15. The phase difference between any two points on a wave front is equal to

(a)  2 (b) zero (c)  (d)

/4
16. In an electromagnetic wave the energy is associated with
(a) varying electric and magnetic field (b) vibrating other particles
(c) vibrating air molecules (d) none of these
17. Newton postulated his corpuscular theory on the basis of
(a) rectilinear propagation of light (b) dispersion of light (c) Newton’s rings (d) colours of thin
film
18. Light appears to travel in straight line because
(a) the wavelength of light is very small (b) the velocity of light is different for different colours
(c) the frequency of light is very small (d) light consists of very small particles
19. The wave theory of light in its original form was first postulated by
(a) Newton (b) Huygen (c) Thomas Young (d) A.J. Fresnel
20. Select the right Option in the following
(a) Christian Huygens, a contemporary of Newton established the wave theory of light by assuming
that light waves were transverse
(b) Maxwell provided the compelling theoretical evidence that light is transverse wave
(c) Thomas Young experimentally Proved the wave behaviour of light and Huygen’s assumption
(d) all the three statements given above correctly answers the question what is light
21. To demonstrate the phenomenon of interference we require
(a) two sources which emits radiations of same frequency
(b) two sources which emits radiations of nearly the same frequency
(c) two sources which emits radiations of same frequency and have the definite phase relationship
(d) two sources which emits radiation of different wavelength

200
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

22. Light from sodium lamp passes through a single narrow slit and then through two close parallel narrow
slits. If you look through the double slit towards the sodium lamp, you will see
(a) a continuous yellow band (b) a continuous blackband
(c) alternate black bands and yellow bands (d) the colours of the rain bow

23. Monochromatic green light of wavelength 5  107 m illuminates a pair of narrow slits 1.0 mm apart the
separation of bright lines on the interference pattern formed on the screen two meter away is
(a) 0.001 mm (b) 0.25 mm (c) 0.4 mm (d) 1.0 mm
24. Two sources of sound are said to be coherent if
(a) they produce sound of equal intensity (b) they produce sound of equal wavelength
(c) they produce sound waves of vibrating with same phase
(d) they produce sound waves with zero or constant phase difference at all instant of time

25. Fringe width observed in young’s double slit experiment is  . If the frequency of the source is doubled. The

fringe width will

(a) becomes 2  (b) become 3 / 2  (c) remain as  (d) become  / 2

26. Which of the following is correct?

(a) interference of light is evidence for transverse character of light
(b) Rainbow appears because of scattering of light
(c) Light and sound are both transverse waves
(d) Coherent source of light passing through two slits causes interference

27. Two waves of equal amplitude (a) have a phase difference of  at a point. Resultant amplitude at that point
will be

(a) a sin (b) a cos (c) 2 a sin 2  (d) 2a cos 2

28. The phenomenon of interference is exhibited by

(a) longitudinal waves only (b) neither longitudinal nor transverse waves
(c) both longitudinal and transverse waves (d) transverse waves only
29. The width of interference fringes in a double slit depends on
(a) wavelength of the light used (b) double slit separation
(c) distance between double slits and screen (d) all the above
30. Normal light is due to
(a) electric field oscillations (b) magnetic field oscillations
(c) oscillations of electric and magnetic field in the same direction
(d) oscillations of electric and magnetic field in the mutually perpendicular direction
31. If white light is used in young’s double slit experiment
(a) a very large number of coloured fringes with a central white fringe can be seen
(b) a very large number of coloured fringes can be seen
(c) very few coloured fringes can be seen with first order red fringes being closer to the central white
fringes
(d) very few coloured fringes can be seen, with first order violet fringes being closer to the central
fringe

201
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

32. A beam of light consisting of two wavelengths 6500 A o and 5200 A o is used to obtain interference fringes in

young’s double slit experiment. Suppose the mth bright fringe due to 6500 A o coincides with the n th bright

fringe due to 5200 A o at a minimum distance from the initial maximum then.
(a) m = 5, n = 4 (b) m = 4, n = 5 (c) m = 10, n = 8 (d) m = 8, n = 10
33. Monochromatic light from a narrow slit illuminates two narrow parallel slits producing an interference
pattern on a screen. The separation between the two slits is now doubled and the distance between the
screen and slits is reduced to half. The fringe width is
(a) doubled (b) four times (c) one fourth (d) the same
34. If white light is used in Newton’s rings experiment, the colour observed in the reflected light is
complimentary to that observed in the transmitted light through the same point, this is due to change of
phase in one of the reflected waves

(a) 90 o (b) 180 o (c) 45 o (d) 145 o

35. In a double slit interference experiment, d is the separation of slits and D is the distance of the screen from
the plane of the slits. When the white light is used, dark band of wavelength  | is formed, directly in front
of one of the slits then the value of  is
(a) d 2 D (b) D d (c) d D 2 (d)

d D

36. In young’s double slit experiment of interference the ratio of intensities of bright band and a dark band is 16
: 1 the ratio of the amplitude of the interfering waves is
(a) 4 (b) 1/ 4 (c) 16 (d) 5/3
37. When a thin metal plate is placed in the path of one of the interfering beams of light
(a) the fringes become brighter (b) the fringes disappear
(c) fringe width increases (d) the fringes becomes blurred
38. In young’s double slit experiment the central bright fringe can be identified
(a) as it is wider than other bright fringes (b) as it is narrower than other bright fringes
(c) as it has a greater intensity than other bright fringes
(d) by using white light instead of monoahromatic light
39. Two coherent light beams of intensity I and 4I are superposed. The maximum and minimum possible
intensity in the resulting beam are
(a) 9 I and 3 I (b) 5 I and I (c) 9 I and I (d) 5 I and 3 I
40. In young’s double slit experiment using light of wavelength 630 nm, 60 fringes are obtained. If light of
wavelength 540 nm is used number of fringes obtained will be
(a) 60 (b) 70 (c) 50 (d) 65

41. In young’s interference experiment light of wavelength 5400 A o and 6000 A o are used in turn the ratio of
fringe width is
(a) 10 : 9 (b) 9 : 10 (c) 3 : 10 (d) 10 : 3
42. In two separate settings of young’s double slit experiment, fringes of equal width are obtained when light
waves of wavelengths in the ratio 2 : 3 are used. If the ratio of slit separation in two cases is 2 : 1. The ratio of
distance between the plane of the slits and screen is
(a) 3 : 1 (b) 1 : 3 (c) 3 : 4 (d) 4 : 3

202
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

43. In young’s double slit experiment fringes of width 1.35 mm are obtained, if the entire setup is immersed in
water of RI 1.35. The new fringe width will be
(a) 1.35 mm (b) 1.0 mm (c) 2.70 mm (d) 10 mm
44. In young’s experiment the angular width of   central bright fringe is given by

(a) sin 1  / 2d  (b) sin 1  / d  (c) sin 1 2 / d  (d) 2 sin 1  2d 

45. When one of the slits of young’s experiment is covered with a transparent sheet of thickness 4.8 mm, the
central fringe shifts to a position originally occupied by the 30 th bright fringe. What should be the thickness
of the sheet if the central fringe has to shift to the position occupied by 20th bright fringe?
(a) 7.6 mm (b) 3.2 mm (c) 3.8 mm (d) 1.6 mm
46. When a stainless steel vessel is heated its surface exhibits colours this is due to
(a) reflection (b) refraction
(c) dispersion (d) interference in thin air film on its surface.
47. In an interference experiment third bright fringe is obtained at a point on the screen with a light of
wavelength 700 nm. What should be the wavelength of the light source in order to obtain 5 th bright fringe at
the same point.
(a) 420 nm (b) 750 nm (c) 630 nm (d) 500 nm

48. In double slit experiment  and  1 indicate distance between any two consecutive bright and dark fringes

respectively then

(a)    1 (b)    1 (c)    1 (d)  1   2

49. In a young’s double slit experiment two coherent sources are 0.6 mm apart and fringes are obtained on a
screen placed one meter away. If it produces a second dark fringe at a distance of 1 mm from central fringe
wavelength of light used is
(a) 400 nm (b) 600 nm (c) 500 nm (d) 450 nm
 
50. In young’s double slit experiment red light of wavelength 7800 A and blue light of wavelength 5200 A are

used. The value of n for which n  1th blue bright band coincides with nth red band is

(a) 4 (b) 3 (c) 2 (d) 1

51. In an interference pattern produced by two coherent sources the intensity at the central maximum is 1. The
intensity at the same position when either of the slits is closed is I0 then,

(a) I  4I0 (b) I  2I0 (c) I  I0 (d) I and I0 are related

52. In young’s double slit experiment if the third dark fringe is formed, opposite to one of the slits the
wavelength of the light is
(a) 9 D d 2 (b) d 2 4D (c) 5D d 2 (d) d 2 5D

53. As result of interference of two coherent sources the light energy is

(a) redistributed and the distribution changes with time (b) decreased
(c) increased (d) redistributed and the distribution does not vary with time

54. In young’s double slit experiment the fringe width is  . If the entire arrangement is placed in a liquid of

refractive index n, the fringe width becomes

(a)  / n  1 (b)  / n (c) n (d)  / n  1

55. Which physcist first of all worked out the speed of light with accuracy?

203
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

(a) Foucault (b) Romer (c) Galileo (d) Michelson

56. The shape of rotating mirror considered by Michelson
(a) Eight sided (b) Six sided (c) Three sided (d) four sided
57. In a Michelson’s Experiment the octagonal mirror was making 250 revolutions per second. The distance
between plane and octagonal mirror was 75 km. Then the velocity of light
(a) 2.5  108 m s (b) 3  108 m s (c) 3.2  108 m s (d) 2.9  108 m s

58. Indicate the colour of light which travels through glass with maximum speed.
(a) Yellow (b) red (c) green (d) violet

1. d 2. b 3. b 4. c 5. b 6. a 7. d 8. a 9. c 10. d
11. c 12. d 13. d 14. b 15. b 16. a 17. a 18. a 19. b 20. b
21. c 22. c 23. d 24. d 25. d 26. d 27. d 28. c 29. d 30. d
31. d 32. b 33. c 34. b 35. a 36. d 37. b 38. c 39. c 40. b
41. b 42. a 43. b 44. d 45. b 46. d 47. a 48. c 49. a 50. c
51. a 52. d 53. d 54. b 55. a 56. a 57. b 58. b

204
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

ATOMIC MODELS
Atom Models
1. The first atomic model proposed by J.J Thomson
2. J.J. Thomson discovered the electron
3. Ruther ford discovered the proton
4. Chadwick discovered the neutron
5. The nuclear atom model was proposed by Rutherfod
6. Bohr’s theory of hydrogen atom
(a) The first successful atom model was proposed by Bohr

nh
(b) mvr  is the quantum condition for the stationary orbits. (where is the orbit number)
2
n

(c) E2  E1  h gives the energy of the photon emitted, in an electron transition from orbit n2 to

n1 n2  n1 

7. Expression for the radius of the n th orbit of hydrogen atom

n 2 h 2 0
(a) r  for n  1, r  0.53  10 10 m
me 2

(b) r  n 2  0.53  10 10 m r  n 2  

8. Expression for the velocity of the electron in orbits of H-atom

e2
(a) V  for n  1,V  2.19  10 6 ms -1
2 0 nh

c  1
(b) V  n  2.19  10 6 / n ms -1 V  
137   n

(c) V  1 r (since r  n2

9. Expression for the energy of the electron in the H-atom

e4m
E
8 02 n 2 h 2

13 .6
(for n  1, E  13 .6eV & for any other orbit, E eV )
n2

(b) Energy of the electron in the orbit increases with increases of orbit number n

e2  e4m
(c) KE =  and Eo  KE
8 0 r 8 o2 n 2 h 2

PE  2KE 
 e2  2e 4 m
(d) PE  
4 0 r 8 02 n 2 h 2

205
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

1  1 1 
10. Expression for wave number    R 2  2 
  n1 n2 

11. Where Rydberg constant R  1.097  107 (per metre)

(a) For Lyman series n1  1, n2  2,3,4,5...... (U-V region)

(b) For Balmer series n1  2, n 2  3,4,5,6....... (visible region)

(c) For Paschen series n1  3, n2  4,5,6....... (IR region)

(d) For Brackett series n1  4, n2  5,6,7,8,....... (IR region)

(e) For P-fund series n1  5, n 2  6,7,8....... (FIR region)

(f) The total number of possible transitions from the n th excited state of a normal hydrozen atom

nn  1
is N 
2

n1  2
12 In any series : Series limit [Minimum wavelength min   
 R 

n12 n1  12

(a) First member (Max. wavelength) min 
2n1  1R
(b) Excitation energy Ex. = E2  E1

(c) Ionisation energy E i  E   E1

13 General important relations (for H-like atoms)

n 2 h 2 0
(i) r 
mze 2

ze2
(ii) V 
2 0 nh

mz 2e 4
(iii) E  
8 02 n 2 h 2

1
(iv) T  n 2 and f 2
n

 
(v)   1  Rz 2  1  1  where R  1.097  107 m1
  2
n2 
2
 n1

14 Demerit’s Bohr’s Theory

(a) This model could not explain the spectra of complex atoms having more than one electron
(b) This model could not explain the fine structure of spectral lines
(c) This model could not explain the phenomenon of splitting of spectral lines in presence of
magnetic field (Zeeman effect) and in presence of electrical field (Stark effect)
(d) This theory does not given any information regarding the arrangement and distribution of
electrons in an atom

206
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

15 Sommerfeld’s relativistic atoms model

To explain the fine structure of spectral lines sommerfeld modified two postulates of Bohr’s theory (a)
Elliptical orbit for the electrons moving round the nucleus of an atom. (b) Relativistic Variation of mass of
the electron moving in an elliptical orbit

(i) Inorder to quantize the elliptical orbit, sommerfeld introduced the two quantum numbers nr and n

such that  Anr  n  n


Where n1 radial quantum number n is azimathal quantum number b is semi major axis. n  1,2....... a 
is semi minor axis

16 Vector atom model

To explain the complex spectra of atoms. This model was proposed. The two important features of the
vector atom model are

(a) Concept of spatial quantization : “Along with magnitude the direction (or orientation) of the electron

orbits in space is quantized”.  Pi 

lh  where l  0,1,2,.....n  1 called orbital angular quantum
 2 
 
number]
(b) Spinning electron hypothesis : “An electron spins about its own axis passing through its centre of mass
in addition to its orbital motion round the nucleus.

 sh 
 Ps  2  where s  1 2 spin quantum number]
 

ml  ( 2l  1) 
 
m s   1 
 2 
m  m  m 
 j l s

Dual nature
(1) Concept of matter waves : Waves associated with material particles in motion are called matter waves.

h
(2) (a) Wavelength of the wave associated with a particle in motion   where m is mass of the particle.
mv
V is velocity of the particle.

(b) De Broglie wavelength of a particle having Kinetic energy is  

h
E
2mE

(c) De Broglie wavelength of an electron accelerated through a P.D of V volt  

h 12 .27
 A
2meV V

(d) De Broglie wavelength depends on mass and speed of the moving particle

(e) De Broglie wavelength is independent of charge and nature of the particle

207
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

(f) The De Broglie effects are unobhservable in case of macroscopic objects since their wavelength is too


small   10 30 m 
(3) G.P. Thomson experiment
(a) This provides the experimental proof for the wave nature of matter

(b) Principle (i) The high energy electrons behaves like a wave  
n
2meV
(ii) A thin metallic film (gold foil) consists of a large number of micro crystals acts like a crystal
grating

Rd
(c) Wavelength of the wave associated with electron  . Where R is radius of the nth ring, d
nL
is distance between the atomic planes in the gold foil, L id distance of screen from the gold foil.
(4) Electron microscopy
(a) The three important quantities considered in the design of a microscope are

(i) Type of waves used

(ii) Converging arrangement of waves

(iii) magnification & resolution

(b) The magnification of about 500 – 1000x with a resolution of about 0.2mm can be achieved by using an
optical/ U.V microcope.

(5) Electron Microscope

(a) It is based on the principle that high speed electrons are associated with waves of very short


wavelength   10 12 m 
(b) Magnetic lenses are used to control the paths of the electrons
(c) There are two types of electron microscopes
(i) Transmission Electron Microscope (TEM) [Ernst Rsska 1931]

(ii) Scanning electron Microscope (SEM) [Max Knoll 1935)

(d) Magnification as high as 105  106 x and resolution of about 0.5  nm can be achieved by using
electron microscope
(6) Atomic Force Microscope (AFM) (Binning Quate and Gerber]
(a) It is capable of producing magnification of the order of 10 6 x and resolution of about 10 nm
(b) The main advantage of AFM over SEM is it provides true three dimensional pictures of the
sample surface with a nano meter resolution.

208
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

Scattering of Light

1 The scattering of light : It is an optical phenomenon in which light spreads in the directions other than the
incident direction by the small particles of the medium
(a) Tyndall effect : The scattering of light in a turbid medium containing foreign particles whose
dimensions are very small compare to the wavelength of light is called tyndall effect
(b) Rayleigh’s law of scattering : The intensity of light scattered by the unit volume of the medium
is


(i) directly proportional to the square of the volume of the particle I  v 2 
 1
(ii) Inversely proportional to the 4th power of the wavelength of light  I  2 
  

N V2

I 0  I 0a  02 4  1 cos2   where a is a factor which measure in inhomogenity of the medium,
 R  

R is distance of t he observer from the scatterer, N 0 is number of particle per unit volume of

the medium.

2 There are two types of scattering

(a) Coherent scattering (b) Incoherent scattering

(a) Coherent Scattering : (i) In this type the wavelength (or frequency) of the scattered photon is same as
that of the incident photon on the scattering particle.

(ii) It occurs when size of the scattering particle is comparable or smaller than the wavelength of the
light

(iii) It is due to elastic collision between photon and scatterer.

 1 
(iv) Intensity of the scattered photon may change with wavelength  I 2 
  

(v) Example : (A) Rayleigh scattering (B) scattering of light by air molecules

(b) In choherent Scattering : (i) In this type the wavelength of the scattered photo is different from that
of incident photon on the scattering particle.

(ii) It occurs when size of the scattering particle is greater than the wavelength of t he incident light

(iii) It is due to inelastic collision.

(iv) Example : (A) Raman Scattering (B) Scattering of light in organic liquids like Benzene, toluene (C)
Compton effect (Scattering of X-rays by matter)

3 (a) Due to scattering of sun light by air molecules

(i) Sky appears blue

209
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

(ii) At sun rise or Sun set the Sun and the neighbouring portion both appears Organge red

(b) Sky will appear black in the absence of atmosphere

(c) Due to molecular scattering of sun light by water molecules the sea appears blue

(d) Red light is least scattered by the particles, therefore it is used in danger signals.

4 Raman Effect : (a) In addition to the incident wavelength the light scattered by certainorganic liquids
consists of higher and lower wavelength.
(b) The spectrum of scattered light is called Raman Spectrum

(c) The lines in the Raman spectrum of frequencies longer (shorter wavelength) that of incident are called
antistokes lines.

(d) The lines in the Raman Spectrum of frequencies shorter (longer wave length) that of incident are called
Stokes lines

5 Characteristics of Raman spectral lines

(a) Raman lines are symmetrically placed on either side of the main line
(b) Stokes lines are always more intense that the antistokes lines
(c) Intensity of antistokes lines increases with increases in temperature. [While that of stokes lines
remains same]
(d) All the Raman lines are strongly polarized
(e) The frequency difference between different lines of the Roman spectrum depends only on the
nature of the scattering molecules {Ramen shift]

Laser

1 Laser is an opto-electronic device. It is used to produce highly monochromatic coherent and well collimated
beam of light.
2 The word LASER stands for Light Ampification by Stimulated Emission of Radiation.
3 The first working laser (Ruby laser) was built by Maiman in 1960. [Theory was proposed by Arthgur and
Basor in 1958]
4 The following three conditions must be satisfied in order to achieve lasser action in a system .
(a) Population inversion (b) Existence of metastable state (c) confinement of emitted photons.

(a) Population inversion : “The process by which the number of atoms in the higher energy state is made
more than the number of atoms in the lower energy state is called population inversion.

(i) The number of atoms in the excited state is always very much less than the number of atoms in the

  E x  E0  
ground state  N s  N a e 
 KT 

(b) Meta stable state : It is the excited state of an atom having life time of about 10 5 s [The normal excited

state has a life time of 10 8 s ]

210
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

(c) The confinement of emitted photons is done using reflecting mirrors at the ends of the system.

5 Optical Pumping : The process of transferring the atoms from the ground state to the metal stable state of
the system is called optical pumping.
6 Properties of Laser
(a) The laser light is highly monochromatic
(b) The laser light is highly coherent
(c) The laser light is highly directional
(d) The intensity of laser beam is extremely high
7 Photonics : It is the techonology that deals with generation, manipulation, transmission and detection of
photons.
(i) Photonics used photons

(ii) Photonics devices can do most of the things that electronic devices can do

Multiple choice questions:

1 When the velocity of an electron increases the de Broglie wavelength of the electron
(a) Increases (b) decreases

(c) remains the same (d) Increases in some cases and decreases in some cases

2 An electron is placed in a uniform electric field as the electron moves its deBroglie wavelength
(a) Increases (b) Decreases (c) Remains the same

(d) First increases and the decreases

3 The de Broglie wavelength of an electron moving with a momentum P given by

(a) hc P (b) hp c (c) h p (d) p h

4 Excitation energy of a hydrogen like ion in its first excitation state is 40.8 eV energy needed to remove the
electron from the ion in ground state is
(a) 40.8 eV (b) 27.2 eV (c) 54.4 eV (d) 13.6 eV

5 Suppose we convert the mass of a proton and a neutron completely into energies E p and E0 respectively,

 
then E p  E0 is

(a) positive (b) zero (c) negative

(d) positive or negative depending on from which nucleus the proton and the neutron come form

6 The binding energy of the hydrogen atom is

(a) 1.0 eV (b) infinite (c) zero (d) 13.6 eV

7 In the Bohr atom model, the electron does not fall into the positive charged nucleus because
(a) Quantum rules do not allow it

211
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

(b) The electrostatics attraction is balanced by mechanical force

(c) Small wires from the nucleus hold the electron in place
(d) Electron is not a particle
8 Let the 1st Bohr radius of hydrogen atom be r1 . Let the 1st Bohr radius of a helium atom be r2 then r1 r2  ?

(a) 1 (b) 2 (c) ½ (d) 4

9 Hydrogen atoms are excited to the stationary state designated by the principal quantum number n=3. The
spectral lines emitted by the hydrogen atom as explained from Bohr’s theory will be
(a) 1 (b) 3 (c) 4 (d) 5

10 The ionization energy of an atom compared to the binding of the nucleus is

(a) more (b) less

(c) equal (d) sometimes more sometimes less

11 Which of the following is true?

(a) A hydrogen atom is smaller than a helium atom
(b) A hydrogen atom is bigger than a helium atom
(c) Both hydrogen atom and helium atoms are having the same size
(d) The size of a hydrogen atom can be more or less than size of the helium atom
12 The energy level diagram for the various Bohr orbits of hydrogen atom are given below which figure gives
the correct description ?

13 Which state of triply ionized Baryllium (B++++) has the same orbital radius as that of the ground state of
hydrogen

(a) n3 (b) n2 (c) n 1 (d) n4

14 Electrons in an atom are

(a) in an accelerated motion (b) stationary

(c) moving with constant velocity (d) moving with continuously changing acceleration

15 Hydrogen atom emits blue light when it changes from n=4 energy level to the n=2 level and which colour of
light would the atom emit when it changes from the n=5 to n=2 level?
(a) Red (b) yellow (c) Green (d) Violet

16 In a Bohr’s model of hydrogen atom let PE represents potential energy and TE represents total energy. In
going to higher level
(a) PE decreases, TE increases (b) PE increases, TE increases

(c) PE increase, TE decreases (d) PE decreases, TE decreases

212
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

 
17 Hydrogen (H) deuterium (D) singly ionized He  and doubly ionized. Lithium Li   all have one electron

round the nucleus. Consider n=2 to n=1 transition the wavelengths of emitted radiations are 12 3 and

4 respectively then approximately

(a) 1  2  41  94 (b) 41  22  22  4

(c) 1  22  2 23  24 (d) 1  2  3  34

18 The radiation emitted during a transition from the i th energy level to the f th energy level will have

frequency of

(a)
E f  Ei  (b)
Er
(c)

2 E f  Ei  (d)
E f  Ei 
h h h h

19 The size of the atom is of the order of

(a) 1 angstrom (b) 1 fermi (c) 1 nm (d) 1 micron

20 Spin quantum number of an electron can have

(a) only integral values (b) only one constant value

(c) integral and half integral values (d) only half integral values

21 The electrons in the innermost orbit of an atom has the velocity

(a) mean (b)zero (c) highest (d) lowest


22 Given the wavelength of first member of Lyman series is 1215 A . Find the wavelength of the H B line

   
(a) 3645 A (b) 6075 A (c) 4860 A (d) 2430 A

23 As the electron in the Bohr orbit of hydrogen atom passes from state n  2 to n  1 , the kinetic energy K and
potential energy U charge as
(a) K two fold U also two fold (b) K four fold, U also four fold

(c) K four – fold, U two fold (d) K two fold, U four fold

24 In terms of Rydberg constant R, the shortest wavelength in Balmer series of hydrogen atom spectrum will
have the wavelength
(a) 1/R (b) 4/R (c) 3/2R (d) 9/4R

25 Frequency of the series limit of Balmer series of hydrogen atom interms of Ryberg constant R and velocity of
light C is
(a) 4 RC (b) 4/RC (c) RC (d) RC/4

26 Ionisation energy of hydrogen atom is 13.6 eV then the energy required to ionize a hydrogen atom in which
the electron is in the second orbit from the nucleus is (in eV)

(a) 13.6 (b) 3.4 (c) 10.2 (d) 13.6

213
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

27 If E p and Ek are potential and Kinetic energy of the electron in a stationary orbit in the hydrogen atom the

value of E p Ek is

(a) 2 (b) 2 (c) -1 (d) 1

28 The electron and proton the same de Broglie wavelength then the K.E of the electron is
(a) Greater then KE of the proton (b) zero

(c) equal to KE proton (d) infinity

29 The energy that should be added to an electron to reduce its de Broglie wavelength from 1010 m to

0.5  10 10 m is
(a) equal to the initial energy (b) four times the initial energy

(c) thrice the initial energy (d) twice the initial energy

30 If R is the Rydberg constant for hydrogen, the wave number of the first line in the Lyman series is
(a) 2R (b) R/2 (c) 3R/4 (d) R/4

31 The electron in a hydrogen atoms makes a transition from n  n1 to n  n2 state the time period of the

electron in the initial state is eight times that in the final state. The possible value of n1 and n2 are

(a) n1  8, n2  2 (b) n1  4, n2  2 (c) n1  6, n2  2 (d) n1  8, n2  1

32 If radiations of all wavelengths from ultraviolet to infrared is passed through hydrogen gas at room
temperature, absorption lines will be observed in
(a) Lyman series (b) Balmer series

(c) Lyman series, Balmer series and Paschen series (d) None of these

33 Let the potential energy of hydrogen atom in the ground state be zero. Then its total energy in the first
excited state will be
(a) 13.6 eV (b) 10.2 eV (c) 27.2 eV (d) 23.8 eV

34 The ratio of the maximum to the minimum wave lengths in Balmer series of H spectrum is
(a) 9 : 5 (b) 36 : 5 (c) 27 : 15 (d) 144 : 7

35 If de Broglie wavelength is 0 for protons accelerated through 100 V that for  particles accelerated through

the same voltage will be

(a) 0 (b)  o 2 (c) o 2 (d) o 4

36 An  particle of energy 5 MeV is scattered through 180  by a fixed uranium nucleus the distance of
closest approach is of the order of

(a) 1010 m (b) 10 8 m (c) 1014 m (d) 10 11 m

214
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

37 Bohr’s atom model assumes

(a) The nucleus is of infinite mass and it is at rest
(b) Electrons in a quantized orbit will not radiate energy
(c) Mass of the electron remains constant
(d) All the above conditions
38 According to Bohr postulates which of the following quantities takes discrete values
(a) Kinetic energy (b) Potential energy (c) momentum

(d) angular momentum

39 With increasing quantum number the energy different between adjacent levels in atoms
(a) decreases (b) increases (c) Remains constant

(d) Decreases for low and increase for heavy atoms

40 The energy of the electrons in the first Bohr orbit of hydrogen atom is 13.6 eV the energy of the electron in
the 4th orbit is
(a) -3.4 eV (b) 1.5 eV (c) =0.85 eV (d) -13.6 eV

41 The ionization potential of hydrogen atom is 13.6 V. Hydrogen atoms in the ground state are excited by
monoatomic light of energy 12.1 eV. The spectral lines emitted by hydrogen atoms according to Bohr’s
theory will be
(a) One (b) Two (c) Three (d) Four

42 Basic idea of Bohr’s atom model is

(a) quantization of energy of electrons
(b) quantization of angular momentum of electrons
(c) quantization of both energies and angular momentum
(d) none of these
43 The unit of Rydberg constant is
(a) Permeter (b) ms (c) J ms-1 (d) metre

44 If mass of the electron is doubled, then Rydberg’s constant

(a) remains same (b) becomes twice

(c) become half (d) becomes one fourth

45 In a hydrogen atom the angular momentum of the electron in stationary orbit is found to be 3h  then

principal quantum number n is

(a) 3 (b) 2 (c) 6 (d) 12

46 The difference in angular momentum of the electron in hydrogen atom in two successive orbit is

n  1h
(a) h 2 (b) h  (c) h 2 (d)
2

47 Which series of hydrogen atoms was first discovered

215
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

(a) Lyman series (b) Balmer series (c) Brackett series (d) Paschen series

48 The ratio of frequencies of the shortest wavelengths of Balmer series and Lyman series of hydrogen atom is
(a) 5: 27 (b) 27 : 5 (c) 1 : 4 (d) 4 : 1

49 In a hypothetical Bohr hydrogen atom the mass of the electron is double the energy E0 and radius r of the

first orbit will be ( a0 is the Bohr radius)

a0
(a) E0  27.2 eV, r  (b) E0  27.2 eV , r0  a0
2

a0
(c) E0  13.6 eV, r  (d) E0  13.6 eV, r0  a0
2

50 Concept of matter waves was verified by

(a) de Broglie (b) Milikan

(c) Einstein (d) Davision and Germer

51 An electron , a proton and an alpha particle move with same velocity which one has the longest wavelength?
(a) Electron (b) Proton

(c)  particle (d) all have same wavelength

52 Energy of a particle decreases 9 times, the de Broglie wavelength is

(a) Increases 9 times (b) decreases 9 times

(c) increases 3 times (d) decreases 1/3 times

53 Suppose electrons and protons have same de Broglie wavelength then they will have same.
(a) Energy (b) Momentum (c) angular momentum (d) velocity

54 The minimum energy required to excite a hydrogen atom from its ground state is
(a) 10.2 eV (b) 1.9 eV (c) 0.65 eV (d) 13.6 eV

55 The deBroglie wavelength of an electron in the first Bohr orbit is

(a) equal to twice the circumference of the first orbit
(b) equal to the circumference of the first orbit
(c) equal to one fourth the circumference of the first orbit
(d) equal to half the circumference of the first orbit

56 When ever a hydrogen atom emits a photon in the Balmer series

(a) It must emit another photon in the Lyman series
(b) It may emit another photon in the Balmer series
(c) It need not emit any more photon
(d) It may emit another photon in the paschen series

216
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

57 In the Bohr model of the hydrogen atom. Let R,V and E represent the radius of the orbit, the speed of the
electron and total energy of the electron respectively. Which of the following quantity is proportional to the
quantum number n ?
(a) RE (b) VR (c) R/E (d) E/V

58 A particle of mass M at rest decays in to two masses m1 and m2 with non zero velocities. The particles

1 2 is

m1 m2 m1
(a) (b) 1 : 1 (c) (d)
m2 m1 m2

59 For an electron in the second orbit of Bohr Hydrogen atom, the moment of linear momenth is

h 2h
(a) (b) (c) h (d) 2h
 

60 If elements with principal quantum number n  4 were not allowed in nature, the number of possible
elements would have been
(a) 64 (b) 4 (c) 32 (d) 60

61 The experiment which proves the positive charges of the atom is concentrated with in a nucleus of size

10 15 m can approximately is

(a) Ruther ford’s experiment of alpha rays scattering
(b) Bohr’s theory of hydrogen atom
(c) Davission Germer experiment
(d) Heisenberg’s uncertainty principle
62 No two electrons will have all the four quantum numbers same this statement is known as
(a) Pauli exclusion principle (b) Uncertainty principle

(c) Hund’s rule (d) Auf ban’s principle

63 The idea of electron spin was introduced by

(a) Plank (b) Bohr

(c) Schoredinger (d) Uhlenbeck and Goudsmith

64 The hydrogen atom is in d- state for this state value of m1 are [magnetic orbital quantum number]

(a) 2, 1, 0 (b) -1, 0 1 (c) -2, -1, 0, +1, +2 (d) -3, -1, 0, 1, 3

65 A hydrogen atom is in P state for this state value of j (total angular quantum number) are
(a) 5/3, 3/2, ½ (b) 3/2, ½ (c) -1/2, +1/2, 3/2 (d) -1/2 , -3/2

66 The equation of motion of matter waves was derived by

(a) Heisenberg (b) Bohr (c) de Broglie (d) Schredinger

67 A cathode ray tube has a P.D of V volts between the cathode and anode then the speed v of the cathode rays
is given by

217
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

(a) v V (b) v  V 2 (c) v  V (d) v  1 V

68 A strong argument for the wave nature of cathode ray is

(a) Produce fluoresce (b) Travel through vacuum

(c) to cast shadow

(d) produce diffraction when made to pass through thin crystal grating

69 We know that cathode ray gain KE whey they are accelerated by an electric field if the cathode rays are
subjected to the action of magnetic field. They their
(a) energy increases (b) momentum increases

(c) PE increases (d) Energy and momentum remains unaffected

70 The twinkling effect of star light is due to

(a) high dense matter of state (b) total internal reflection

(c) the fluctuating apparent position of the star being slightly different from the actual position of state

(d) Constant burning of hydrogen in the star

71 When a low lying air craft passes over head, we some time notice a slight shakening of picture on our TV
screen this is due to
(a) Interference of direct signal received by the antenna with the weak signal reflected by the
passing air craft
(b) Vibrations created by the passage of aircraft
(c) Change of magnetic flux occurring due to the passage of air craft
(d) Diffraction of the signal received from the antenna
72 If 1 and 2 are the wavelengths of the first members of the Lyman and Paschen series respectively then 1

and 2 are the is

(a) 1 : 30 (b) 1 : 3 (c) 7 : 108 (d) 7 : 50

73 The working of which of the following is similar to that of a slide projector ?

(a) Scanning electron microscope (b) Atomic force microscope

(c) Electron microscope (d) Transmission electron microscope

74 Which of the following figure represents the variation of particle momentum and associated de Broglie
wavelength ?
(a) 3 (b) 1 (c) 2 (d) 4

75 In Thomson experiment to confirm the existence of electron waves accelerating voltage is increased from
1000 volt to 16000 volt radius R of the particular ring diffraction pattern becomes
(a) 16 R (b) R/16 (c) R/4 (d) 4R

218
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

76 Out put from ruby laser is due to transition from meta stable state to ground state of
(a) Aluminium atom (b) Cr atom

(c) xenon atom (d) nitrogen atom

77 Reason for the blue colour of sky is one of the following

(a) Sky is at great distance from us
(b) The dispersion of light inside our eyes
(c) Atmospheric particles absorbs shorter wavelengths more than the longer wavelength
(d) Atmospheric particle scatters blue light more than red light
78 For an astronaut in space ship the sky spears
(a) Black (b) White (c) Green (d) Blue

79 Under humid condition of the atmosphere sky would appear

(a) dull blue (b) deep blue (c) red (d) dark

80 Force acting on an electron in a Bohr orbit with quantum number n is proportional to

(a) n 2 (b) 1 n2 (c) n 4 (d) 1 n4

81 The ratio of energies of H-atom in its first to second excited state is

(a) 1 : 4 (b) 4 : 1 (c) 4 : 1 (d) 9 : 4

82 In Sommer field’s atomic model, corresponding to principal quantum number n  3 . There will be
(a) 3 elliptical orbits (b) 3 – circular orbit

(c) 1 circular and 2 elliptical orbits (d) 1 elliptical and 2 circular orbits

83 In Ramen spectrum spectral line having frequencies greater than incident frequencies are called
(a) Rayleigh lines (b) Strokes line (c) anti stokes lines

(d) Compton lines

84 At sun rise or at sun set sun appears to be reddish while at mid day it looks white, this is because
(a) Scattering due to dust particle and air molecules causes this phenomenon
(b) The sun is cooler at sun rise or at sun set
(c) Refraction causes this phenomenon
(d) Diffraction sends red rays to the Earth at these times
85 A piece of cloth looks red in sun slight, if it is held in the blue portion of a solar spectrum it will appear
(a) red (b) black (c) blue (d) white

86 Suppose an electron in attracted towards the origin by a force k/r where is a constant and r is the distance of

the electron from the origin. By appearing Bohr model to this system, the radius of the n th orbital of the

electron is found to be rn and the kinetic energy of the electron to be Tn . Then which of the following is

true?

219
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

1
(a) Tn  , ro  n2 (b) Tn  n, ro  n2
n

1
(c) T0 independent n, rn  n (d) Tn  , ro  n
n

87 If an electron in any hydrogen atom jumps from an orbit n1  3 to an orbit with level n f  2 , the frequency

of the emitted radiation is

36C CR 5RC 6C
(a) (b) v  (c) v  (d) v 
5R 6 36 R

Answers

1. b 2. b 3. c 4. c 5. c 6. d 7. a 8. b 9. b 10. b
11. b 12. c 13. b 14. d 15. d 16. b 17. a 18. a 19. a 20. d
21. c 22. c 23. b 24. b 25. d 26. b 27. a 28. a 29. c 30. c
31. b 32. c 33. d 34. a 35. c 36. c 37. d 38. d 39. a 40. c
41. c 42. c 43. a 44. b 45. c 46. a 47. b 48. c 49. a 50. d
51. a 52. c 53. b 54. a 55. b 56. a 57. b 58. b 59. a 60. d
61. a 62. a 63. d 64. c 65. b 66. c 67. c 68. d 69. d 70. c
71. a 72. c 73. d 74. a 75. c 76. b 77. d 78. a 79. a 80. d
81. a 82. c 83. c 84. a 85. c 86. c 87. c

220
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

NUCLEAR PHYSICS AND RADIOACTIVITY

Rutherford’s experiments on   ray scattering proved conclusively that an atom consists of a positively charged
nucleus in which most of the atomic mass is concentrated. After Chadwick’s discovery of the neutron, it was
postulated that the nucleus contains protons and neutrons.

Atomic nucleus
The nucleus contains protons and neutrons (collectively called nucleons). Protons are positively charged while
neutrons are electrically neutral. Mass of a neutron is slightly greater than that a proton

m p 
 1.6726  10 27 kg and mn  1.6749  10 27 kg . The number of protons in the nucleus is called the atomic
number Z of the atom. The number of protons and neutrons present in the nucleus is called the mass number A of

the atom.  A  Z  gives the number of neutrons in the nucleus. The atomic nucleus of an atom of atomic number

Z and mass number A is represented as Z X A. X being the chemical symbol of the given element. Thus 92U
236

contain 92 protons and 144 neutrons.

Nuclei with same atomic number but different mass numbers are called isotopes eg: 6C
11 and 6C
12 . Nuclei

having same mass number but different atomic number are called isobars. Eg: 8O
16 and 7N
16 . Nuclei with same

number of neutrons are called isotones. Eg: 7N

14 and
6C
13 .

Properties of the Nucleus

1. Average radius R of the nucleus is given by R  Ro A1 3 , where A is the mass number of the nucleus, Ro is a

constant  1.2 f m .1 f m  1015 m .

2. Charge on the nucleus of an atom of atomic number Z is given by q   Ze , where e  1.6  10 19 C .

3. Mass of a nucleus is called its nuclear mass. The nuclear mass of an atom of atomic number Z and mass
number A is M  Z m p   A  Z mn , where m p  mass of proton and mn  mass of neutron.

4. Nuclear density is the density of the nucleus. It is independent of its mass number. Nuclear density is of the

order of 1017 kg m 3 .

5. The resultant angular momentum of a nucleus is called its nuclear spin. It is the resultant of the spin and
orbital momenta of all the protons and neutrons present in it.

Nuclear magnetic moment is the resultant of the magnetic moments of the nucleons. It is related to the spin of the
nucleons.

eh
Nuclear magneton,  n   5.05  10  27 JT 1
4m p

Atomic Mass Unit

1 amu  1.661  10 27 kg

221
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

Mass of a proton, m p  1.0073 amu

Mass of a neutron, mn  1.0087 amu

Mass of an electron, me  5.486 104 amu

Einstein’s mass energy relation

Einstein showed that mass and energy are interconvertible. He gave the relation E  mc 2 . E is the energy
equivalent of the mass m. 1 electron volt is the unit of energy used in Nuclear Physics. 1 eV is the energy gained
by an electron when it is accelerated through a potential difference of 1 V.

1 eV  1.6  1019 J , 1 MeV  1.6  1013 J

Energy equivalent of 1 amu = 931 MeV

Nuclear forces
Nuclear forces are forces that hold the nucleons in a nucleus together. They are the strongest forces in nature.

Properties of Nuclear Forces

1. Nuclear forces are strongly attractive.
2. Nuclear forces are short range forces.
3. Nuclear forces are charge independent.
4. Nuclear forces are non – gravitational.
5. Nuclear forces are exchange forces.
6. Nuclear forces are non – central forces.
7. Nuclear forces have the property of saturation.

Mass defect
The rest mass of a stable nucleus is always less than the total mass of the constituent nucleons. The difference
between the sum of the masses of the constituents and the rest mass of the nucleus is known as mass defect.

If M is the experimentally determined mass of a nucleus whose mass number is A and atomic number is Z , then
the mass defect, m  Zm p   A  Z mn  M

MA
Packing fraction 
A

222
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

Binding Energy of a nucleus is the energy required to break the nucleus into its constituent particles. Binding

energy of nucleus  m c 2 , where m  mass defect. Binding energy per nucleon is called specific binding
energy.

Binding energy curve gives the following information:

1. Nuclei containing even equal number of protons and neutrons are stable while nuclei containing odd and
equal number of protons and neutrons are less stable than their neighbours.
2. Nuclei with mass numbers in the range 50 –120 are found to be very stable.

Nuclear fission
Hahn and Strassman discovered nuclear fission. Nuclear fission is a process in which a heavy nucleus splits into
two lighter nuclei of comparable masses releasing two or three neutrons and energy. A typical fission reaction is
represented by the equation:

92 U
235
 0n1  
92 U
236
 54Xe
140
 38Sr 94  20 n1  Energy

A chain reaction is a process in which the number of neutrons produced in fission goes on multiplying until all
the material disintegrates.

Critical size
A fissionable material of particular size for which chain reaction occurs at a constant rate is called critical size.

Nuclear reactor is a device in which a self-sustained yet controlled nuclear reaction can take place. Main parts of
a nuclear reactor are:

(1) Nuclear fuel (2) moderator (3) control rods

(4) neutron reflector (5) cooling system and (6) safety system

A moderator is a material used to slow down neutrons. It should have low atomic mass and not absorb neutrons.
Graphite, heavy water and Berylium are good moderators.

Control rods: Materials that absorb neutrons are used to control the chain reaction cadmium or boron are good
absorbers of neutrons.

223
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

Nuclear Fusion is a process in which two light nuclei combine to form a heavier nucleus with the release of
energy. A typical fusion reaction is represented by the equation

1H
2
 1H2  2He3  0n1  Energy

Nuclear fusion reactions take place only at very high temperatures. Hence they are also called thermonuclear
reactions.

Stellar energy
Bethe and Weizsacker provided a satisfactory explanation of the origin of solar energy on the basis of fusion of
hydrogen nuclei. Four hydrogen nuclei combine together to form a helium nucleus releasing energy. The set of
reactions is referred to as carbon cycle or proton – proton cycle.

The total energy released in a typical fission reaction is much more than that released in a typical fusion reaction.
But the energy released per unit mass in fusion is much more than that released in fission.

Radioactivity
The phenomenon in which heavy nuclei disintegrate spontaneously with the emission of certain radiations is
called radioactivity. Radioactivity was discovered by Becquerel. Marie and Pjerre Curie discovered two
radioactive elements namely polonium and radium. Radioactivity nuclei emit 3 types of radiations known as 

rays,  rays and  rays. These three types of radiations are collectively known as Becquerel rays.

Properties of radioactive Radiations

All of them affect photographic plates and produce fluorescence in certain substances.

Properties of  rays

1. They are positively charged. An  particle is a helium nucleus and consists of 2 protons and 2 neutrons. It
carries a charge + 2e and has a mass nearly four times that of a proton.
2. They are deflected by electric and magnetic fields.
3. They are emitted with a velocity  c 20 where c is the speed of light in free space.

4. They ionise gases through which they pass. Their ionizing power is about 100 times that of  rays and 10,000

times that of  rays.

5. They are scattered by nucleii of heavy elements.

224
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

6. They produce heating effect.

7. Their penetrating power is very small. They can be completely stopped by 0.006 cm of aluminium.

Properties of  rays

1.  particles are electrons.

2. They are deflected by electric and magnetic fields.

3. All  particles emitted by a radioactive nucleus do not have the same velocity.

Their velocities range continuously from 0.3 c to 0.99 c.

4. Their ionizing power is about 1/100th that of  rays and about 100 times that of  rays.

5. Their penetrating power is larger than that of  rays. They penetrate thin metal foils.

6.  particle is emitted by the nucleus of a radioactive substance. An electron does not exist in the nucleus. It is
formed at the instant of emission due to the conversion of a neutron into a proton, an electron and an
antineutrino.
Properties of  rays

 
1. They are electromagnetic waves of wavelengths 0.1 A to 0.01 A . Hence they travel with the velocity of light.
2. They are not charged. They are not deflected by electric and magnetic fields.

3. They ionise gases through which they pass. The ionization produced is 1/100 th that of  rays and 1/10,000 th

that of  rays.

4. They are more penetrating than  and  rays. They can pass through an iron plate 30 cm thick.

5. They destroy living tissue.

6. They produce photoelectric effect and Compton effect.

Soddy Fajan’s group displacement law states:

When a radioactive nucleus emits an  particle, the new element formed has an atomic number less by two and
mass number less by four than that of the parent nucleus. Thus the daughter element falls in a group two
columns to the left of the parent element in the periodic table.

For ex: 92 U
238
 90Th 234  2He4

When a radioactive nucleus emits a  particle, the new element formed has the same mass number and atomic

number one greater than that of the parent nucleus. The daughter element falls in a group one column to the
right of the parent element in the periodic table.

For eg: 90 Th
234
 91Pa 234  1e
0

225
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

Neutrino hypothesis
All  rays emitted from a given radioactive nucleus do not have the same energy. To explain this, Pauli proposed

that together with the electron another particle called the neutrino was emitted during  decay. Neutrino has no

charge, negligible mass and spin = 1/2 .

n  p  e   (  - antineutrino)

Antineutrino is emitted during negative  decay

p  n  e  u (  - neutrino)

Neutrino is emitted during positive  decay.

Law of radioactive disintegration

The rate of radioactive disintegration of a radioactive sample at any instant is directly proportional to the number
of nuclei present in the sample at that instant

dNt dNt
 Nt or  Nt
dt dt

 is the constant of proportionality. It is called the decay constant.

It can be shown that Nt  Noet

No  number of nucleii at t  0

Nt  number of nucelii remaining intact at time t .

1 1
Radioactive decay is exponential. When t  . Nt  No  0.37 No
 e

Decay constant of a radioactive substance is the reciprocal of the time during which the number of nucleii in the
sample reduces to 1/e or 37% of its initial value.

dNt
Activity of a radioactivity sample is its rate of disintegration. That is A   Nt
dt

A  Aoet , where Ao is the activity at t  0

Units of activity
1. S.I. unit of activity is becquerel (Bq). 1 Bq = 1 disintegration/s

2. Curie (1 Ci) = 3.7  1010 disintegrations/s

3. Rutherford 1 Rd   106 disintegrations/s

226
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

 
Half life T1 2 of a radioactive sample is the time taken for half the number of nucleii to disintegrate.

T1 2  0.693  .

 1 
1. After n half lives, number of nuclei remaining unchanged in the sample is  n  N o .
2 

2. If M t and Mo are the masses of a radioactive sample at t  t and t  0 , then M t  M oet .

Mean life  of a radioactive sample is the ratio of the total life times of all the individual nuclei to the total
number of nuclei present in the sample.

1
 and T1 2  0.693 


Artificial radioactivity
Jolit and Curie discovered artificial radioactivity. When boron is bombarded with  particles, an unstable nucleus

of nitrogen 7 N 13 is formed. It disintegrates into 6 C13 emitting a positron.

5B
10
 2He4  7 N13  0n1

7N
13
 6C13  1e0 (half life = 10.1 minutes)

7N
13 is the radio isotope of nitrogen. Radio isotopes are used in agriculture, industry biology, medicine and

geology.

227
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

Multiple Choice Questions

1. Isotopes are elements which have

(a) same atomic number but different atomic weight
(b) same atomic weight but different atomic number
(c) same values for both
(d) different values for both
2. When deuterium and helium are subjected to the accelerating field simultaneously
(a) both acquire the same velocity (b) deuterium accelerated faster

(c) helium accelerated faster (d) neither of them is accelerated

3. Mass of hydrogen nucleus is

(a) 0.0073 amu (b) 2.0072 amu (c) 1.0073 amu (d) 1.70 amu

4. About helium identify the correct statement

(a) radio active (b) very stable

(c) fissionable (d) change into hydrogen

5. A deuterium nucleus and helium nucleus are placed in the same electric field. The acceleration of the helium
is
(a) greater than that of deuterium (b) zero

(c) equal to that of deuterium (d) less than that of deuterium

6. Suppose if we convert the mass of the proton and a neutron completely into energies Ep and En

 
respectively, the E p  En is

(a) positive (b) zero (c) negative

(d) positive or negative depending on from which nucleus the proton and the neutron come from

7. The difference between the total mass of two neutrons and two protons and the mass of a helium nucleus is
0.031 amu. If this mass is completely converted into energy it will be equivalent to (take 1 amu

 1.6  1027 kg )

(a) 4.46  1012 J (b) 15.3 1011 J (c) 9  1013 J (d) 2.7  1012 J

8. If a carbon nucleus 6C
12 and an oxygen nucleus 8O
16 are both placed in the same electric field the

acceleration of oxygen is (assume mp  mn )

(a) equal to that of carbon (b) less than that of carbon

(c) thrice that of carbon (d) twenty seven times that of carbon

9. An atom of mass number 15 and atomic number 7 captures an  particle and then emits a proton. The mass
number and atomic number of the resulting atom will be

228
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

(a) 18 and 8 respectively (b) 16 and 4 respectively

(c) 17 and 6 respectively (d) none of these

10. Binding energy per nucleon for O 6 is 7.99 MeV and for O12 it is 7.95 MeV. Energy required to remove one

neutron form O 17 is
(a) 7.31 MeV (b) 0.06 MeV (c) 15.94 MeV (d) 0.04 MeV

11. Fertile material among the following is

(a) U 233 (b) U 238 (c) U 235 (d) Pu 239

12. A radioactive nucleus of mass number A splits into two nuclei whose mass numbers are in the ratio 8 : 5.
The ratio of radii of the nuclei is

(a) 5 : 8 (b) 8 : 5 (c) 2 : 5 (d) 2 : 5

13. Two protons can attract each other when they are

(a) 1010 m apart (b) 1015 m apart (c)  1015 m part (d)  1015 m apart

14. If two nuclei of masses m1 and m2 fuse to form a nucleus of mass m with the liberation of some energy.

Then
(a) m1  m2   m (b) m1  m2   m (c) m1  m2   m (d)

m1  m2   m

15. As the mass number increases, the quantity which remains same is
(a) volume (b) mass (c) binding energy (d) density

16. The radius of a nucleus with mass number 16 is 3 fm. The radius of another nucleus with mass number 128
is
(a) 6 fm (b) 12 fm (c) 18 fm (d) 24 fm

17. If the binding energies of 1H

2 , 2 He
4,
26 Fe
56 and 92U
235 nuclei are 2.22, 28.3, 492, 1786 MeV respectively,

identify the most stable nucleus of the following

(a) 26 Fe
56 (b) 1 H 2 (c) 92U
235 (d) 2 He 4

18. Thermal neutron can cause fission in

(a) U 235 (b) U 238 (c) Pu 238 (d) Th 232

19. In the nuclear reaction 2 He

4
 7 N14  1H 1 . Here X is

(a) nitrogen of mass number 16 (b) oxygen of mass number 17

(c) nitrogen of mass number 17 (d) oxygen of mass number 16

20. Fusion reaction takes place at high temperature because

(a) atoms are ionized at high temperature

229
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

(b) molecules break up at high temperature

(c) nuclei break up at high temperature
(d) kinetic energy is high enough to overcome repulsion at high temperature
21. To produce an electron position pair, the minimum energy of   ray photon must be

(a) 1.02 KeV (b) 1.02 MeV (c) 1.02 BeV (d) 1.02 eV

22. Identify the correct statement

(a) the energy released/ unit mass is more in fusion and the energy released/atom is more in fission.
(b) Both fission and fusion produce same amount of energy per atom as well as per unit mass
(c) The energy released per unit mass is more in fission than in fusion
(d) The energy released per atom is more in fusion than in fission

23. The specific binding energy of C 12 is 7.86 MeV and that for C 13 is 7.47 MeV. The energy required to remove

one neutron from C 13 is

(a) 0.52 MeV (b) 4.95 MeV (c) 1.24 MeV (d) 9.216 MeV

24. Nuclear energy is released in fusion since binding energy per nucleon is
(a) smaller for fusion products than for fusing nuclei
(b) larger for fusion products than for fusing nuclei
(c) same for both fusion products and fusing nuclei
(d) can’t say
25. A nuclear reactor has a power of 16 KW. If the energy released per fission is 200 MeV. Then the number of
fissions occurring per second

(a) 5  1014 (b) 5  1015 (c) 5  1016 (d) 5  1017

26. A nuclear reactor in which U 235 is used as fuel uses 2 Kg of U 235 in 30 days. Then power output of the
reactor will be (given : energy released per fission = 185 MeV)
(a) 43.5 MW (b) 58.5 MW (c) 69.6 MW (d) 73.1 MW

27. Particles which can be added to the nucleus without changing its chemical properties are
(a) electron (b) proton (c) neutron (d)  - particles

28. Binding energy of deuteron is 2.23 MeV. Its mass defect in amu is
(a) - 0.0012 (b) 0.0012 (c) 0.0024 (d) – 0.0024

29. Energy equivalent of 0.001 mg is

(a) 9  107 ergs (b) 9  107 J (c) 9  1010 J (d) 3  107 ergs

30. In a nuclear reaction, there is a conservation of

(a) mass only (b) energy only

230
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

(c) momentum only (d) mass, energy & momentum

31. The phenomenon of pair production is the

(a) formation of an electron and a position from  - rays

(b) electron emission by a metal surface under the action of radiation

(c) ejection of electron from a nucleus
(d) ionization of a neutral atom
32. Nuclear forces are mediated by
(a) proton (b) neutron (c) electron (d) meson

33. The first nuclear reactor was designed by

(a) Fermi (b) Rutherford (c) proton (d) neutron

34. Which of the following particle is unstable?

(a)  - particle (b) electron (c) proton (d) neutron

35. Fill up the following nuclear reaction 16 Si

32
 2 He4  17Cl35  ………..

(a) proton (b) neutron (c) position (d) electron

36. The nucleons are at a separation of one fm the net nuclear forces between them is F1 if both are neutrons F2 if

both are protons and F3 if one is proton and other is neutron. Then

(a) F1  F2  F3 (b) F1  F2  F3 (c) F1  F2  F3 (d) F1  F3  F2

37. The nuclei 7 N 14 and 6 C 13 are

(a) isotopes (b) isotones (c) isobars (d) isomers

38. The ratio of the diameters of atom to nucleus is bout 105 . Considering the density of ordinary matter to be 1
gm/cc the density of nuclear matter should be of the order of (in gm/cc)

(a) 105 (b) 1010 (c) 1015 (d) 1012

39. The mass defect of an atom of mass M , atomic number Z and mass number A, is given by
(a) M A (b) M ZA

(c)  A  Z M p 
(d) ZM p   A  Z mn  Zme  M 

40. Sharavathy hydroelectric project is expected to produce about 1000 MW of power this is equivalent to the
conversion of a certain mass of matter into energy completely say in a reactor. This amount is
(a) 4 Kg per second (b) 4 tons per hour
(c) 0.01 mg per second (d) 10.2 mg per second

41. The size of the nucleus is approximately given by the formula R  R0 A1 3 where R0  1.3 fermi. What is

approximately the volume of a Be8 nucleus?

231
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

(a) 7  1038 cc (b) 7  10 24 cc (c) 10 13 cc (d) none of these

42. The density of nuclear matter is approximately

(a) 103 kg  m3 (b) 2.5kg  m3 (c) 1018 kg  m3 (d) 1010 kg  m3

43. Avagadro number is 6.023 1023 per gm molecule. The atomic weight of silver is 107. The number of atoms
per gram silver is approximately?

(a) 6  1023 (b) 6  1021 (c) 107 (d) 3  108

44. Which is heavy water?

(a) water in which soap does not lather
(b) compound of heavy oxygen and hydrogen
(c) compound of deuterium and oxygen

(d) water at 4 o C
45. Gamma rays are
(a) single ionized gas atoms (b) helium nuclei

(c) fast moving electrons (d) electro magnetic waves

46. Beta rays emitted by a radioactive material are

(a) electromagnetic waves (b) electrons orbiting around the nucleus

(c) charged particles emitted by the nucleus (d) neutral particle

47.  -rays are defected by

(a) an electric field but not by a magnetic field

(b) a magnetic field but not by an electric field
(c) both electric and magnetic fields
(d) neither an electric field nor a magnetic field
48. State which of the following incorrect
(a)  - rays have highest penetrating power

(b)   rays have maximum ionization power

(c)  - rays have minimum ionizing power

(d)  - rays have minimum pevetrating power

49. Identify the correct statement

(a) mean life is greater than half life (b) mean life is less than half life

(c) mean life and half life are equal (d) none of those

50. The average number of the atoms disintegrated in a short interval of time due to radioactivity is
(a) directly proportional to the number of atoms present

232
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

(b) inversely proportional to the number of atoms present

(c) inversely proportional to the time interval
(d) independent of the number of atoms present
51. One of the uses of radio active isotope is
(a) in laser research (b) in tracer technique

(c) in nuclear bomb (d) in radio astronomy

52. The phenomenon of radioactivity is associated with

(a) decay of the nucleus (b) decay of the atom

(c) nuclear reaction caused by cosmic rays (d) nuclear fusion

53. Curie is the unit of

(a) radioactivity (b) magnetization

(c) rate of chemical reaction (d) temperature

54. The radioactive substances have their activity in the ratio 1:3:5. The substances are heated to double the
temperature and double the pressure. Then activities will be in the ratio
(a) 5 : 3 : 1 (b) 3 : 1 : 5 (c) 3 : 5 : 1 (d) 1 : 3 : 5

55. Half life of a radio active isotope may be decreased by

(a) decreasing the mass present (b) reducing the temperature

(c) reducing the pressure (d) none of the above methods

56. Radio isotope used to study thyroid gland is

(a) carbon (b) cobalt (c) iron (d) iodine

57. When a proton in a radio active nucleus becomes a neutron, the emitted particle is
(a) meson (b) positron (c) electron (d) neutrino

58. When an  - particle captures an electron, it becomes

(a) a helium ion (b) a  -particle (c) a helium atom (d) a hydrogen atom

59. Mean life of radio active element is one year. Then its half life in years is
(a) 0.5 (b) 0.8 (c) 1 (d) 0.693

60. An atom of mass number A and atomic number Z emits successively an  - particle, a  - particle and a  -

ray. The mass number and atomic number of the end product are
(a) A – 1, Z – 4 (b) A, Z + 1 (c) A – 4, Z – 2 (d) A – 4, Z - 1

61. When an atom emits a  -particle, the new atom formed is …………..of the parent atom

(a) isomer (b) isotope (c) isobar (d) isotone

62. The end product of neptunium series is

233
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

(a) lead (b) bismuth (c) nickel (d) none of these

63. Induced radio activity is discovered by

(a) madam curie (b) Becquerel

(c) Rutherford (d) Joliot curie and Irine curie

64. Fraction of the sample decayed in a time equal to the average life

e  1  1  e 1 1
(a) (b) (c) (d)
e e 1  e  e

65. The decay constant of radioactive substance is  . Its half life is given by
(a) log10 2   (b) loge 2  (c)  log 2 10 (d) 1 

66. The artificial transmutation of elements was discovered by

(a) Bohr (b) Ruther ford (c) Becquerel (d) Curie

67. The radio isotope used in the treatment of caner is

(a) Carbon (b) Iodine (c) Phosphorous (d) cobalt

68. The particle having maximum penetrating capacity is

(a) electron (b) proton (c) neutron (d)  -particle

69. A given sample contains 16g of radioactive material whose half life is 2 days. The quantity of radioactive
material that remains after 32 days will be

1 1 1
(a) g (b) g (c) g (d) less than 1 mg
2 8 4

70. What is the percentage of original radioactive atoms is left after 3 half lives
(a) 3 % (b) 12.5 % (c) 8 % (d) 15%

71. Half life of a radioactive material is 30 min. If the radiation emitted by if have intensity 32 times the
permissible safe level, minimum time after which one can work with the material safely is
(a) 2 hr (b) 2.5 hr (c) 3 hr (d) 3.5 hr

72. Which of the following emits an  -particle?

(a) 91 Pa
234
 92U 234 (b) 82 Pb
214
 83Bi214

(c) 92U
238
 90Th234 (d) 90 Th
234
 83Pa234

73. Two radioactive substances A and B initially contain equal number of atoms. A has half life 1 day and B has
half life 2 days. After 4 day the ratio of activity of A to that of B is
(a) 1 :2 (b) 2 : 1 (c) 1 :1 (d) 1 : 4

234
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

74. Decay constant of radium is 1.07  104 per year. Its half life is approximately
(a) 2520 years (b) 6472 years (c) 7010 years (d) 8900 years

75. The nucleus 92 X

234 emits 3 -particles and then one  -particle. The end product will be
(a) 84 Y
222 (b) 87 Y
228 (c) 84Y
228 (d) 87 Y
222

76. To treat skin diseases the radio isotope used

(a) Cr – 51 (b) Fe – 56 (c) I – 131 (d) P – 30

77. A radio active sample with a half life 1 year has activity 2  Ci . Its activity 2 years earlier was

(a) 1 Ci (b) 0.5 Ci (c) 4  Ci (d) 8  Ci

78. A radio active material consists of two types of radioactive species of populations N1 and N2 each decaying

with constants 1 and 2 respectively. The total activity is

(a) A  1  2 N1  N2  (b) A  1N1  2N2

(c) A  1N2  2N2 (d) A  1N1  2N2

79. Count rate for the radiations of a radioactive material of half life 30 min decreases to 5s 1 after one hour.
The initial count rate was

(a) 20 s1 (b) 40 s1 (c) 30 s1 (d) 50 s1

80. In the reaction Z X A  Z 1Y A  Z 1P A4 nuclear radiations are emitted in the sequence

(a)  ,  ,  (b)  ,  ,  (c)  , ,  (d)  ,  ,

81. Amount of original radioactive atom left after 5 half lives will be
(a) 20 % (b) 10% (c) 5% (d) 3%

82. Decay constant of radioactive isotope of Co57 is 3  108 s1 . Number of disintegrations taking place in one

milligram of pure Co57 in one second are

(a) 3  106 (b) 3  107 (c) 3  1010 (d) 3  1011

83. Half life of a radioactive element X is same as the mean life of another radioactive element Y. If initially both
have same number of atoms then
(a) X – decay faster than Y (b) X and Y decay at same rate

(c) Y – decay faster than X (d) initial decay rare of X and Y are same

84. Two radioactive materials X1 and X2 have decay constants 10  and  respectively. Initially they have the
1
same number of nuclei. Then the ratio of the number of nuclei of X1 to that of X 2 will be , after at time 1 e
e
1 1 1 11
(a) (b) (c) (d)
9 10 11 10

235
 Department of Physics, S J C Institute of Technology, Chickballapur

85. Half life of a substances is 20 minutes what is the time between 33% decay and 67% decay?
(a) 20 min (b) 25 min (c) 30 min (d) 40 min

86. Distance of closest approach when 5 MeV proton approaches a gold nucleus is
(a) 16 fm (b) 23 fm (c) 39 fm (d) 47 fm

87. Fraction of the element decayed during its mean life will be

1 log e
(a) e (b) 1/e (c) 1  (d)
e N

88. Radioactive decay occurs as follows. If a certain mass of radon – 220 is allowed to decay in a certain
container after 5 minutes the element with greatest mass will be
220
86 Rn  82 Pb216  2 He4 [Half life = 55s]

84 P0
216
 82 Pb212  2 He4 [Half life = 0.168]

82 Pb
212
 83B212  1e
0 [Half life = 10.6 hours]

(a) radon (b) polonium (c) lead (d) bismuth

Answers

1. a 2. b 3. c 4. b 5. c 6. c 7. a 8. a 9. a 10. a
11. b 12. d 13. d 14. c 15. d 16. a 17. a 18. a 19. b 20. d
21. b 22. a 23. b 24. b 25. a 26. b 27. c 28. c 29. b 30. d
31. a 32. d 33. a 34. d 35. a 36. d 37. b 38. c 39. d 40. c
41. a 42. c 43. b 44. c 45. d 46. c 47. d 48. d 49. a 50. a
51. b 52. a 53. a 54. d 55. d 56. d 57. b 58. a 59. c 60. d
61. c 62. d 63. a 64. b 65. b 66. d 67. c 68. d 69. b 70. b
71. b 72. c 73. d 74. b 75. d 76. d 77. d 78. b 79. a 80. d
81. c 82. 83. c 84. a 85. a 86. b 87. c 88. c

236